JP2018140097A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of a player toward games.SOLUTION: Ball entrance means is provided at positions where a game ball shot in a first direction and a game ball shot in a second direction can enter. For a variation pattern to be set to variable means, on the basis of an establishment of a first condition, a first variation pattern is determined in which the game ball sot in the first direction becomes easier to enter the ball entrance means than the game ball shot in the second direction. On the other hand, on the basis of an establishment of a second condition, a second variation pattern is determined in which the game ball sot in the second direction becomes easier to enter the ball entrance means than the game ball shot in the first direction. On the basis of an establishment of the first condition or the second condition, a specific presentation in a presentation mode difficult to understand which of the first condition and the second condition is established is performed by specific presentation performance means. In this way, there is an effect that amusement of a player toward games can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 96

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a variety of entertainment effects are executed to improve the entertainment of the game.

JP 2003-325886 A

  However, further improvement of interest is required.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a game ball can be fired at least in a first direction and in a second direction different from the first direction, and the launching means includes the first means. A specific area provided at a position where the game ball fired in one direction and the game ball fired in the second direction can reach, and a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter A predetermined first condition is defined as a ball entry means provided, a variable means provided in the specific area and capable of variable operation with a predetermined variable pattern, and a variable pattern set for the variable means. Based on the establishment, the game ball that has been launched in the first direction and has reached the specific area enters the entrance means, rather than the game ball that has been launched in the second direction and has reached the specific area. Decide the first variable pattern that makes it easier to sphere Then, based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, a game ball that has been launched in the first direction and has reached the specific area is launched in the second direction to enter the specific area. Based on the variable pattern determining means for determining the second variable pattern that makes it easier for the reached game ball to enter the entrance means, and the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect of an effect mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first variable pattern is a game ball that is launched in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to enter the entrance means, and it is difficult for a game ball launched in the second direction during the specific period to enter the entrance means, and the second variable pattern is: A game ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied becomes difficult to enter the entry means, and is launched in the second direction during the specific period. The played game ball can enter the entrance means, and the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at least during the specific period.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition and a discrimination result by the discrimination means And a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means with the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the execution of the variable game is completed when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1. A first game state advantageous to the player is set as a later game state, and when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the execution of the variable game is performed. Game state setting means is provided for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the game ends.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the variable game is executed by the variable means during the execution of the variable game as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means. A first variable game in which one variable pattern is set is determined at a first ratio, and a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is a second ratio higher than the first ratio. Variable game type determining means for determining in (1).

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game ball is launched in the first direction by the launching means capable of firing at least the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction, and the launching means. A specific area provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can be reached, and an entry provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter. Based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is established as a ball means, a variable means provided in the specific area and capable of variable operation with a predetermined variable pattern, and a variable pattern set for the variable means Thus, a game ball that has been launched in the first direction and has reached the specific area is easier to enter the entrance means than a game ball that has been launched in the second direction and has reached the specific area. 1 variable pattern is determined, and the first condition Based on the fact that the second condition is different, the game ball that has been launched in the second direction and has reached the specific area is more than the game ball that has been launched in the first direction and has reached the specific area. Based on variable pattern determination means for determining a second variable pattern that makes it easy to enter the ball entry means, and the first condition or the second condition, the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect of an effect mode in which it is difficult to identify which one is established.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first variable pattern is arranged in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied. The launched game ball can enter the entrance means, and the game ball launched in the second direction during the specific period is difficult to enter the entrance means, In the second variable pattern, it is difficult for a game ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied to enter the entrance means, and during the specific period. The game ball fired in the second direction can enter the entrance means, and the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at least during the specific period. .

  Thereby, it is possible to realize the gameability in which the player can predict the direction in which the player can easily enter the ball entry means, and the game ball is fired for a specific period in the predicted direction. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in the game of the person.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination by the determination means Variable game execution means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means based on the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means based on the determination result.

  Thereby, every time the determination by the determination means is executed, there is an effect that a game can be performed in anticipation of a specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 3, when the game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game of 1, the variable When the first game state advantageous to the player is set as the game state after the execution of the game is finished, and the game ball has not entered the entry means during the execution of the variable game, Game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed.

  Thus, during the execution of the variable game, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, so that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the variable game can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 3 or 4, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, during the execution of the variable game A first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set in the variable means is determined at a first ratio, and a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is determined based on the first ratio. Variable game type determination means for determining at a higher second ratio.

  This allows the player to predict the shooting direction that is easy to enter the ball entry means, taking into account the rate at which the type is determined by the variable game type determination means, thus improving the interest of the player in the game There is an effect that can be.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of 3 symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the continuous transformation effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of successful transformation in the continuous transformation effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of successful transformation in the continuous transformation effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of transformation failing in the continuous transformation effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the transition effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) shows the time-dependent change of the effect aspect of an expansion effect typically. It is a figure. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect when the variable display to which the continuous transformation production was set is performed in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first per-type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed content of the second random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified content of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (d) is the definition content of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is the figure shown typically. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. . (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the transformation effect selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) shows the prescription | regulation content of the development effect aspect selection table in 1st Embodiment typically. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transformation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transformation production start determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effective period performed. It is a flowchart which shows the process in success notification aspect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in failure notification aspect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the transition effect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the round performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the number command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation production related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect when the variable display by which the continuous transformation production with the maximum number of transformations of 4 was performed in 2nd Embodiment was performed. It is. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. is there. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the transformation effect selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the audio | voice lamp control in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the development effect aspect selection table set to ROM of the apparatus, (c) is prescription | regulation of the period selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content typically. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process 2 during the effective period performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process during the display period performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp | ramp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the transformation | conversion possibility determination table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the expansion effect aspect selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the audio | voice lamp in 4th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of the transformation possibility determination table set to ROM of the control apparatus, (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for pressing tendency in 4th Embodiment, ( d) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a non-pressing tendency table in the fourth embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process 4 during the effective period performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in execution of the search effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is an effect in the fifth embodiment when a player who has been determined to have a low participation frequency for a continuous transformation effect is playing a game and a variable display with a continuous transformation effect is executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the time-dependent change of an aspect, (b) is the state in which the player determined that the participation frequency with respect to a continuous transformation effect is high is playing a game in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of the fluctuation display to which the continuous transformation production was set. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the effective period frequency set in ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the prescription | regulation content of the table typically. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transformation production start determination process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process 5 during the effective period performed by MPU. It is the flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process in alerting | reporting aspect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process 5 in transition effect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing tendency update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect of the transition effect in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. (A) is the front perspective view which showed the case where the left specific winning opening in 6th Embodiment is a state which can enter a ball, (b) is a right specific winning opening in 6th Embodiment. It is the front perspective view which showed the case where it is in the state where a ball | bowl is possible. (A) is a top view of each movable member in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a top view of each movable member in the state by which movable member 650Rb in 6th Embodiment is arrange | positioned in the protrusion position. (C) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment is disposed at the protruding position. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the main control in 6th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of an apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of a 6th embodiment. (A) is a top view of the moving member in the modification of 6th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the moving member in the modification of 6th Embodiment, (c) is 6th Embodiment. It is a side view of the moving member in the modification of a form, (d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b in the modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball in the state in which the moving member and the left specific winning opening are close to each other in the modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the sixth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball in the state where the moving member and the right specific winning opening are close. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the probability variation prize apparatus of the game board 13 in 7th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the probability variation prize apparatus in the XCIV-XCIV line | wire of Fig.94 (a). (A) is the figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball | bowl when the open pattern of right V is determined in 7th Embodiment and the player left-handed, (b), (c) is It is the figure which showed the flow-down direction of the game ball | bowl when the open pattern of right V is determined in 7th Embodiment and a player performs a right strike. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection effect performed in the 1st round of jackpot in 7th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member when the open pattern of right V is set in 7th Embodiment, (b) is left V in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member when an open pattern is set. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment, (b) is the 1st per category selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. (C) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change prize command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the movable member in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the movable member in 8th Embodiment, (c) is the movable member in 8th Embodiment. It is a side view at the time of seeing from the front view left side. (A) is the front perspective view which showed the state by which the movable member in 8th Embodiment is arrange | positioned in the intermediate position, (b) is the movable member in 8th Embodiment arrange | positioned in the protrusion position. It is the front perspective view which showed the state. (A) is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position when the movable member in 8th Embodiment is moved by the movable pattern A, (b) is the movable pattern B in 8th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position at the time of moving by. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the structure of the rotation member in the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the flow-down path | route of the game ball | bowl right-handed in 9th Embodiment for every movable position of an electrically-driven accessory. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 9th Embodiment, (b) is the 2nd per category selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 9th Embodiment. (C) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory operation | movement start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 9 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the detouring accessory in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in jackpot displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment. (A) is the front perspective view which showed the state by which the opening / closing door of the right variable prize-winning apparatus in 11th Embodiment was closed, (b) is the opening / closing door of the right variable prize-winning apparatus in 11th Embodiment open | released. It is the front perspective view which showed the state in the middle of being performed. (A) is sectional drawing which showed the state by which the door of the right variable prize-winning apparatus in 11th Embodiment was opened completely, (b) is the door of the right variable prize-winning apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which showed the state closed completely. (A) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the state of the right specific winning opening when the open pattern which can win V in the eleventh embodiment was set, (b) In an embodiment, it is a figure showing typically change with time of a state of a right specific prize opening when an open pattern which is difficult to win V is set. In 11th Embodiment, it is the figure which showed the state of the opening-and-closing door in one opening period in case the opening pattern which can win V is set in detail. In 11th Embodiment, it is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of the start of 1 round of jackpot in which the open pattern which can be V-winned is set. It is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the probability variation prize apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the state of the movable member in jackpot game in the modification of 7th Embodiment, and each flow-path distribution valve. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a “sand beach stage” and a “deep sea stage”. ing. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “sand beach stage” → the “deep sea stage” ”→“ Sand Beach Stage ”→ ... repeatedly changed in this order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “sand beach stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the lower dish 50 when viewed from the front, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower dish 50 downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the normal symbol (second (Design) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. In addition, the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a lot of balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the first entrance 64. Easy state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”.

  In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, a special gaming state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds is set. When the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol (during special symbol change) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next special symbol jackpot. On the other hand, after the “big hit B” is completed, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times as an added value.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is referred to as “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is in a normal state (a state in which the hit probability is lower than in short time).

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot is common regardless of the jackpot type, and after the jackpot ends according to the jackpot type, it becomes a “high probability state of the special symbol” Or “ordinary symbol time-short state”. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the jackpot type. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. Further, as a short time state of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is lengthened, or the number of times the electric accessory 64a is released per one normal symbol is increased. Also good.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Is done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. The third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is composed of ten special symbols that imitate numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display.

  In addition, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the main display area Dm. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbol composed of odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to “probability variation”. When a “big hit A”, which is a 16R probability variation big hit, may occur, the same probability variation symbol combination may be stopped and displayed. A main symbol composed of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to a “normal symbol”. When a “big hit B”, which is a 16R normal big hit, always occurs, the same normal symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, even in the case of “big hit A”, the same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed. Thereby, even when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be expected that the jackpot A has been reached.

  It should be noted that the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable symbol display in the symbol columns, The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol.

  A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm in front view. The small display area Dm4 is configured to be able to easily display the variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect that a predetermined character performs an action or an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is executed. It is a case. While the display effect is being executed, an effect that is easier to understand can be provided by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm. In addition, it is easy for the player to continue the variable display of the third symbol by simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 during execution of the display effect. Can be understood.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 4B, a reserved symbol composed of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is suspended up to 4 times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of times of reserved balls. In this embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to four, a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed in the secondary table display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is varied corresponding to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a continuous transformation effect that is one type of display effect in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The continuous transformation effect is a display effect that may be executed when a reach state occurs during the variable display of the third symbol. Here, the reach state refers to a state in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the main symbols composed of the same numbers, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is being displayed in a variable manner. In the reach state, the player can recognize that there is a possibility that three identical symbols may be gathered by stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2, thus improving the player's expectation for the jackpot Can do.

  The continuous transformation effect is an effect that is executed to further improve the player's expectation for the jackpot after the reach state has occurred. Although details will be described later, the boy's display in the main display area Dm is performed. The character 811 (see FIG. 5A) transforms 0 to n times (where n is a natural number of 1 or more) according to the passage of time or the player's operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 (the mode is changed). It is a production. This continuous transformation effect is basically a configuration in which the degree of expectation that is a big hit increases as the number of transformations of the character 811 increases, and the character 811 may transform five times at the maximum.

  It should be noted that the maximum number of transformations in one continuous transformation production (production type of continuous transformation production) is determined in advance before the continuous transformation production is started. More specifically, any number of 1 to 5 times is determined by lottery using a transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A) described later. This continuous transformation effect is terminated when the transformation time of the predetermined upper limit number of times is successful or the production time set for each production type of the continuous transformation effect is reached before the upper limit number of times is reached. The In the first embodiment, the maximum number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect is determined by lottery using the transformation effect selection table 222b. That is, the maximum number of transformations is determined according to the production type of the continuous transformation production, but this is not limited to this, and the maximum transformation frequency can be decided before starting the continuous transformation production. That's fine. Specifically, for example, the upper limit number of continuous transformation effects may be set according to the number of fluctuations after the previous jackpot ends. If the upper limit is increased as the number of fluctuations increases, the player can feel the merit of continuing to be out of the special symbol lottery. Even if a state of continuing detachment (so-called hooking) occurs, it can be suppressed that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. In addition, when the maximum number of times is increased as the number of fluctuations is smaller, if the player wins a big hit at a short interval (becomes a so-called consecutive resort), he / she feels merit other than winning a prize ball. So that the player can be more entertained. Furthermore, if the upper limit is increased in a specific range (for example, the range of fluctuation is 100 to 200), the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific range can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a transformation development mode indicating that this continuous transformation production is started (development into a continuous transformation production) is displayed. is there. As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, a boy character 811 is displayed at the lower center of the main display area Dm, and a display area having a horizontally long rectangular shape is displayed above the character 811. HR1 is displayed. In the display area HR1, characters “continuous transformation chance” and characters “expectation level increases as the number of transformations increases!” Are displayed. The “continuous transformation chance” is a production name indicating a continuous transformation production. With these characters displayed in the display area HR1, the player can easily understand that a continuous transformation opportunity (continuous transformation effect) is started. This transformation development mode is displayed for one second, and when one second has elapsed, a continuous transformation production is started.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, a small display area Dm4 for easily displaying the variation display of the third symbol is formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm. Is done. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the variable display is continued. This simple display of the third pattern continues during the production time of the continuous transformation production and the subsequent development production.

  In the continuous transformation effect set after the display time of the transformation development mode has elapsed, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 1) is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, a horizontally elongated display area HR2 is displayed on the left side of the character 811 in the main display area Dm, and a frame button 22 is imitated inside the display area HR2. The displayed image (PUSH button PB) is displayed. Further, below the PUSH button PB in the display area HR2, a hatched scroll bar SB that is shortened as time passes is displayed. The scroll bar SB indicates the remaining time of the operation valid period in which the operation on the frame button 22 is validated. In this embodiment, since the operation effective period is set to 5 seconds, the scroll bar SB takes 5 seconds after the operation effective period is started and becomes 0 in length. By displaying the scroll bar SB, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the operation effective period.

  In the present embodiment, the remaining time until the operation valid period ends is displayed (suggested) by the length of the scroll bar SB. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the remaining operation valid period can be recognized by the player by displaying the remaining number of seconds as it is and counting down as time elapses. Further, for example, the remaining time may be suggested to the player by changing the coloring of the PUSH button PB imitating the frame button 22 in accordance with the remaining operation effective period. Specifically, for example, when the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the color of the push button PB is displayed in blue, and when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the color of the push button PB is changed. When the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the color of the push button PB is displayed in yellow. When the remaining time is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the push button PB is displayed. If the color is displayed in orange and the remaining time is less than 1 second, the color of the push button PB may be displayed in red. Further, the remaining time until the operation valid period ends does not necessarily have to be suggested to the player. Since the display control can be simplified by omitting the suggestion display of the remaining time of the operation valid period, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition to the display area HR2, a balloon-type display area HR3 with characters “PUSH is transformed!” Is displayed on the right side of the character 811 in front view. Based on the display contents of these display areas HR2 and HR3, let the player recognize that there is a possibility that the character 811 may be transformed (the aspect of the character 811 changes) by pressing the frame button 22 Can do.

  Further, on the lower right side of the display area HR3, a horizontally elongated display area HR4 for indicating the total number of times the character 811 has transformed in the current continuous transformation effect is formed. In the display area HR4, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, characters “transformation × 0” are displayed. This character is updated according to the number of successful transformations. Specifically, when the character 811 succeeds in transformation once, the character is updated to “transformation × 1”, and when transformation is successful twice, the character is updated to “transformation × 2”. Similarly, when the number of transformations is 3, the text is updated to “transformation × 3”, and when the number of transformations is 4, the text is updated to “transformation × 4”. When the number of times becomes 5, it is updated to the characters “transformation × 5 times”. By confirming the characters displayed in the display area HR4, the player can easily understand the number of times of transformation in the current continuous transformation effect.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the display form of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22 within the set operation valid period and the character 811 succeeds in transformation. is there. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the operation effective period, the display area HR2 is changed to an appearance that the push button PB is pressed, and the operation effective period ends. . Further, the mode of the character 811 is changed to a mode imitating an adventurer who possesses a sword and a shield, for example. In the display area HR4, 1 is added to the character indicating the number of times of transformation and updated. FIG. 6A illustrates a case where the information is updated to “transformation × 1”. The mode (success notification mode) for notifying that the transformation has succeeded continues for 1 second, and after the success notification mode ends, the operation valid period is set again. Thereafter, the operation effective period and the success notification mode are repeated until the number of transformations reaches the upper limit or the production period elapses.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a case where the player does not press the frame button 22 within the set effective period and the transformation is successful. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached and the production time remains for a predetermined period (the remaining fluctuation time is predetermined). If it is determined that it is equal to or greater than the lower limit time), the success notification mode is executed when the operation valid period has elapsed. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined lower limit time is defined in the transformation effect selection table 222b in association with the production type (maximum number of transformations) of the continuous transformation effect.

  Whether the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period or the frame button 22 is not pressed until the operation effective period elapses, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached, and the remaining variation time If it is equal to or longer than the predetermined lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed. However, in this embodiment, when all the transformations are executed with the passage of the operation effective period, the production period elapses before the upper limit number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production period is set to be. In other words, the operation effective period is set such that the sum of the operation effective period for the upper limit number of times (and the effect period for the success notification mode for the upper limit number of times) is longer than the effect period for the continuous transformation effect.

  By configuring in this way, in each operation effective period set in one continuous transformation effect, if the character 811 is not transformed before the operation effective period elapses by pressing the frame button 22, the effect type It is impossible to execute the maximum number of transformations set for each time. Further, the shorter the period from the start of the operation effective period to the time when the frame button 22 is pressed, the earlier the start timing of the operation effective period set thereafter, so the number of executable transformations can be reduced. , It can be increased within the upper limit range. Therefore, the player who wants to perform the upper limit number of transformations (that is, to perform as many transformations as possible) can actively press the frame button 22 during each operation effective period. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit number of transformations is high). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect passes with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, when the number of times of transformation is small, the number of times of transformation ends when the production period elapses despite the fact that the maximum number of times is high (that is, the expectation of jackpot is high). Can be generated. Thereby, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example in the case where the success notification mode is changed to a mode different from the adventurer. In the example of FIG. 7A, the case where the character 811 has transformed into a mode imitating a gunman at the third transformation count is illustrated. In the first embodiment, a plurality of modes corresponding to the number of transformations are prepared, such as a mode imitating the gunman and a mode imitating the adventurer described above.

  In the first embodiment, the mode when transformation is successful is fixed according to the number of transformations, but is not limited to this. For example, every time the success notification mode is performed, the mode of the character 811 may be determined by lottery or the like. Thereby, since the variation of a continuous transformation effect can be diversified, the interest with respect to a player's continuous transformation effect can be improved. Further, when determining the mode of the success notification mode by lottery or the like, it is easy to be determined in the mode that can be determined only in the case of the variable display that is a special symbol jackpot, or in the case of the variable display that is a special symbol jackpot It is good also as a structure which provides the aspect etc. which become easy to determine in the case of the fluctuation | variation display used as a mode and a special symbol. By configuring in this way, not only the number of times of transformation, but also the display mode of the character 811 when transformation is successful can be played and the game during the continuous transformation effect can be performed.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when a mode (failure notification mode) for notifying that the transformation has failed is displayed in the continuous transformation effect. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the transformation fails, the PUSH button PB in the display area HR2 is displayed in a split state and the character 811 is displayed with a disappointed expression. Further, on the upper right side of the character 811, a display area HR <b> 5 in which the characters “End ...” are displayed. With these displays, it is possible to recognize that the continuous transformation effect has ended (the number of transformations has been determined).

  In the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, the process proceeds to the development effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit. A plurality of types of development effects are provided, and one type of development effect is selected and executed in accordance with the remaining variation time and whether or not the current special symbol is selected. The details of this development effect will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a display form of a transition effect indicating a transition from a continuous transformation effect to a development effect. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, an image in which the character 811 and the monster 812 are mixed together is displayed in the main display area Dm, and “ A display area HR6 with the letters “VS” is displayed. In the display area HR1, characters “Defeat enemies !!” are displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the character 811 is a big hit by defeating the enemy (ie, the monster 812).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, the display area HR7 is displayed below the monster 812. In this display area, one or a plurality of stars indicating the expected degree of the development effect executed after the transition effect is completed is displayed. FIG. 8A illustrates a case where two stars are displayed. The number of stars is the same as the number of transformations in the continuous transformation production. Although illustration is omitted, the mode of the monster 812 can be changed in conjunction with the number of stars (that is, in conjunction with the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect). In other words, the larger the number of stars, the weaker the monster 812 is displayed (that is, the character 811 is likely to win). The smaller the number of stars, the stronger the monster 812 is displayed ( That is, the character 811 is displayed in such a manner that the character 811 is likely to win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player an impression that the result of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) and the subsequent development effect are linked. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the number of times of transformation in the continuous transformation effect (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) suggests a degree of expectation that is a big hit.

  In this transition effect and the failure notification mode described above (see FIG. 7B), the length of the display period is varied according to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed. This is because the development period of each development effect is fixed (any one of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds), whereas the continuous transformation effect starts. This is because the period required until the operation valid period ends varies depending on the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. Therefore, in this embodiment, the remaining variation time is determined at the timing when the operation effective period ends (that is, the start timing of the failure notification mode), and the development effect of the longest production period that can be executed with the remaining variation time is selected. To do. And it is set as the structure which performs a failure alerting | reporting aspect and a transition effect using the difference period of the remaining fluctuation time and the production period of the selected development effect. Thereby, since the variation of the production time of the development effect can be reduced, the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition effect according to the remaining change time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining change time at the start of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It can suppress that it arises. In other words, the remaining variation time is longer, the variation of the third design does not stop even though the development effect has ended, or conversely, the development period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the variation of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the variation display of the third symbol, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of incongruity. Note that the mode shown in FIG. 8A is shown during the period in which the transition effect is set so that the transition to the development effect does not become unnatural regardless of how many seconds the effect time of the transition effect is set. On the other hand, it is configured not to cause a large change in aspect. That is, the image illustrated in FIG. 8A is displayed as a still image, or the change of the mode is such that the character 811 and the character 812 periodically raise and lower their shoulders according to their breathing ( Configured to take no special action). As a result, the display mode when switching to the development effect can be made the same regardless of the execution period of the transition effect, so that the player feels strange when switching from the transition effect to the development effect. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, a change with time in the effect mode of the development effect will be described. Here, in the first embodiment, 12 types of hit development effects A to F and off development effects A to F are provided as the development effects. Both the winning and losing development effects A are display effects having an effect period of 30 seconds, and both the winning and losing development effects B are display effects having an effect period of 33 seconds. In the same manner, the win and miss development effects C to F are configured as display effects for the effect periods of 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds, respectively. At the end of the last operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect, the development effect of the longest effect period is selected within the range not exceeding the remaining fluctuation time.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the first embodiment, data of a display effect (base effect) that is a source for executing the development effect is prepared. This original display effect (base effect) has a display period of 45 seconds, and by executing the effect from the beginning or midway of the original display effect (base effect), the corresponding effect It is configured to be able to execute the period development effect. In other words, the development effects are not prepared separately for each performance period, but are configured to generate development effect data for each display period using data of one base effect. By configuring in this way, data for executing the development effect can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the character 811 is zoomed for the first 3 seconds of the base effect. Then, in the next 3 seconds, an effect in which the character 811 attacks the monster 812 is executed. Next, a display mode in which the enemy monster 812 is zoomed is displayed for 3 seconds, and then a display mode in which the monster 812 attacks the character 811 is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, after displaying the display mode in which the face of the character 811 and the face of the monster 812 are zoomed in for 3 seconds, the character 811 and the monster 812 fight each other intensely, and the victory or defeat of the battle An effect for notifying (result) is displayed for 30 seconds. Thus, the base effect is roughly divided into five display modes for 3 seconds and one display mode for 30 seconds. By starting the display effect from the separation position of any of these display modes, the development effect can be displayed without a sense of incongruity.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), in the case of performing the hit and off-development effect A, by displaying the display mode for 30 seconds after the lapse of 15 seconds in the base effect, A development effect with a performance period of 30 seconds is executed. Similarly, in the case of executing the hit and off development effect B, the display mode of 33 seconds after 12 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and in the case of executing the hit and off development effect C, the base is displayed. The display mode for 36 seconds after the passage of 9 seconds in the effect is displayed. In addition, when executing the hit and off development effect D, the display mode of 39 seconds after 6 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when executing the hit and off development effect E, the base effect is displayed. The display mode for 42 seconds after the elapse of 3 seconds is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of executing the winning and losing development effect F, the development effect for 45 seconds is executed by displaying the base effect from the beginning to the end.

  In addition, the base effect is provided with a plurality of display effects in addition to the above-described aspect of battle with the monster 812. Which display effect is used to execute the development effect is determined by lottery. Each of the original display effects has a jackpot mode and a release mode.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the base effect is configured to be diverted even after execution of the continuous transformation effect. In other words, after the reach state occurs, it is possible to notify whether or not a big hit will be made by executing the base effect directly or through another notice effect without going through the continuous transformation effect. . Thereby, since the versatility of the base effect can be enhanced, data necessary for executing the effect can be reduced. Further, even when the base effect is executed without using the continuous transformation effect, the effect can be executed from the beginning or midway of the base effect in accordance with the variation time of the variable display to be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect using the base effect even for a variable display of different variable times.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, a base effect for displaying the development effect is prepared, and the number of the development effects is set in the base effect at a place where the effect is well separated. Each delimiter is set so that the remaining production time matches the production time of each development production. Thereby, it is possible to provide a natural-looking display effect over the effect time of each development effect. In addition, by constructing an execution effect in which a plurality of effect times are different from one original effect mode, it is possible to compare the case where separate effect data is prepared for each type of effect effect (effect time). Data necessary for displaying each development effect can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, a plurality of development effects having different production times can be executed based on the base effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which performs the display effect from which a display mode differs completely according to the production time of an expansion effect. With such a configuration, the development effects can be diversified, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, the change over time in the display mode when the continuous transformation effect is set as the display effect will be specifically described. In FIGS. 9A and 9B, description will be made by taking as an example a case where a continuous transformation effect with an upper limit number of transformations of three is set. First, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a change in the timing of the effect mode when the player never presses the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the continuous transformation effect is set during the execution period of the variation effect (super reach) whose variation time is 60 seconds. In the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, the variation display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm for 10 seconds from the start of the variation (see FIG. 4B). Then, at the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, a transformation state (see FIG. 5 (a)) suggests to the player that a reach state has occurred and that it will develop into a continuous transformation effect over one second. Is displayed.

  When the display period of the transformation development effect elapses, an operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation is set. When the player does not press the frame button 22, this operation valid period continues for 5 seconds (from the start of fluctuation until 16 seconds have passed). Then, the first successful notification mode is displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed. This success notification mode lasts for 1 second, and when 1 second has passed (17 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the success notification mode ends and an operation valid period corresponding to the second transformation is set. The This second operation valid period also continues for 5 seconds (from 17 seconds to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation) unless the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, after the one-second success notification mode is set, the third operation valid period is set. This third operation valid period also continues for 5 seconds (over 23 to 28 seconds after the start of fluctuation) if the frame button 22 is not operated. The remaining fluctuation time is short (the remaining fluctuation time is less than 38 seconds set as the lower limit value) at the timing of 28 seconds (the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds) after the start of the fluctuation when the operation effective period ends. ) And the failure notification mode for 1 second is set even if the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached. That is, although the upper limit number of transformations is set to three, the continuous transformation effect ends when the number of transformations is two.

  Note that the conditions for determining whether or not sufficient performance time remains to set the success notification mode is defined by a transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A) described later. Specifically, according to the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (that is, according to the production type of the continuous transformation effect), the lower limit value (threshold value) of the remaining variation time that can set the success notification mode is defined. Yes. When the operation effective period is ended in a state where the remaining fluctuation time exceeds the lower limit value, the success notification mode is set on the condition that the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached. On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends after the remaining fluctuation time becomes less than the lower limit value, the failure notification mode is set regardless of whether or not the upper limit number of transformations has been reached.

  Next, referring to FIG. 9 (b), when the continuous transformation effect with the maximum number of transformations of 3 is set and the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, The change will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the operation effective period corresponding to the first transformation, when pressing of the player's frame button 22 is detected when 1 second has elapsed (12 seconds from the start of change) The operation valid period is terminated and the first successful notification mode is displayed. When 1 second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses, an operation valid period corresponding to the second transformation is set (at the time of 13 seconds from the start of fluctuation). In the second operation effective period, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected again when 1 second has passed (14 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the operation effective period is similarly terminated and the second operation effective period The success notification mode is displayed. And when 1 second which is a display period of a success alerting | reporting mode passes (at the time of 15 seconds from a fluctuation | variation start), the 3rd operation effective period is set. If a press on the frame button 22 is detected when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the third operation effective period (17 seconds from the start of change), the remaining change time is sufficient (43 seconds). Since it remains, the third successful notification mode is displayed. Thereafter, when the display period of the third successful notification mode has elapsed, the fourth operation valid period is set. If the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected again at the time when 2 seconds have elapsed (at the time of 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) in the fourth operation effective period, the upper limit of the number of transformations for the current continuous transformation effect is already set. Since it has been executed, the failure notification mode is set.

  The display period of the failure notification mode (and the transition effect after the failure notification mode) is determined based on the difference between the remaining variation time of 40 seconds and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect. As described above, as the type of development effect, the type of the longest effect time is selected within a range not exceeding the remaining variation time. In the case where the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, taking into account the failure notification mode and the shortest display period of the transition effect, 2 seconds, the maximum 38 seconds can be used for the development effect. However, as described above, there are only six development times of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds. Therefore, the development effect (development effect C) for 36 seconds, whose effect period is shorter than 38 seconds, is set as this development effect. Then, 4 seconds, which is the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the development period C of 36 seconds, is set as the failure notification mode and the transition effect display period. Specifically, 4 seconds are equally divided, and 2 seconds is set as the display period of the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect.

  In this way, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the production time of the development effect is absorbed by the display period of the failure notification mode and the production period of the transition effect, so that the variation of the production time of the development effect Even if there is a small amount, it is possible to reliably match the timing of stopping the fluctuation with the end timing of the development effect. Thereby, since the variation of the production time of the development effect can be reduced, the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition effect according to the remaining change time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining change time at the start of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It can suppress that it arises. In other words, the remaining variation time is longer, the variation of the third design does not stop even though the development effect has ended, or conversely, the development period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the variation of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the variation display of the third symbol, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of incongruity.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the failure notification mode start timing is reached with the remaining fluctuation time being 40 seconds, 2 seconds each is set as the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect. . Then, after the end of the transition effect, the development effect C having an effect time of 36 seconds is executed. Thereby, the timing at which the variation of the third symbol is stopped (the timing at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation) and the end timing of the development effect can be exactly matched.

  Thus, when the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation effective period, the operation effective period can be shortened and more success notification modes can be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it becomes easy to perform transformation up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so that the expectation degree of the production can be predicted more accurately from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can positively press the frame button 22, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit number of transformations is high). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect passes with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, when the number of times of transformation is small, the number of times of transformation ends when the production period elapses despite the fact that the maximum number of times is high (that is, the expectation of jackpot is high). Can be generated. Thereby, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are made variable so that the gap between the remaining variation time and the effect time of the development effect can be absorbed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the production period of the failure notification mode may be fixed, and only the display time of the transition production may be varied. Conversely, only the production period of the failure notification mode may be varied. Further, the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect may be fixed, and a part of the effect period of the development effect (for example, a period during which the third symbol is fixedly displayed) may be variable.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol and the symbol “×” are alternately lit. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is kept for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured so that a ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the first entrance 64, but is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more ( For example, it may be set to 8 times. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hit) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first per-random number counter C1, but the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 11B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B). Further, a jackpot B is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99” (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a win.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the special symbol lottery are set. Specifically, if the special symbol is in a probable variation state, it is determined in the special symbol lottery whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 9”, and “0 to 0” is determined. If it is any of “9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 “0 to 399”, the judgment value that is a big hit is 10 “0 to 9”. Probability becomes 1/40 (10/400). If the special symbol is in a low probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “200”, and if it is “200”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 “0 to 399”, the judgment value that is a big hit is only one of “200”, so that the special symbol has a low probability state. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a jackpot stored in the first per-random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first per-random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, in this first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A” (FIG. 11). (See 202b1 of (b)). The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B” (see 202b2 in FIG. 11C). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that, as described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the same as that of the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  Here, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 12A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12B) and an out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 12C). ) And a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12D) are set at least.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with variation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is associated with various types of super reach. Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of “180 to 198”. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Further, for outreach, various types of outreach normal reach (30 seconds) are within the range of the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 149”, and various types of outreach reach are within the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), “198” is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol probability variation state. In the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. If within the range of “90 to 99”, the detachment reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit when it matches the value of the winning random number set by the second random number table. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 11 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-28” (FIG. 11 (c). ) 202c1). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be set.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204” (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 30), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e and an hour / medium counter 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display holdings in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) for the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 27: No).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The initial state of the probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF, and is set to ON when the special symbol jackpot A ends (see S1014 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, when a special jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, it is set to OFF when setting the jackpot start (see S213 in FIG. 23).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to. If the state is ON, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for the high probability, while the state of the probability variation flag 203e If is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 24).

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110. When the big hit B is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the big hit B. (See S1013 in FIG. 31). In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if the jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the value is set to 0 while setting the jackpot start.

  When a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203f and the state of the probability change flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability change flag 203e is on. If so, it is determined that the normal symbol is short. In this case, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per-random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal state is a normal symbol, and based on the second per random number table for low probability, A normal symbol lottery is performed (see S510 in FIG. 26).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. And a solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a, etc. are connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. First, FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a transformation effect selection table 222b, and a development effect mode selection table 222c.

  The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify a detailed display mode of the variation effect based on a rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the main controller 110. It is done. More specifically, when a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by main controller 110 is received, one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation) is selected from the fluctuation patterns defined in fluctuation pattern table 222a. The detailed display mode of the effect is extracted (specified) (see S5003 in FIG. 42). Of the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 222a, at least the variation pattern corresponding to the super reach with the variation time of 60 seconds is used to determine whether or not to execute the above-described continuous transformation effect (see FIGS. 5 to 7). Information to indicate is also included.

  The transformation effect selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect when a variation pattern with a continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. Details of the transformation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), the transformation effect selection table 222b defines the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect for each type of variation pattern (whether or not) and the value of the effect counter 223n provided in the RAM 223. Yes. As shown in FIG. 15A, five types of continuous transformation effects A to E are set as the production modes of the continuous transformation effects.

  The continuous transformation effect A is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification modes) is one, and no lower limit value of the remaining variation time that can be transformed is set. For this reason, when the continuous transformation effect A is executed, the failure notification mode is displayed after the success notification mode is displayed once regardless of whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. Is displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 15A, the continuous transformation effect A may be selected only in the case of winning super-reach and when the value of the effect counter 223n is “0”. . That is, if the maximum number of times of transformation is 1, it is determined that the continuous transformation effect A is a big hit in the variable display set. As described above, in the continuous transformation effect, as the number of transformations (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) increases, the expectation of jackpot increases. Only, the jackpot is determined exceptionally. Thereby, an unexpected production can be provided.

  The continuous transformation effect B is a continuous transformation effect with the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode), and in the hit super reach, the value of the production counter 223n is in the range of “1-19”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of outlier super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “0 to 44”. Since the production counter 223n is a loop counter that is updated in the range of “0 to 99”, the continuous transformation production B is a ratio of 19% (19/100) in the case of super reach when the continuous transformation production is determined. On the other hand, it is determined at a rate of 45% (45/100) in the case of outlier super reach where the continuous transformation effect is determined. For this reason, the rate of determining the continuous transformation effect B is higher in the outlier super reach (the expectation of jackpot is low).

  In the continuous transformation effect B, the lower limit value of the remaining variation time that can be transformed is set to 41 seconds. Here, the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect starts when the remaining variation time is 49 seconds (when 11 seconds have elapsed since the start of variation, see FIGS. 9A and 9B). Therefore, if the period from the setting of the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the second operation effective period is not suppressed within 8 seconds (49 seconds-41 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The number of display stops once. That is, if the operation effective period set for the first time and the second time is not canceled halfway by pressing the frame button 22, the lower limit value of the remaining variation time that can be transformed in the middle of the second operation effective period is set. Will be lower. As a result, if the operation effective period is not terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, whether the number of times of transformation has been set by setting the continuous transformation effect A or the continuous transformation effect B is set. It becomes impossible for the player to tell whether the number of transformations is one. As described above, the continuous transformation effect A is an effect in which the jackpot is confirmed, while the continuous transformation effect B is an effect with a low degree of expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to accurately know the expected degree of jackpot by discriminating whether it is the continuous transformation effect A or the continuous transformation effect B, so the frame button is positively given to the player during the operation effective period. 22 can be pressed.

  The continuous transformation effect C is a continuous transformation effect with the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode), and in the hit super reach, the value of the production counter 223n is in the range of “20 to 44”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of outlier super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “45 to 89”. Therefore, the continuous transformation effect C is determined at a rate of 25% (25/100) in the case of super-reach when the continuous transformation effect is determined, while 45 in the case of outlier super-reach where the continuous transformation effect is determined. % (45/100). For this reason, the rate of determining the continuous transformation effect C is higher for outlier super reach (the expectation of jackpot is lower). Moreover, since the ratio determined in the case of the hit super-reach is higher than the continuous transformation effect B, the expectation that the continuous transformation effect C is a big hit is higher than the continuous transformation effect B.

  In the continuous transformation effect C, the lower limit value of the remaining variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds. Therefore, if the period from the setting of the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation effective period is not suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The number of times of display stops twice. This is because when the operation effective period is expired without pressing the frame button 22, the second operation effective period ends just after the elapse of 11 seconds (first operation effective period 5 seconds + 1). The second successful notification mode 1 second + the second operation effective period 5 seconds). As a result, if the operation effective period is not terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22, it is the continuous transformation effect C, or the continuous transformation effects D and E having a higher jackpot expectation than the continuous transformation effect C described later. It becomes impossible for a player to tell if there is. Thus, the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the current variable display from the number of times of transformation (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) can be made to positively press the frame button 22.

  The continuous transformation effect D is a continuous transformation effect with a maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification modes), and in the hit super reach, the value of the production counter 223n is in the range of “45 to 79”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of outlier super reach, the value is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of “90 to 98”. Therefore, the continuous transformation effect D is determined at a ratio of 35% (35/100) in the case of the super-reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, whereas the continuous transformation effect D is 9 in the case of the out-of-super-reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. % (9/100). For this reason, in the hit super reach, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect D is determined is higher (the expectation of the big hit is higher). In addition, compared to the continuous transformation effects B and C, the ratio determined in the case of hit super-reach is high and the ratio determined in the case of outlier super-reach is low. Compared with C, the expectation level that is a big hit is higher.

  In the continuous transformation effect D, the lower limit value of the remaining variation time that can be transformed is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effect C. Therefore, if the period from the setting of the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation effective period is not suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The number of times of display stops twice. In addition, even if the period until the third operation effective period ends can be suppressed to within 11 seconds, if the period until the fourth operation effective period ends exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode Will be stopped three times. This makes it impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish between the continuous transformation effects C to E unless the effective operation period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22. Thus, the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the current variable display from the number of times of transformation (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) can be made to positively press the frame button 22.

  The continuous transformation effect E is a continuous transformation effect with the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode), and in the hit super reach, the value of the production counter 223n is in the range of “80 to 99”. Selected. On the other hand, in the case of outlier super reach, it is selected only when the value of the effect counter 223n is “99”. Therefore, the continuous transformation effect E is determined at a ratio of 20% (20/100) in the case of the super-reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, whereas the continuous transformation effect E is 1 in the case of the outlier super-reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. % (1/100). For this reason, in the hit super reach, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect E is determined is higher (the expectation of the big hit is higher). Moreover, since the ratio determined in the case of outlier superreach is extremely low as compared with the continuous transformation effects B to D, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit as compared with the continuous transformation effects B to D becomes high.

  This continuous transformation effect E is a type in which transformation of the largest number of times can be executed among the production types of continuous transformation effects. In the continuous transformation effect E, when the transformation is successful five times, the failure notification mode is not displayed after that, and the direct transition effect is performed after the display period of the fifth success notification mode elapses (FIG. 8). (See (a)) is started.

  In the continuous transformation effect E, the lower limit value of the remaining variation time that can be transformed is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effects C and D. Therefore, if the period from the setting of the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation effective period is not suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is set. The number of times of display stops twice. In addition, even if the period until the third operation effective period ends can be suppressed to within 11 seconds, if the period until the fourth operation effective period ends exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode Will be stopped three times. Furthermore, even if the end timing of the operation effective period up to the fourth time is suppressed to within 11 seconds, if the end timing of the fifth operation effective period exceeds 11 seconds, the display count of the success notification mode is 4 It becomes a round stop. This makes it impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish between the continuous transformation effects C to E unless the effective operation period is terminated by actively pressing the frame button 22. Thus, the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the current variable display from the number of times of transformation (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) can be made to positively press the frame button 22.

  Thus, five types of effects are provided in the continuous transformation effect of the present embodiment. Each production type is configured so that the upper limit number of transformations is different, and the jackpot expectation degree can be suggested by the number of times the character 811 has transformed (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed). Further, regarding the continuous transformation effects B to E, the upper limit number of transformations cannot be displayed unless the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation effective period to end the operation effective period. It is configured. This allows the player who wants to know the expected level of continuous transformation production accurately to actively press the frame button 22 during the operation effective period, so the player's willingness to participate in the game Can be improved.

  In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit number of transformations is high). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect passes with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, when the number of times of transformation is small, the number of times of transformation ends when the production period elapses despite the fact that the maximum number of times is high (that is, the expectation of jackpot is high). Can be generated. Therefore, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced.

  Returning to FIG. 14A, the description will be continued. The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table in which the development mode of the development effect is defined. This development effect mode selection table 222c is referred to when the last operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect ends, and is used to determine the mode of the development effect based on the remaining variation time. Details of the development effect mode selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the development effect mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the development effect mode selection table 222c includes the remaining variation time (remaining variation time T) and the type of variation display this time (whether it is an outlier superreach or a hit superreach. There is specified for each type of development effect to be selected.

  Specifically, if the remaining variation time T is in the range of 32 seconds ≦ T <35 seconds at the end of the last operation effective period, the development effect with the effect time of 30 seconds is selected. In other words, if the current variable display is a win super reach, the hit development effect A for 30 seconds is selected.

  Further, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 35 seconds ≦ T <38 seconds and the current fluctuation display is a hit super-reach, the development effect B for a turn-around time of 33 seconds is selected, and the super-reach is lost. If there is, the development development effect B whose production time is 33 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 38 seconds ≦ T <41 seconds, and the current fluctuation display is a win super-reach, the play development effect C of the play time of 36 seconds is selected. Then, the development effect C out of the production time of 36 seconds is selected.

  Similarly, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in a range of 41 seconds ≦ T <44 seconds and the current fluctuation display is a win super-reach, a play effect D of a play time of 39 seconds is selected and a super-reach out If so, the development effect D with a production time of 39 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 44 seconds ≦ T <47 seconds, and the current fluctuation display is a win super-reach, the play development effect E of the play time of 42 seconds is selected. The development effect E with a production time of 42 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 47 seconds ≦ T <48 seconds and the current fluctuation display is a win super reach, the hit development effect F with a play time of 45 seconds is selected. The development effect F out of the production time of 45 seconds is selected.

  As described above, in order to prevent the end timing of the change display from being shifted from the end timing of the development effect, the remaining change time T and the effect time of the development effect selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c. The display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are made variable in accordance with the difference. Thereby, regardless of the length of the remaining fluctuation time T, the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the fluctuation display. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Next, details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the RAM 223.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and an effective Period flag 223e, valid period timer 223f, transformation counter 223g, transformation effect flag 223h, success notification mode timer 223i, failure notification mode timer 223j, transition effect time timer 223k, and development effect storage area 223m And an effect counter 223n are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected in the main controller 110, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S4908 in FIG. 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4902 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5002 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (see S4002 in FIG. 33) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4905 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5009 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (see S5011 in FIG. 42).

  The effective period flag 223e is a flag that indicates whether or not it is within the period of the operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect. If the effective period flag 223e is on, it means that the operation is in an effective period, and if it is off, it means that the operation is not in an effective period. The effective period flag 223e is set to ON when it is determined that the start timing of the continuous transformation effect is reached (see S4403 in FIG. 37A). Also, when the display period of the success notification mode has elapsed and it is determined that the number of display of the success notification mode (the number of transformations) is less than 5, it is set to ON (see S4605 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period, and when 5 seconds set as the operation effective period elapses without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the setting is turned off. (See S4201 in FIG. 35). While this valid period flag 223e is on, pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is treated as valid. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the validity period flag 223e is on, a transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is executed.

  The effective period timer 223f is a timer for counting the remaining time of the operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect. When the start condition of the effective period is satisfied (when the start timing of the continuous transformation effect is reached or the end timing of the success notification mode is reached), a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds is set for this effective period timer 223f. ) Is set (see S4403 in FIG. 37 and S4605 in FIG. 38). When the timer value of the effective period timer 223f is 1 or more, during the effective period, the main period process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 37 (b) ))), The value is subtracted (updated) by one. It is determined whether or not the operation effective period has elapsed based on the value of the effective period timer 223f. When it is determined that the operation effective period has elapsed, a transformation setting for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is displayed. Processing (see FIG. 35) is executed.

  The number-of-transformation counter 223g is a counter for counting the number of times that the success notification mode (see FIGS. 6 and 7A) is displayed in one continuous transformation effect (the character 811 has succeeded in transformation). The counter value of the transformation number counter 223g is incremented (updated) by one every time the success notification mode display is determined. In the continuous transformation effect in the first embodiment, the transformation is performed depending on whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is the upper limit value (see FIG. 15A) determined for each production type of the continuous transformation effect. It is determined whether or not the upper limit number of times has been reached (see S4203 in FIG. 35). As described above, the success notification mode for the upper limit number of transformations is displayed, and if the operation valid period ends thereafter, the failure notification is performed regardless of whether the lower limit value of the remaining fluctuation time has been reached at the end time. A mode is displayed. Thereby, since the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations in each production type of the continuous transformation effects can be differentiated, it is possible to suggest the expectation level that is a big hit by the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations.

  The transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the continuous transformation effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that the continuous transformation effect is being executed, and if it is off, the execution of the continuous transformation effect is executed. Means not in the middle. Here, the execution of the continuous transformation effect means a period from the end of the transformation development mode (start of the first operation effective period) to the end of the transition effect (start of the development effect). The transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation, which is the start timing of the transformation effect, in the variation display in which the execution of the continuous transformation effect is determined ( (See S4404 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to OFF when it is determined that the transition effect display period has elapsed (see S4804 in FIG. 40).

  The success notification mode timer 223i is a timer for measuring the display time of the success notification mode. When the success notification mode display condition is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the success notification mode is set for the success notification mode timer 223i. As described above, the condition for displaying the success notification mode is that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is less than the upper limit number set for each production type of the continuous transformation effect, and at the end of the operation effective period. The remaining variation time is equal to or longer than the lower limit time determined for each type of continuous transformation effect. In the success notification mode timer 223i, when it is determined that the display timing of the success notification mode is reached, a timer value (1000) corresponding to one second is set (S4212 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the success notification mode process executed every millisecond (see S4601 in FIG. 38). .

  The failure notification mode timer 223j is a timer for measuring the display time of the failure notification mode. When the failure notification mode display condition is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode is set for the failure notification mode timer 223j. As described above, the condition for displaying the failure notification mode is that the display number of the success notification mode is equal to or greater than the upper limit number set for each production type of the continuous transformation effect, or the operation valid period is ended. The remaining change time at the time is less than the lower limit time set for each type of continuous transformation effect. The failure notification mode timer 223j is determined to have reached the display timing of the failure notification mode, and when the development effect production mode is selected, the failure notification mode timer 223j has a display time corresponding to the remaining variation time and the development time production time. A corresponding timer value is set (see S4208 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the failure notification mode process executed every millisecond (see S4701 in FIG. 39). .

  The transition effect time timer 223k is a timer for measuring the display time of the transition effect. When the transition effect display condition is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the transition effect display period is set for the transition effect time timer 223k. The display of the transition effect is started when the display time of the failure notification mode elapses or when the display time of the fifth success notification mode elapses in the continuous transformation effect E. In the transition effect time timer 223k, a timer value corresponding to the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect is set at the start of the transition effect (S4610 in FIG. 38, FIG. 39, S4704). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the transition effect in-process executed every 1 millisecond (see S4801 in FIG. 40).

  The development effect storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of development effect. In the development effect storage area 223m, the development effect is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) according to the remaining variation time based on the end of the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect. When the production mode is selected, data corresponding to the production mode is stored. At the start of the transition effect, the mode (effect time) of the development effect is determined from the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m, and the difference time between the remaining change time and the effect time of the development effect is displayed. Set as time. At the end of the transition effect, the type of the development effect to be started is specified based on the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m.

  Note that the data corresponding to the type of development effect is composed of, for example, 4-bit data, and is used as an area for storing, for example, data indicating the variation time in the first to third bits and data indicating whether or not the fourth bit is correct. . Specifically, if the first to third bits are “001B”, the development time is 30 seconds, the development time is “010B”, the development time is 33 seconds, and “011B” is If there is, the development effect with a production time of 36 seconds is shown. Further, if “100B”, the effect time is 39 seconds, the effect time is “101B”, the effect time is 42 seconds, and if “111B”, the effect time is 36 seconds. Demonstrate development. If the most significant bit (4th bit) is 1 (high), it means that it is a development effect corresponding to the hit, and if the most significant bit (4th bit) is 0 (low), it is off. It means that it is a development effect corresponding to. Therefore, for example, if the data “1010B” is stored in the development effect storage area 223m, the development effect of this time is a development effect that is a success in the production time of 33 seconds (that is, a successful development effect B). Means.

  The effect counter 223n is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223n is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and is updated by incrementing by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed. . The production counter 223n has a separate counter for each production type.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a (for example, 2 kilobytes). In the NOR flash memory 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed first is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d is stored in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. The ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is first set from the NOR flash memory 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address designated by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. The instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c from the program and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are NOR flash. The reason for storing in the memory 234d is as follows. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR flash memory 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are NOR flash. By storing in the memory 234d, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program that is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. A program and a program in the work RAM 233 for fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored without storing all the boot programs in the NOR flash memory 234d, and the remaining boot programs Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 43).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 17 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 17B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 18B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B is prepared in the character ROM 234 as an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image. And the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage is the entire back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage of the sandy beach stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the sandy beach stage displayed frequently is displayed in the rear image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the deep sea stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation 22, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed in the third pattern display by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or color tone should not be changed over time. It is possible to display et al. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) imitating the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312 and a male character 313 are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state, and notifies the player of the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the greater the chance that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will also be more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. . Therefore, since the chances of the electric symbol 64a being released due to the big win of the normal symbol increase, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so that the electric symbol 64a is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the first. As it becomes easier to enter the entrance 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a sense of expectation that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the sub symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set. The display data table corresponding to each game menu screen is also stored in this data table storage area 233b.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table (variation display data table) for variation effect among the display data tables. A display data table such as a variable display data table is associated with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) when an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame to be displayed at that time are defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. The drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of the character and the character used for various effects, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The back surface type is either a back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A and B as the drawing target when the rear surface type is specified to display either the rear surface A or B. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 19). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 20 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 20).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 43). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 55 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 45B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 55A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 56) for transferring image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 45 (b)). In step S6303), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 21) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 21, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third design (symbol 1, design 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol) and various comments.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite is placed on the backmost side (the backmost drawing layer), and the last drawn sprite is the frontmost side (the foremost drawing layer). It can be arranged in. When the comment display function is on, the image arranged on the forefront side (the foremost drawing layer) is a character image that constitutes a comment. By placing the comment on the forefront side (frontmost drawing layer), the player can make the comment more clearly visible to the player.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 56). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104) as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning a prize at the entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0. (S204: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S209: No), the display mode of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S210), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the processing of S211 is finished, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is reset to OFF, and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213) to set the start of the jackpot (S214). If the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S214, when the jackpot control processing (S904) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and an opening command is set. Is done. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215), If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating a special symbol variation stop is set (S217), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol certain variation state. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability state).

  When the probability variation flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol certain variation state, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first value for the high probability time are displayed. Based on the per random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the first per-random number acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table for low probability. Only “200” is set as the random value that is a special symbol jackpot, and if the value of the first random number counter C1 matches “200”, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A , The jackpot type B) is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B), and “50 If it is in the range of “˜99”, it is determined that the jackpot is B (short jackpot at 16R) (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) as described above. When the process of S307 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, normal reach, by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12). Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as super reach. When the process of S309 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

  In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 30). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (winning) is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered (wins) the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reservation number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the process of S406, prediction of whether or not the lottery for the special symbol (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and this process is terminated.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of the display showing the hit and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal symbol time-short state (S508). Specifically, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the hour / short state, and the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, If the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (not the short-time state).

  In the process of S508, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S508: Yes), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507, the second per-random number table for high probability, Based on this, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S508 that the normal symbol is not in the time-short state (S508: No), the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second per-second for low probability Based on the random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S511: Yes). The display mode for hitting is set (S512). In the processing of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S511 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S511: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

  In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S514). If the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S514: Yes), the variation display variable time in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S514: No), the variation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516). Exit. In this way, except when the special symbol is a big hit, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol with a low probability. The lottery frequency of symbols increases. Therefore, since the frequency of winning in the normal symbol lottery increases, the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. It becomes a state.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S515 or the processing of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S517, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol is not selected and the display mode is set by the processing of S513, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S519). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in a short time state (S520), and if it is determined that the current symbol is in a short time state (S520: Yes), “1 second × 2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64, and the process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S520 that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the short time state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 Then, “0.2 seconds × 1 time” is set, and the process proceeds to S523.

  In the process of S523, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the process of S520 to S523 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d If it is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S812 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is retained in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) or the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, execution of the big hit effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. Note that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S906). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 24), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 24). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the processing of S515 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) or the processing of S516, the second symbol display device 83 Start the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S512 of normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) or the processing of S513 ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed, the power-off process after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 29). When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) S214 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1007, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1009, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), it is then determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011). If it is determined (S1011: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot A (S1012).

  In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the jackpot is not A (that is, jackpot B) (S1012: No), the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is overwritten with 100, so that 100 normal symbols are displayed after the jackpot ends. The setting is made so that the short time period is given (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1015. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1012 that the current jackpot is a jackpot A (S1012: Yes), the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot ends by turning on the probability variation flag 203e. (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

  In the process of S1013 or the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol (whether the special symbol is probable or the special symbol is in a low probability state) after the jackpot is over is spoken. A status command for notification to the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S4018 (see FIG. 33) is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4015: Yes in FIG. 33), it executes a power-off process in S4018. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4017 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  In the process of S3902, if the power-off process flag is off (S3902: No), this startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down or after a momentary power failure occurs. Started after completing the power-off process in S4018, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to S3904, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the process proceeds to S3908.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the flow proceeds to S3904. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4018, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the process proceeds to S3908.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S3902: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S4018, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3904, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3904, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3904). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3906). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S3908, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4018 is executed (see S4017 in FIG. 33). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4018 is executed, the current startup process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4018 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3909), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3910), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S3911), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S3908 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S3904 to S3906. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), S3909, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S3910, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3910), and interrupt permission is set. In step S3911, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S3909 is that when the process from S3904 to S3906 is reached via the process of S3906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3904, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S4001 was executed (S4001). If not (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4013 without performing the processes in S4002 to S4012. In the process of S4001, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S4002 to S4012 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4013 and the process for updating the variation display setting process in S4014 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S4014 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S4003 to S4014 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S4002). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4008 described later (S4003), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S4004). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4005 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S4007). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed is monitored, and an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is set. That is, it is a process for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S4008), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4009, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4010), and then a menu setting process is executed (S4011). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4009 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. In the menu setting process, a process according to the operation content of the player when the game menu screen is displayed is executed.

  After the process of S4011, during the execution of the variable display, an effect update process for changing the effect mode according to the remaining variable time, various timer values, etc. is executed (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. . Details of this effect update process (S4012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4013, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4013). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the command determination process is completed, a variable display setting process is executed (S4014). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4014 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4015). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4015 (S4015: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S4017), and the power interruption processing is executed (S4018). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4019), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4016: No), the process returns to S4001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4016: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the frame button input monitoring / production process (S4007) executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect process. This frame button input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 34) is a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting the production corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed as described above.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 34), first, it is determined whether or not the effective period flag 223e is on (S4101). If it is off (S4101: No), it is not the operation effective period. This process is terminated as it is. This is because there is no possibility of displaying the failure notification mode or the success notification mode even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected if the operation is not valid.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4101 that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4101: Yes), it means that the current period is the valid period of operation. It is determined whether it has been performed (S4102). If it is determined in step S4102 that pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), a transformation setting process for setting a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is executed (S4103). Exit. Details of the transformation setting process (S4103) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S4102: No), the process of S4103 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the details of the above-described transformation setting process (S4103) will be described with reference to FIG. In this transformation setting process, first, the validity period flag 223e is set to OFF, and the validity period timer 223f is reset to 0 (S4201). Thereby, the end of the operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect is set.

  When the process of S4201 is completed, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is read out (S4202), and the readout number of transformations (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) is the upper limit number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect currently being executed. It is determined whether or not they match (S4203). In the process of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation counter 223g matches the upper limit (S4203: Yes), the remaining change time in the change display is specified (S4204), and the specified remaining change is determined. The development mode of the development effect corresponding to the time (T) is selected from the development mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) (S4205).

  When the process of S4205 is completed, the data corresponding to the selected effect form of the development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), the remaining variation time specified in the process of S4204, and the development selected in the process of S4205. The display time of the current failure notification mode is calculated from the difference from the production time of the production (S4207). Specifically, half the time obtained by subtracting the production time of the development effect from the remaining fluctuation time T is specified as the display time of the failure notification mode. Next, the timer value corresponding to the specified display time of the failure notification mode is set in the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4208), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the value of the transformation counter 223g is less than the upper limit (S4203: No), the remaining variation time (T) is within a period in which the success notification mode can be displayed. (Whether the value is equal to or greater than the lower limit corresponding to the current performance type) (S4209). In the process of S4209, when it is determined that the success notification mode can be displayed (S4209: Yes), each process of S4210 to S4212 for setting the display of the success notification mode is executed. In other words, 1 is added to the value of the transformation count counter 223g and updated (S4210), a success notification mode corresponding to the value of the transformation count counter 223g is set (S4211), and the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is set to 1 second. A corresponding timer value is set (S4212), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that the success notification mode cannot be displayed (the remaining variation time T is less than the lower limit value defined in the transformation effect selection table 222b) (S4209: No). Then, the above-described processing of S4204 to S4208 for setting the display of the failure notification mode is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  With this transformation setting process (see FIG. 35), by pressing the frame button 22 within a range that does not fall below the lower limit remaining variation time set for each production type, the success notification mode is limited to the maximum number of transformations. Can be displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the lower limit remaining fluctuation time, the failure notification mode can be displayed regardless of whether or not the upper limit number of transformations has been reached. As a result, it is possible to make the player want to display more success notification modes within a range that does not fall below the lower limit remaining fluctuation time, and therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed. Therefore, the willingness to participate in continuous transformation production can be improved. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit number of transformations is high). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect passes with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, when the number of times of transformation is small, the number of times of transformation ends when the production period elapses despite the fact that the maximum number of times is high (that is, the expectation of jackpot is high). Can be generated. Thereby, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the details of the above-described effect update processing (S4012) will be described. This effect update process (S4012) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) of the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, during the execution of the variable display, the remaining variable time, various timer values, etc. This is a process for changing the production mode accordingly. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this effect update processing.

  In this effect update process (see FIG. 36), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed (S4301). If it is determined that the variable display is not being performed (S4301: No), this process is terminated. To return to the main process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the variable display is being performed (S4301: Yes), then whether or not the transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is on (that is, whether or not a continuous transformation effect is being executed). Is discriminated (S4302). In the process of S4302, when it is determined that the transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is off (S4302: No), the transformation effect start for determining whether to start the continuous transformation effect based on the remaining variation time is started. A determination process is executed (S4303), and this process ends. Details of this transformation effect start determination process (S4303) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the transformation effect flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), since the continuous transformation effect is being executed, first, whether or not the validity period flag 223e is on. (S4304), and if it is on (S4304: Yes), a process during the effective period for determining whether or not the operation effective period has ended is executed (S4305), and this process ends. Details of the processing during the effective period (S4305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is off (that is, not during the valid period of operation) (S4304: No), then the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is greater than zero. (S4306), if it is a value greater than 0 (S4306: Yes), processing in success notification mode for determining whether the end timing of the success notification mode Is executed (S4307), and this process is terminated. Details of the success notification mode processing (S4307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is 0 (that is, the success notification mode is not being displayed) (S4306: No), then the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is Whether it is greater than 0 (whether the failure notification mode is being displayed) or not is determined (S4308). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4308: Yes), the end timing of the failure notification mode is determined. The process during failure notification mode is executed (S4309), and this process ends. Details of the failure notification mode mid-process (S4309) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4308, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is 0 (that is, the failure notification mode is not being displayed) (S4308: No), the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is greater than 0. (That is, whether or not the transition effect is being executed) (S4310). If it is determined that the transition effect is greater than 0 (S4310: Yes), it is determined whether or not the transition effect is switched to the development effect. For this reason, the process during transition effect is executed (S4311), and this process ends. Details of this transition effect processing (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, when it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33).

  By executing this effect update process (see FIG. 36), it is possible to execute appropriate control according to the progress of the continuous transformation effect, so that it is possible to suitably update the effect mode in the continuous transformation effect. it can.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process (S4303) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This transformation effect start determination process (S4303) is a process for determining whether or not to start a continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time, as described above.

  In the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37A), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (the timing when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) (S4401). When it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4401: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (S4401: Yes), first, a display command for starting the continuous transformation effect is set (S4402). Next, a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the validity period timer 223f, and the validity period flag 223e is set to ON (S4403). Then, the transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to ON (S4404), and this process ends.

  By executing this transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), the continuous transformation effect is accurately executed at the same timing each time the variable display set to execute the continuous transformation effect is executed. be able to.

  Next, the details of the above-described effective period process (S4305) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effective period processing (S4305) is a process for determining whether or not the operation effective period has ended, as described above.

  In the process during the effective period (see FIG. 37B), first, the value of the effective period timer 223f is updated by 1 (S4501). Since the processing during the effective period (see FIG. 37B) is executed every 1 millisecond, the effective period timer 223f is decremented by 1 every 1 millisecond.

  When the process of S4501 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the validity period timer 223f after subtraction in the process of S4501 has become 0 (S4502), and the value of the validity period timer 223f is not 0 ( S4502: No), since it is not the end timing of the operation valid period, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the effective period timer 223f after subtraction has become 0 (S4502: Yes), the number of transformations (the number of successful notification display times), and the remaining variation time ( According to T), the above-described transformation setting process (S4503, see FIG. 35) for determining the display mode to be displayed is executed, and this process ends. The details of the transformation setting process (S4503) have already been described above with reference to FIG. 35, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the details of the above-described success notification mode processing (S4307) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This success notification mode processing (S4307) is a process for determining the end timing of the success notification mode as described above.

  In this success notification mode processing (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is updated by subtracting 1 (S4601), and whether the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after subtraction has become 0 is checked. It is determined (S4602). In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is not 0 (S4602: No), this process is finished as it is because it is not the end timing of the success notification mode (success notification mode continues). .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after subtraction is 0 (S4602: Yes), it means that the display time (5 seconds) of the success notification mode has elapsed. The process of S4603-S4611 for setting the production | presentation aspect after the display period is complete | finished is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5 (S4603).

  If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the value of the transformation counter 223g is not 5 (S4603: No), a display command for notifying the start of the operation valid period is set (S4604). The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. Sent to device 114. When receiving a display command for notifying the start of the operation effective period, the display control device 114 executes a display mode (see FIG. 5B) corresponding to the operation effective period in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the end of the processing of S4604, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the effective period timer 223f, and the start of the operation effective period is set by setting the effective period flag 223e to ON (S4605), This process ends. Thereby, a new operation effective period can be started.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the value of the transformation counter 223g is 5 (S4603: Yes), 5 successful notification modes have already been displayed, and it is necessary to set an operation valid period beyond this. Therefore, the development effect and the transition effect of the aspect corresponding to the remaining variation time (T) are determined. Specifically, the remaining fluctuation time (T) of the fluctuation display is specified (S4606), and the development effect mode corresponding to the specified remaining fluctuation time (T) is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (FIG. 15). (Refer to (b)) (S4607).

  When the processing of S4607 is completed, next, data corresponding to the selected aspect of the development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4608), the remaining variation time (T), and the development selected in the process of S4607. The difference from the effect time is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4609). Then, the timer value corresponding to the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4610), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4611), and this process ends.

  The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. Sent to device 114. When receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the details of the above-described failure notification mode processing (S4309) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process in failure notification mode (S4309) is a process for determining the end timing of the failure notification mode as described above.

  In the failure notification mode in-process (see FIG. 39), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4701), and it is determined whether or not the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j after subtraction has become 0 ( S4702). In the process of S4702, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is not 0 (S4702: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the failure notification mode, so this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4702 that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j has become 0 (S4702: Yes), it means that the failure notification mode has ended, so the remaining fluctuation time (T ) And the effect time of the development effect in the form indicated by the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m, and the difference time is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4703). Then, the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4704), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4705), and this process is terminated.

  The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. Sent to device 114. When receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the details of the transition effect processing (S4311) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This transition effect in-process (S4311) is a process for determining the end timing of the transition effect as described above.

  In the transition effect processing (see FIG. 40), first, the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is subtracted by 1 (S4801), and it is determined whether the timer value after the subtraction has become 0 (S4802). In the process of S4802, when it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is not 0 (S4802: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the transition effect, so this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect timer 223k is 0 (that is, the transition effect end timing) (S4802: Yes), then it is stored in the development effect storage area 223m. The start of the development effect corresponding to the existing data is set (S4803). Then, the transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to OFF (S4804), the value of the transformation number counter 223g is reset to 0 (S4805), and this processing is terminated. Note that, as described above, the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display are exactly the same. Accordingly, the development effect set in the process of S4803 can be ended at the end timing of the change. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the effect mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the command determination process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4013). The command determination process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and determines the command received from the main control apparatus 110 as described above.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S4901). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S4903), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4904). When the stop type command is received (S4904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4904: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4907: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4908). In the process of S4908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S4908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the process of S4908. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S4908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4907, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4907: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4909). If it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S4909: Yes), the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4910), and the process returns to the main process.

  If it is determined in S4909 that no winning information command has been received (S4909: No), it is then determined whether an opening command has been received (S4911). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4911: Yes), the display opening command is set (S4912), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in step S4911 that an opening command has not been received (S4911: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4913). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the big hit round number is extracted from the received round number command (S4914). Then, a display round number command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the extracted number of rounds on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4915), and this processing ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4916). If an ending command is received (S4916: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S4917), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S4916 (S4916: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S4918). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  By executing this command determination process, an appropriate process can be executed in accordance with the command output from main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variable display setting process (S4014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4014). This variable display setting process (S4014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S5001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S5001: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S5008. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S5001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S5002), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S4903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41). Based on the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command, the variation display mode of the present variation display is determined from the variation pattern table 222a (S5003).

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the determined variation pattern classification is an aspect with a continuous transformation effect (S5004), and when it discriminate | determines that it is an aspect with a continuous transformation effect (S5004: Yes), a transformation effect selection table. Based on 222b (see FIG. 15A) and the value of the effect counter 223n, the mode of the continuous transformation effect is determined (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern type determined in the process of S5004 is an aspect that does not involve a continuous transformation effect (S5004: No), the process of S5005 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5006.

  In the processing of S5006, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation display mode determined in the processing of S5003 is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114. (S5006). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5007). In the process of S5007, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S5008.

  In the process of S5008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S5008). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S5008: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5009: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5009), and then in the process of S4906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5010).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S5011), and the display control device is based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notification to 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5012), and this process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 57. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. Therefore, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first flash memory in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c. A predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. can do.

  In the boot processing shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 55A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 has been received, that is, when a display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 21) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process of S6304 is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  In the process of S6502, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233d is set by the process of S6501. The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the processing of S6502 is performed. Transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. From As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the conventional video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S6503. When it is determined that the variation effect is finished, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A, jackpot B, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete release) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned on. (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6603, and the identification is also performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48A, details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6701, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame image to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6702. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50A, details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S7002. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the task processing is performed based on the back image discrimination flag set by the processing in S7002. The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (A resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and an address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If this is the case (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether there is a command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418). If there is a command related to the continuous transformation effect ( (S6418: Yes), a transformation effect related command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Note that the commands related to the continuous transformation effect include, for example, a display command indicating the start of the operation valid period, a display command indicating the start of display of each notification mode (success notification mode, failure notification mode), and start of the transition effect. And a display command indicating the start of the development effect. The display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b in the same manner as the variable display data table. By executing the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419), the type of display mode instructed to start display, the display time, etc. are determined from the command related to the continuous transformation effect, and the corresponding display data table is displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a transformation effect-related command process. This transformation effect-related command process executes a process corresponding to the continuous transformation effect-related command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the transformation effect-related command processing, a display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7201), and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S7202). Next, time data corresponding to the presentation time indicated by the command is set in the time counter 233h (S7203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S7204), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. The continuous transformation effect is a kind of effect mode set during the execution of the variable display. The fact that the continuous transformation effect is executed indicates that a variation pattern command is set (variation pattern command processing (FIG. 47 ( a) is executed after the execution of the variation pattern is completed. Therefore, the demonstration display flag and the final display flag are already set to OFF in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47A). Therefore, in the transformation effect-related command process (see FIG. 51), these flags are set. There is no need to turn it off again.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no command related to the continuous transformation effect in the process of S6418 (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process proceeds to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 47 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main dynamic image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7302), and then S7303 and S7304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401).

  In the task processing (see S6304 in FIG. 45B), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

  In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503), and if it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table buffer The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), the process is terminated and displayed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7506). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the drawing content of the previous address in which End information is written is always developed, the third image display device 81 displays the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S7306 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S7308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing for performing the confirmed display, so first the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7310), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop pattern determination flag set in S7315 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S7309, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S7317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set to be displayed.

  In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 17B and 17C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7601, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7702). In the process of S7702, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703. Also, as a result of the process of S7701, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

  In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S7601: No in FIG. 55A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (S6303) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). If it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7804), and the process proceeds to step S7805.

  In the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the process of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7805. In the processing of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

  In the process of S7806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7806 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, and thus this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the process of S7805, when the transfer instruction of image data is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

  In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S7812, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as drawing target buffer information. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is included as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a continuous transformation effect as one of the effect modes for improving the interest of the player. This continuous transformation effect is an effect in which the character 811 transforms 1 to 5 times in the 3rd symbol display device 81, and basically an effect that suggests that the greater the number of transformations, the higher the expectation of jackpot. is there. During the execution of this continuous transformation effect, the operation valid period for validating the pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is set a plurality of times. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period or when the operation effective period (5 seconds) elapses, an effect (success notification mode) in which the character 811 succeeds in transformation is executed. There is a possibility. More specifically, when one of the above two conditions is satisfied, the upper limit number of transformations predetermined for each production type of continuous transformation production has not been reached, and the remaining variation time If it is equal to or more than the lower limit value determined in advance for each production type, the character 811 succeeds in transformation (success notification mode is displayed). On the other hand, if the upper limit number of transformations has been reached, or if the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit value, an effect of failure in transformation (failure notification mode) is executed, and the continuous transformation effect ends. .

  The operation valid period varies depending on the player's game method. That is, when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period, the operation effective period is terminated at that time and a notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. In addition, each operation effective period, when all success notification modes are displayed as the operation effective period elapses, the continuous transformation effect production period is set before the upper limit number of success notification modes are displayed. Set to elapse. In other words, when all the transformations are executed with the passage of the operation effective period as a trigger, the length of the production period elapses before the upper limit number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production time (the lower limit remaining variation time defined for each production type) is set. Thereby, when the operation effective period is started, the frame cannot be transformed to the upper limit number unless the frame effective button 22 is actively pressed to end the operation effective period at an early stage. Therefore, the player who wants to confirm the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect can positively press the frame button 22, so that the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  Further, depending on the player's game method during execution of the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 is actively pressed during the operation valid period), the subsequent effect mode (success notification mode display timing, Since the number of times of display) can be varied, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit number of transformations is high). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect passes with a relatively small number of transformations. In other words, it is difficult to distinguish between an effect type with a low expectation level (low number of transformation upper limits) and an effect type with a high expectation level (high number of transformation upper limits), and continuously in a manner corresponding to a relatively low expectation level. A transformation effect can be executed. Therefore, even if it is an aspect corresponding to a low expectation degree, it is possible to increase the number of cases that lead to jackpots, so that even if a continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for jackpots can be increased. it can.

  Moreover, in this 1st Embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is complete | finished, it is set as the structure which performs the development effect for alert | reporting the lottery result of a special symbol. This development effect is provided with a plurality of types with different effect times. Here, the production time of the continuous transformation effect varies according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation effective period. For this reason, the timing at which the continuous transformation effect ends is not constant, and the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the continuous transformation effect ends is variable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect ends, the remaining variation time is determined, and the development effect of the effect period that can be executed with the remaining variation time is selected. And it is set as the structure which performs a failure alerting | reporting aspect and a transition effect using the difference period of the remaining fluctuation time and the production period of the selected development effect. Thereby, since the variation of the production time of the development effect can be reduced, the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition effect according to the remaining change time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining change time at the start of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It can suppress that it arises. In other words, the remaining variation time is longer, the variation of the third design does not stop even though the development effect has ended, or conversely, the development period of the development effect is longer, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the variation of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the variation display of the third symbol, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of incongruity.

  In the first embodiment, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period, the operation effective period is terminated and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. The condition for terminating (shortening) is not limited to this. For example, when a new entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected, the operation effective period may be terminated and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode may be displayed.

  In the first embodiment, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period, the operation effective period is always terminated (shortened), and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the operation effective period may be terminated based on the detection of a predetermined number of presses of the frame button 22 during the operation effective period. In this case, the same number of presses may be set each time as the number of presses necessary to end the operation valid period, or the number of presses is randomly selected by lottery every time the operation valid period starts. It is good also as a defined structure. With this configuration, a player who wants to accurately determine the maximum number of transformations can more positively press the frame button 22. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be further improved. In addition, when determining the number of presses required to end the operation valid period, the operation type, such as whether the performance type of the continuous transformation effect being performed, the maximum number of transformations has been reached, the lottery result of special symbols, etc. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of presses that can be easily selected is made variable in accordance with the situation when the valid period is set. Specifically, for example, it may be configured such that a smaller number of pressings is more easily selected in a variation display that is a big hit than in a variation display that is out of place. In addition, for example, a continuous transformation effect with a large number of transformation upper limits may be configured such that a smaller number of pressings is more easily selected, and the upper limit of transformation than when the transformation upper limit number is reached. You may comprise so that the number of times of pressing may become easy to be selected when the frequency | count has not been reached. With this configuration, it is possible to press the frame button 22 while paying attention to the number of presses until the operation valid period ends, so the player's interest in the game during continuous transformation effects is further improved. Can be made.

  In the first embodiment, when the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period, the operation effective period is always terminated and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the operation valid period is terminated. In addition, for example, a configuration in which a plurality of frame buttons 22 are provided, and when the pressing is detected for each operation effective period, the operation effective period is terminated and the notification mode is displayed (or a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display) is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the operation effective period is not terminated even when a press is detected (or the operation effective period is only terminated with a low probability). By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the game during the continuous transformation effect to be performed while considering which frame button 22 can be pressed to terminate the effective operation period. Can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the operation effective period is set, the notification mode is not displayed until the operation effective period ends unless the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. However, the present embodiment is limited to this configuration. Instead, the operation valid period may be terminated without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. Specifically, for example, each time an operation valid period is set, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether or not to abort the period. Further, for example, in correspondence with the type of continuous transformation effect, the type in which the operation effective period is not interrupted unless the frame button 22 is pressed, and the operation effective period even if the frame button 22 is not detected. It is good also as a structure which provides the classification | category which is interrupted on the way.

  In the first embodiment, a value in the range of 1 to 5 times can be set as the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect, but the upper limit number may be arbitrarily determined. By narrowing the range of the maximum number of times that can be set (for example, 1 to 3 times), the difference in jackpot expectation for each number of transformations can be reduced, so the continuous transformation effect has been completed with a small number of transformations Even in this case, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Conversely, by increasing the range of the upper limit number that can be set (for example, 1 to 10 times), the player can be given more opportunities to press (operate) the frame button 22. . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be further improved. In the first embodiment, in the continuous transformation effect, the transformation is successful at least once (success notification mode is displayed), but the upper limit number of transformations is 0 in at least some production types. It is good also as a structure set to time (it does not succeed once in transformation). In addition to the upper limit number of transformations, the length of the operation effective period, the success notification mode, the failure notification mode, the display period of the transition effect, and the like may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the first embodiment, the upper limit number corresponding to the type when the frame button 22 has never been operated in all the types of continuous transformation effects (that is, there was no operation valid period that was interrupted halfway). However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation valid period is such that the continuous transformation effect ends before the success notification mode is displayed (the character 811 succeeds in transformation). In some types of continuous transformation effects, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed at all, the success notification mode may be displayed up to the upper limit number corresponding to the type. With this configuration, even when a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, a case where the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the continuous transformation effect even for the player who plays the game with the pachinko machine 10 because he / she does not want to press the frame button 22.

  In the first embodiment, regardless of the end condition of the operation valid period, the display count (number of transformations) of the success notification mode has not reached the upper limit, and the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the operation valid period is the lower limit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The ratio at which the success notification mode is displayed may be varied in accordance with the end condition of the operation effective period (whether the time set as the operation effective period has elapsed or whether the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected).

  In the first embodiment, when the display time of the first to fourth success notification modes in one continuous transformation effect has elapsed, the operation valid period of 5 seconds is newly set. However, the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. A configuration in which one operation effective period is set at the start of the continuous transformation effect, and when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the operation effective period is interrupted (subtraction of the effective period timer 223f is stopped) is also possible. Good. And when the number of times of display of the success notification mode is less than the upper limit number, after the display time has elapsed, the operation valid period that has been suspended is resumed (subtraction of the valid period timer 223f is resumed). Good. Further, the length of the operation valid period may be variable according to the number of display times of the maximum success notification mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary to reset the value of the valid period timer 223f each time a press on the frame button 22 is detected, so that the processing load can be reduced. In this case, the success notification mode may be displayed in a range in which the upper limit number is not reached even when the period during which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected continues for a predetermined period. By comprising in this way, the same operation | movement as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment mentioned above is realizable. Note that the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f may be continued during the display time of the success notification mode instead of interrupting the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f. And even if it detects the pressing with respect to the frame button 22 during the display time of a success alerting | reporting aspect, it is good also as a structure which handles the said pressing as invalid. Even in such a configuration, the same operation as in the first embodiment can be realized.

  In the first embodiment, the display time of the transition effect is varied to match the end timing of the subsequent development effect and the end time of the variation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display time of the transition effect is fixed to 1 second, and after the development effect ends (or as part of the development effect), the difference between the set development time effect time and the remaining variation time is compensated. It is good also as a structure which performs the production for this. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the time is adjusted at the end of the production, the end timing of the production and the end timing of the fluctuation display can be matched with simpler control of simply setting the remaining fluctuation time as the production time. it can.

  In the first embodiment, when a press (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification) is immediately (before the operation effective period elapses). (Mode) is displayed, but is not limited thereto. For example, when a press on the frame button 22 is detected, a notification mode may be displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs the effect which alert | reports to a player that pressing-down of the frame button 22 was received during a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). Opportunity to let the player imagine which notification mode is displayed during the predetermined period by setting a predetermined period after detecting the pressing of the frame button 22 until the notification mode is displayed. Can be given. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In this case, the predetermined period (the period from when the frame button 22 is pressed until the notification mode is displayed) may be fixed, or the predetermined period may be set according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. It may be configured to be variable. As a specific example of changing the predetermined period, for example, if there is a margin of 1 second or more until the end timing of the operation effective period, 1 second is set, and the frame is set in less than 1 second until the end timing of the operation effective period. When a press on the button 22 is detected, a notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the period from when the operation effective period is set until the notification mode is displayed from being longer than when the frame button 22 is not pressed. Further, for example, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation effective period regardless of the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

  In the first embodiment, it is notified that the operation effective period is terminated by pressing the frame button 22 rather than the case where the operation effective period elapses without pressing the frame button 22 before the operation effective period elapses. Although the configuration is such that the display timing of the mode is advanced, the present invention is not limited to this. In some or all of the types of continuous transformation effects, the display timing of the notification mode may be delayed when the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, a predetermined pressing effect indicating that the pressing is detected may be set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, the effect period of the press effect may be set so that the press effect ends after the timing when the operation effective period that was originally set ends. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification mode is not always displayed immediately, but rather the display timing of the notification mode may be delayed. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not it is better to press 22 each time. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it was set as the structure which performs the transition effect of length according to the remaining fluctuation | variation time at the time of a failure alerting | reporting aspect being performed. In addition, as a mode of the transition effect, a predetermined still image (or a video whose mode does not change significantly) is displayed until the start timing of the development effect, and the transition effect end timing (the length of the execution period) Regardless of this, the display mode is prevented from becoming unnatural when switching to the development effect.

  On the other hand, in this modification, the transition effect is composed of an effect mode with a relatively large change in mode and an effect mode with little (no) mode change. And it was comprised so that the end timing of a transition effect may be in the period when the effect mode with few changes of a mode is displayed. Thereby, the freedom degree of the display mode during execution of a transition effect can be raised. It should be noted that, by increasing the degree of freedom of the transition effect, the difference time between the effect time of the development effect and the remaining variation time is covered only by the effect time of the transition effect. That is, in this modification, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second.

  With reference to FIG. 83, the transition effect in this modification is demonstrated. Note that, in the present modification, as in the development effect in the first embodiment described above, base effect data that is a source for executing the transition effect is prepared. The base effect is configured to have a display period of 4 seconds, and by executing the effect from the beginning or midway of the base effect, the transition effect of the corresponding effect period can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the base effect data for executing the transition effect of the present modification includes data of four types of display modes roughly divided in one data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, the data for the first second (first section) of the base effect is composed of data corresponding to the effect in which the character 811 searches for the target (monster 812) to fight in the development effect. ing. The data corresponding to the 1 second elapsed time to the 2 second elapsed time (second section) of the base effect is composed of data corresponding to the effect in which the silhouette of the enemy monster 812 appears in front of the character 811. In other words, the game is composed of data corresponding to an effect in an aspect in which the monster 812 that fights the character 811 this time is unknown to the player. This effect allows the player to imagine which type of monster 812 is to fight.

  Further, the data corresponding to the time point of 2 seconds to 3 seconds (third section) of the base effect is composed of data corresponding to the effect in which the type of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 in the present development effect becomes clear. ing. In other words, it is composed of data corresponding to an effect in which the silhouette of the monster 812 displayed as a silhouette is removed and the aspect of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 is displayed. With this effect, the degree of expectation of the development effect to be executed thereafter can be suggested to the player by the type of the monster 812.

  In this way, the production corresponding to the first to 1 second elapsed time (first section), the production corresponding to the 1 second elapsed time to 2 seconds elapsed (second section), and the 2 second elapsed time to 3 seconds elapsed time The effect corresponding to (third section) is configured as an effect in which the change in display mode in the third symbol display device 81 is relatively large. That is, a part of the display contents such as the character 811 moving to various places, the silhouette of the monster 812 suddenly appearing in front of the character 811, or the silhouette of the monster 812 displayed in the silhouette being eliminated. An effect is performed in which the content is changed to a completely different content.

  On the other hand, the data corresponding to the time point of 3 seconds to 4 seconds (fourth section) of the base effect is the stationary of the character 811 and the monster 812 of the type notified in the second section effect. It is comprised by the data corresponding to the production in which a drawing (refer to Drawing 8 (a)) is displayed. That is, it is composed of data corresponding to an effect in a mode in which the display mode does not change even if time passes (relatively small). By executing the transition effect so that the timing of switching to the development effect comes within the range of the third section, it is possible to prevent the appearance when switching to the development effect from becoming unnatural. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 83, in this modification, three types of start timing (first positions of the first to third sections) are set in the base effect. Which of the three types of start timing is set as the start timing is selected according to the effect period of the transition effect. Since these start timings are set at places where the stage of the production is good, even if the transition production starts from any start timing, make the player confirm the transition production without making the player feel uncomfortable. Can do. Here, in this modified example, as in the first embodiment, the difference between the remaining variation time at the display start timing of the failure notification mode and the effect time of the development effect is in the range of 2 to 5 seconds. The production time (production type) of the development effect is determined. In the present modification, as described above, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second, so that the effect period of the transition effect is in the range of 1 second to 4 seconds. In this modification, based on the effect period of the transition effect, it is configured to determine from which start timing the base effect of the transition effect is to be started.

  More specifically, when the effect period of the transition effect is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the data ahead of the third start timing (the beginning of the third section) of the base effect data is It is set as data for executing the transition effect. Thereby, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the fourth section. That is, in the production period of 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, first, the production for the 1st second of the third section is executed, and then the production (still image) of the fourth section is displayed until the end timing of the transition production. . As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (end timing of the transition effect) can be within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  Also, if the transition production period is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the data from the second start timing (the beginning of the second section) of the base production data is used as the current transition production. Set as data to execute. As a result, similarly to the case where the effect period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the transition effect end timing (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) is set within the range of the fourth section. it can. In other words, in the production period of 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the 1-second production of the second section and the 1-second production of the third section are executed, and then the fourth section until the end timing of the transition production. The effect (still image) is displayed. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (end timing of the transition effect) can be within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  Furthermore, if the transition production period is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the data from the first start timing (the beginning of the first section) of the base production data is used as the current transition production. Set as data to execute. Thereby, similarly to other cases, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section. That is, in the production period of 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the 1-second production of each of the first to third sections is executed, and then the production of the fourth section (still image) until the transition production end timing. Is displayed. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (end timing of the transition effect) can be within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

  As described above, in the present modification, when the transition effect that is a connection effect between the continuous transformation effect and the development effect is executed, the effect data (first section) corresponding to the aspect in which the display aspect changes relatively greatly To the third section effect data) and the base effect data including the effect data corresponding to the mode in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small). . Moreover, it is set as the structure which sets the start of a transition effect from any one start timing among several start timings preset with respect to the base effect according to the production time of a transition effect. In other words, the range of data used for executing the transition effect is selected according to the effect time of the transition effect. In this way, since the transition effect with different effect times can be executed using one base effect, the display data for executing the transition effect can be reduced, so the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Can be reduced.

  Also, in this modification, the transition effect end timing is displayed during the display of the effect based on the effect data corresponding to the aspect in which the display aspect does not change (the change is relatively small) regardless of the effect time of the transition effect. The start timing is selected. By configuring in this way, when the transition effect is finished and switched to the development effect, the player can have a natural appearance.

  In this modification, three start timings are set for the base effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be arbitrarily determined.

  In this modification, by adjusting the effect time of the transition effect, the difference time between the remaining variation time and the effect time of the development effect is filled. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Similarly to the first embodiment, the remaining effect time may be adjusted by the failure notification mode and the transition effect. In this case, it is good also as a structure which provides a base effect similarly to a transition effect also with respect to a failure alerting | reporting aspect. And it is good also as a structure which displays a failure alerting | reporting aspect using the effect data of the range according to the display period of the failure alerting | reporting aspect among the effect data of a base effect. By comprising in this way, the variation with a failure alerting | reporting aspect and a transition effect can be diversified.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when it is assumed that the frame button 22 has never been pressed during the operation effective period in one continuous transformation effect, the continuous notification mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed before the display. It was set as the structure which sets the operation effective period of the length which transformation | transformation production ends. In other words, when all the transformations are executed with the passage of the operation effective period as an opportunity, the production period is the length that the production period elapses before the upper limit number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. Was configured to set. In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period, the operation effective period is terminated, so that only when a game method is performed in which the operation button expires by actively pressing the frame button 22. The upper limit number of success notification modes can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period, until the period set at the start of the operation effective period elapses, the success notification mode, Alternatively, the failure notification mode is not displayed. That is, it is impossible to shorten the period after the operation effective period is set until the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. In addition, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 in each operation effective period, and the operation effective period that is set as the operation effective period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed continues. The structure is long. By configuring in this way, as in the first embodiment, only when the player actively presses the frame button 22, the number of transformations can reach the upper limit number set for each effect type. It is possible.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, In addition, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, the change with time of the effect mode during the execution of the continuous transformation effect of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing the change over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is 4 and the player does not press the frame button 22 during each operation effective period. FIG. 58B is a diagram showing the change over time in the production mode when the maximum number of transformations is 4 and the player actively presses the frame button 22 during each operation effective period. is there.

  Also in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the super reach variation in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed, the first operation valid period is set at the time when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation. The In the second embodiment, since the operation effective period is not interrupted, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) displayed after the operation effective period is included at the start of the operation effective period. The mode is determined in advance. That is, at the start of the operation effective period, a display start of a series of effect forms in which the effect forms during the operation effective period and the notification forms are set is set. Hereinafter, an effect mode composed of one operation effective period and one notification mode set after the effective period is referred to as a transformation effect mode.

  As for which notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is set, the transformation effect mode is set at the start of the transformation effect mode (at the start of the operation effective period). It is determined by discriminating in advance the remaining fluctuation time at the time of termination (time of notification mode termination). Specifically, first, the display period of the transformation effect mode is determined using a period selection table 222d (see FIG. 60) described later. Next, the remaining variation time (T) predicted at the end of the transformation effect mode predicted from the determined display period is compared with the lower limit value of the remaining variation time defined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. Then, when the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time (T) at the time when the transformation effect mode ends is a value that is larger than the lower limit value by 5 seconds or more, as a notification mode that is displayed after the operation effective period has elapsed, a success notification The transformation effect mode in which the mode is displayed is selected. On the other hand, in other cases, a failure notification mode is set. Note that 5 seconds is the shortest time from the start of the operation effective period to the end of the display of the notification mode (the minimum value of the display period of the transformation effect mode). That is, when it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more after the notification mode ends, it is possible to secure a display time for displaying at least a new transformation effect mode with a failure notification mode once. An aspect is displayed. On the other hand, when the margin for the lower limit value is predicted to be less than 5 seconds after the end of the transformation effect mode, it is not possible to secure a display period for displaying a new transformation effect mode. By setting the production mode, the continuous transformation production is ended. Thereby, according to the remaining fluctuation time, the type of transformation effect mode can be changed in a flexible manner.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), a transformation effect mode having a display period of 5 seconds (operation effective period is 4 seconds) is set as the first transformation effect mode. Thereby, the predicted value of the remaining variation time at the time when the display period of the first transformation effect mode has elapsed is 44 seconds. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. In the present continuous transformation effect (continuous transformation effect D2 where the maximum number of transformations is four), the lower limit remaining fluctuation time is set to 24 seconds, and the prediction is made. The remaining fluctuation time is larger than the lower limit by 5 seconds or more. Therefore, the transformation effect mode with the success notification mode is set as the first transformation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the first successful notification mode is displayed when four seconds set as the operation valid period have elapsed. Although details will be described later, in one continuous transformation effect, the continuous number of operation effective periods in which the frame button 22 has never been pressed is counted by a non-pressed number counter 223r described later. In accordance with the counter value of the non-pressing number counter 223r, the length of the operation effective period to be set (the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode) is varied (the longer the counter value, the longer the period is set). FIG. 60 (c)). Since this time is the first operation valid period, 1 is set to the non-pressing number counter 223r.

  When the display period of the first successful notification mode (display period of the transformation effect mode) elapses (when 16 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change), the second transformation effect mode is set. The display period of the second transformation effect mode is set to 7 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 6 seconds) corresponding to 1 which is the value of the non-press number counter 223r. Since the remaining variation time at the time when the second transformation effect mode ends is 37 seconds and there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the lower limit value, the second transformation effect mode is also set to a mode with a success notification mode. Is done. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), after the operation valid period of 6 seconds elapses, the success notification mode of 1 second is displayed.

  At the end timing of the second transformation effect mode (at 23 seconds from the start of variation), the third transformation effect mode is set. As the display period of the third transformation effect mode, 9 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 8 seconds) corresponding to 2 which is the value of the non-press number counter 223r is selected. Since the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the third transformation effect mode ends is 28 seconds and the margin for the lower limit of 24 seconds is less than 5 seconds, the third transformation effect mode is accompanied by a failure notification mode. Set the mode. Thereby, as shown to Fig.58 (a), the operation effective period of 8 second and the failure alerting | reporting aspect of 1 second are displayed, and a transition effect is performed after that. That is, the continuous transformation effect is ended only by performing the transformation twice without performing the transformation of the upper limit number of times (displaying the success notification mode). In the second embodiment, the production time of the development effect is predetermined for each production type of the continuous transformation effect. The transition effect is set to a difference time between the remaining variation time and the effect time of the development effect. In the example of FIG. 58 (a), after the transition effect of the effect time of 5 seconds is set, the development effect (winning development effect D2) for 23 seconds is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the continuous transformation effect, when the player presses the frame button 22 in each operation effective period, the effect period of each transformation effect mode of the first to fifth times, Each is set to the shortest 5 seconds. As a result, the maximum number of four transformations can be accommodated within the production period of the continuous transformation effect.

  As described above, when the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the operation effective period, it is possible to display more success notification modes by setting a short operation effective period. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it becomes easy to perform transformation up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so that the expectation degree of the production can be predicted more accurately from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can positively press the frame button 22, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit number of transformations is high). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect passes with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, when the number of times of transformation is small, the number of times of transformation ends when the production period elapses despite the fact that the maximum number of times is high (that is, the expectation of jackpot is high). Can be generated. Thereby, even when the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, the ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a period selection table 222d newly added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14A). It is different in point. Further, the contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b and the development effect mode selection table 222c are partially changed.

  The period selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when a new transformation effect mode is set, and for each value of the non-press number counter 223r, the length of the display period of the transformation mode and the length of the operation effective period. Is a data table that prescribes

  As shown in FIG. 60C, the value “0” of the non-press number counter 223r is defined in association with “5 seconds” as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “4 seconds” as the operation effective period. Has been. For this reason, when a transformation effect mode is newly set in a state where the value of the non-press number counter 223r is 0, a transformation effect mode of 5 seconds including an operation effective period of 4 seconds is selected. Note that the non-press number counter 223r becomes 0 when the first operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect is started or when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the previous operation effective period. is there.

  The value “1” of the non-press number counter 223r is defined in association with “7 seconds” as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “6 seconds” as the operation effective period. For this reason, when a transformation effect mode is newly set while the value of the non-press number counter 223r is 1, a transformation effect mode of 7 seconds including an operation valid period of 6 seconds is selected. It should be noted that the value of the non-press number counter 223r becomes 1 in the continuous transformation effect of 1 in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the previous effective operation period, and in the previous effective operation period. This is the case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected or the case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect.

  Further, the value “2 or more” of the non-press number counter 223r is defined in association with “9 seconds” as the display period of the transformation effect mode and “8 seconds” as the operation effective period. As a result, in one continuous transformation effect, when the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected continues two or more times, and the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is two or more, 8 seconds A transformation effect mode of a display period of 9 seconds including the operation valid period is set. When setting the transformation effect mode, the remaining variation time at the time when the transformation effect mode to be set is completed is determined (predicted). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is less than the lower limit set for each effect type, the shortest operation effective period is set regardless of the specified contents of the period selection table 222d. . Thereby, the production period of the development effect can be secured.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the display period (operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode is set, the operation set before the operation effective period to be set in one continuous transformation effect. Considering the operation status for the frame button 22 in the effective period, the length of the display period (operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode is determined, and the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected in the past Is present, the set operation valid period tends to be long. More specifically, a longer display period (operation effective period) is set as the number of consecutive operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected is increased. Thereby, if the player does not actively press the frame button 22, the display period of the transformation effect mode becomes longer, and the chance of displaying the success notification mode is reduced. Therefore, the player who wants to display more success notification modes can be positively pressed the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

  In the second embodiment, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is reset to 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, 1 may be subtracted from the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r. With this configuration, as the value of the non-press number counter 223r increases, it becomes difficult to shorten the subsequent operation effective period. You can be motivated to press. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in continuous transformation production.

  In the second embodiment, when the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is 2 or more, the transformation effect mode having the same length (9 seconds) is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the range where the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is larger than 2, the display period of the transformation effect mode may be lengthened as the counter value increases.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the same way as the transformation effect selection table 222b in the first embodiment, the transformation effect selection table 222b shows the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect when a variation pattern with a continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. It is a data table that is referred to for determination.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment, five types of effect types of continuous transformation effects A2 to E2 are defined. The continuous transformation effect A2 is an effect type corresponding to the continuous transformation effect A in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the value of the associated effect counter 223n are the same as the continuous transformation effect A. Are the same. Similarly, the continuous transformation production B2 corresponds to the continuous transformation production B in the first embodiment, the continuous transformation production C2 corresponds to the continuous transformation production C in the first embodiment, and the continuous transformation production D2 is the first implementation. Corresponding to the continuous transformation effect D in the form, the continuous transformation effect E2 corresponds to the continuous transformation effect E in the first embodiment, the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the value of the associated production counter 223n. Are the same.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60A, in the continuous transformation effect A2, the lower limit of the remaining variation time is set to 39 seconds. That is, each transformation effect mode (operation valid period, notification mode) is set so that the remaining variation time at the timing when the last notification mode of continuous transformation effect A2 ends is 39 seconds or more. Similarly, the lower limit of the remaining change time is set to 34 seconds for the continuous transformation effect B2, the lower limit of the remaining change time is set to 29 seconds for the continuous change effect C2, and the lower limit of the remaining change time is set to the continuous change effect D2. Is set to 24 seconds, and the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 19 seconds in the continuous transformation effect E2. As the lower limit value of these remaining fluctuation times, a value obtained by adding 1 second to the effect time of the development effect corresponding to each effect type is set. In other words, after the end of the continuous transformation effect, a time during which the corresponding development effect can be executed is set through a transition effect for at least one second. In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during all operation effective periods in one continuous transformation effect, the upper limit number of success notification modes can be displayed, and the remaining variation time is displayed in the transformation effect selection table 222b. It is configured such that the continuous transformation effect ends at a timing that matches the prescribed lower limit value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60B, details of the developed effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment will be described. The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to when selecting the development mode of the development effect that is executed after the continuous transformation effect is completed, like the development effect mode selection table 222c in the first embodiment. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the development effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment has a pair of a type of continuous transformation effect and a special symbol lottery result, and a development mode effect mode (effect time). It is one correspondence. Specifically, when the continuous transformation effect A2 is executed as the effect type, the development effect whose effect time is 38 seconds is selected. In other words, if the current variable display is a win super reach, the hit development effect A2 with a presentation time of 38 seconds is selected, and if the change display is an out of super reach, an outage development effect A2 with a presentation time of 38 seconds is selected.

  Similarly, when the continuous transformation effect B2 is executed as the production type, the direct development effect B2 or the outbreak development effect B2 of the production time of 33 seconds is selected and the continuous transformation effect C2 is executed. The development effect C2 or the outgrowth development effect C2 with a presentation time of 28 seconds is selected. In addition, when the continuous transformation effect D2 is executed as the production type, the development effect D2 for which the production time is 23 seconds or the outage development effect B2 is selected, and when the continuous transformation effect E2 is executed, the production The development effect E2 or the out-of-motion development effect E2 of 18 seconds is selected. Thus, by defining the production type of the continuous transformation effect and the production mode of the development effect in association with each other, the processing load when selecting the production type of the development effect can be reduced.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the RAM 223 in the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)) in the display period timer 223p and the non-pressed number counter. 223r, a pressed flag 223s, and a transition effect flag 223t are added. Moreover, it is also different in that the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

  The timer 223p during the display period is a timer that measures a period from the start of one transformation effect mode until the display period of the transformation effect mode ends. The value of the timer 223p during the display period is updated by 1 in the effective period process 2 executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 33) (see S4511 in FIG. 63).

  The non-pressing number counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of continuous operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in one continuous transformation effect. The non-pressing number counter 223r adds 1 to the value when the frame button 22 has not been pressed once during the operation valid period (see S4514 in FIG. 63). Based on the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r and the specified contents of the period selection table 222d, the length of the display period (and the operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode is determined.

  The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not a press on the frame button 22 has been detected in one operation valid period. If it is on, it means that a press on the frame button 22 has been detected. On the other hand, if it is OFF, it means that the frame button 22 has never been pressed during the operation valid period. This pressed flag 223s is set to ON when the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 first detects that the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period (see S4112 in FIG. 61). Further, after the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is updated at the end of the operation valid period, it is set to OFF (see S4515 in FIG. 63).

  The transition effect flag 223t is a flag indicating whether or not the transition effect should be set when the display period of the transformation effect mode being executed ends. If the transition effect flag 223t is on, it means that the start of the transition effect should be set at the timing when the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and if it is off, a new transformation effect mode is set. It means that it should be. The transition effect flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined that the transformation effect mode is the last transformation effect mode in the current continuous transformation effect when a new transformation effect mode is set. That is, when it is determined that the end timing of the display period of the transformation effect mode is within 5 seconds from the lower limit value of the remaining variation time defined for each effect type, it is set to ON (see S5116 in FIG. 64). .

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S4021) will be described. This frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S4021) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and monitors the pressing of the frame button 22. This is a process for performing control according to the pressed state.

  Of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, each processing of S4101 and S4102 is S4101 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. , S4102, the same processing is executed.

  Further, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the pressing is then performed. It is determined whether the completed flag 223s is on (S4111). If it is determined in step S4111 that the pressed flag 223s is turned on (S4111: Yes), this means that the detected pressing is not the first pressing in the operation valid period, so this processing is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4111 that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4111: No), this means that the first press in the operation valid period has been detected, so the pressed flag 223s is first turned on. (S4112). Then, the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is reset to 0 (S4113), a pressing effect corresponding to the pressing is set (S4114), and this process is terminated. The press effect is an effect for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been pressed. For example, an image in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is pressed, It is an effect that generates a predetermined sound effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the effect update process 2 (S4022) will be described. This effect update process 2 (S4022) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and in the same way as the effect update process (see FIG. 36), the variable display is being executed. The processing for changing the effect mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the values of various timers, and the like.

  Of the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, the processes of S4301 to S4304, S4310, and S4311 are S4301 to S4304 of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S4310 and S4311 are executed.

  Further, in the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4304: Yes), the valid period in the first embodiment is in progress. Instead of the process (see FIG. 37B), the process 2 is executed during the effective period (S4321), and this process ends. This in-valid period process 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the effective period of operation as in the in-valid period process (see FIG. 37B) in the first embodiment. Details of this in-valid period process 2 (S4321) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62), when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), the value of the timer 223p during the display period is a value greater than zero. (S4322), if it is determined to be 0 (S4322: No), the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, in the process of S4322, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p during the display period is greater than 0 (S4322: Yes), the process during the display period is executed (S4323), and this process ends. This processing during the display period (S4323) is processing for determining the timing when the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the above-described effective period processing 2 (S4321) will be described. This effective period processing 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the effective operation period as described above.

  In the validity period process 2 (see FIG. 63), first, the value of the validity period timer 223f and the value of the display period timer 223p are both subtracted by 1 and updated (S4511). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period timer 223f after subtraction has become 0 (when the operation effective period ends) (S4512), and if not (S4512: No), The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4512 that the value of the validity period timer 223f has become 0 (S4512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513). In the process of S4513, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4513: No), it means that the pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected during the current operation valid period. The value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is updated by adding 1 (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4513 that the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513: Yes), the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected at least once during the operation valid period. , S4514 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the operation valid period is set by setting the valid period flag 223e to OFF, and the pressed flag 223s is set to OFF (S4515), and this process ends.

  By executing the processing 2 during the effective period (see FIG. 63), the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r indicating the continuous number of the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected can be appropriately updated. . Therefore, the subsequent operation effective period can be set to an appropriate length.

  Next, the details of the above-described display period processing (S4323) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this display period processing (S4323).

  In the processing during the display period (see FIG. 64), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the timer 223p during the display period (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223p during the display period after subtraction is 0. (S5102). In the process of S5102, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p is not 0 during the display period after the subtraction (S5102: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5102, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p during the display period after subtraction has become 0 (S5102: Yes), this means that the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, A process for setting either a new transformation effect mode or a transition effect is executed.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the transition effect flag 223t is on (S5103). If it is determined that the transition effect flag 223t is on (S5103: Yes), it means that the transition effect should be set. Therefore, first, the development effect mode corresponding to the present performance type is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 60B), and the data corresponding to the read development effect mode is developed. Store in the effect storage area 223m (S5104). Next, the difference between the remaining variation time and the effect time of the development effect selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c in the process of S5104 is set as the effect time of the transition effect set this time (S5105), and this process is performed. finish. By executing the processing of S5105, the difference between the production time of the development effect and the remaining fluctuation time can be covered by the production time of the transition effect, so the end timing of the change display and the end timing of the development effect Can be matched.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the transition effect flag 223t is off (S5103: No), this means that a new transformation effect mode should be set. The display period of the transformation effect mode corresponding to the value and the operation effective period are read from the period selection table 222d (S5106). Next, it is determined whether or not the read display period is within the range of the production period of the continuous transformation effect set this time (S5107). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the time obtained by subtracting the read display period from the current remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than a lower limit value predetermined for each effect type.

  In the process of S5107, when it is determined that the display period of the transformation effect mode exceeds the range of the production period of the continuous transformation effect (S5107: No), the display period of the transformation effect mode is included in the production period of the continuous transformation effect. The shortest display period of 5 seconds is set. That is, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the timer 223p during the display period, and a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f (S5108). Next, a transformation effect mode of a type in which the failure notification mode is displayed in the set display period is set (S5109), the transition effect flag 223t and the valid period flag 223e are both turned on (S5110), and this process is performed. finish. That is, when a long operation effective period is selected and it is determined that the end timing of the transformation effect mode exceeds the effect period of the continuous transformation effect, the shortest display period is switched and the continuous transformation effect is aborted. .

  In the process of S5107, when it is determined that the end timing of the transformation effect mode is within the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect (S5107: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the display period read out in the process of S5106 is displayed. During the period, the timer 223p is set, and the timer value corresponding to the read operation valid period is set in the valid period timer 223f (S5111). Next, the effective period is started by setting the effective period flag 223e to ON (S5112).

  When the process of S5112 is completed, next is the timing at which the display period read in the process of S5106 elapses (end timing of the transformation effect mode) is 5 seconds before the end of the production time of the continuous transformation effect (lower limit) (S5113), and when it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the production period when the display period elapses (S5113: No), 1 is added to the value of the transformation number counter 223g and updated (S5114), and execution of the transformation effect mode with the success notification mode that ends in the display period set in the processing of S5111 is set (S5115). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5113, when it is determined that the end timing of the display period is after 5 seconds before the end of the effect period (S5113: Yes), the continuous transformation effect is ended in the operation effective period set this time. Next, the transition effect flag 223t is set to ON (S5116). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation counter 223g is 4 (S5117), and if it is determined that the value is 4 (S5117: Yes), the process proceeds to S5114 and the fifth success. The execution of the notification mode is set. Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the maximum number of success notification modes is 5, and after setting the fifth success notification mode, a direct transition effect is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5117, when it is determined that the value of the transformation counter 223g is not 4 (3 or less) (S5117: No), the process ends when the display period set in the process of S5111 elapses. Execution of the transformation effect mode with the notification mode is set (S5118), and this process ends.

  By executing the processing during the display period, it is possible to vary the length of the operation effective period according to the continuous number of operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 during each operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect, and the frame button 22 is not pressed. The longer the operation effective period is, the longer the operation effective period is set. With this configuration, as in the first embodiment, the number of times of transformation (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) is set for each effect type only when the player actively presses the frame button 22. The maximum number of times can be reached. Therefore, since the player who wants to perform transformation up to the upper limit number of times can actively press the frame button 22, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the display period of one transformation effect mode is associated with each value of the non-press number counter 223r. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is only necessary to change the tendency of the selected display period depending on the continuous number of operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. For example, the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r should be selected. A plurality of display period candidates may be defined in association with each other. And it is good also as a structure which selects 1 display period by lottery from candidates. In addition, in the lottery for the display period, the ratio of selecting the longer display period may be increased as the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is larger. By comprising in this way, randomness can be provided to the length of the set display period. Further, in this case, the display period that is easy to select may be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, the game can be performed not only by the number of times of display of the success notification mode but also by paying attention to the length of the display period of the transformation mode, so the player during the execution of the continuous transformation mode It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the operation effective period to be set is variable according to the number of consecutive operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . It is sufficient that the player presses the frame button 22 so that the number of display times of more success notification modes can be set easily. . And you may comprise so that the length of the operation effective period set may become short, so that the counted continuous frequency is large. If the frame button 22 is actively pressed to increase the count value of the continuous number of times, and if a shorter operation effective period is not set, the continuous number of times before reaching the upper limit number of transformations set for each production type. You may comprise so that a transformation effect may be complete | finished. With this configuration, the player can actively press the frame button 22 for a player who wants to display more success notification modes as in the second embodiment described above. That is, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the number of consecutive times that the pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected is counted within one continuous transformation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which takes over and counts. That is, the counter value of the non-pressing number counter 223r at the end of the previous continuous transformation effect is held, and in the next continuous transformation effect, the count is started from the held non-pressing number counter 223r. It is good. In this case, the non-pressing number counter 223r itself may be held as it was at the end of the previous continuous transformation effect, or the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is stored in the RAM 223 at the end of the continuous transformation effect. The counter value saved in the area may be set again to the non-pressing number counter 223r at the start of the continuous transformation effect. By configuring in this way, the player's operation status in one continuous transformation effect can be taken over from the next time onward, so that the influence when no operation is performed can be further increased. Therefore, the player can more positively press the frame button 22.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. In the first embodiment described above, the upper limit number of transformations is determined for each production type of the continuous transformation effect, and the number of transformations is less than the upper limit number and the remaining variation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value. When the operation valid period ends, the transformation is always successful (success notification mode is displayed).

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the number of transformations is less than the upper limit number, whether to display the success notification mode is determined by lottery. In addition, the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed is configured so that the variation display that is a big hit is higher than the variation display that is out of place. Thereby, the expectation degree with respect to jackpot in the case where the display frequency of a success alerting | reporting aspect increases further improves rather than 1st Embodiment. Furthermore, the lottery executed by pressing the frame button 22 is configured such that the success notification mode is displayed higher than the lottery executed when the operation effective period elapses.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the audio lamp The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 65, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 in the third embodiment is the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. (Refer to FIG. 14 (a)). The difference is that a transformability determination table 222e is added.

  The transformation possibility determination table 222e is referred to in order to determine whether to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the display condition of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is satisfied. This is a data table. Details of the transformation permission determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation permission / inhibition determination table 222e. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the transformation allowance determination table 222e, the variation type of variation display (whether it is a hit super-reach or out-of-reach super reach) for which a continuous transformation effect is set, and the operation valid The range of the counter value (random number) of the effect counter 223n for which the display of the success notification mode is determined is defined in association with each period end condition.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the variation type is a super-reach and the operation valid period is ended by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n A range of “0 to 79” is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random number values) determined to be displayed when the success notification mode is displayed is 80. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the valid period ends is 80% (80/100).

  On the other hand, when the variation type is super-reach and the operation valid period ends when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, a range of “50 to 99” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223n. ing. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the production counter 223n can take, the number of counter values (random number values) determined to be displayed when the success notification mode is displayed is 50. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

  In this way, when the operation valid period ends during the execution of the hit super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%. Since the success notification mode is displayed only at the rate of 50%, the possibility that the hit super-reach is executed increases as the number of display of the success notification mode increases. Therefore, the game in the continuous transformation effect can be performed in the hope that the success notification mode will continue more times.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the variation type is a hit super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is “0 to 49”. "Is specified. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the production counter 223n can take, the number of counter values (random number values) determined to display the success notification mode is 50. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

  On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the button 22, the range of “60 to 99” is defined as the value of the effect counter 223n. . Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to be displayed when the success notification mode is displayed is 40. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 40% (40/100).

  In this manner, when the operation valid period ends during the execution of the hit super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. The success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 40%. That is, the difference in the rate at which the display of the success notification mode is determined in the case of winning superreach and in the case of losing superreach as compared to the case where the effective operation period ends due to detection of pressing of the frame button 22 Is decreasing. Therefore, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the big hit expectation is not so high. For this reason, it is possible to positively press the frame button 22 to the player who wants to guess the jackpot expectation degree more accurately during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

  Further, in the case where the operation valid period has passed without the frame button 22 being pressed, the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50% even when the hit super-reach is being executed. In other words, the success notification mode is less likely to be displayed than when the operation valid period ends when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. In other words, when a player who does not press the frame button 22 very much plays a game, the continuous transformation effect is easily completed with a relatively small number of display times of the success notification mode even when the player wins a big hit. Therefore, since the case where it becomes a big win with the display frequency of few success alerting | reporting aspects can be increased, even if a continuous transformation effect is complete | finished with the display frequency of few success alerting | reporting aspects, the expectation with respect to a jackpot can be given.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S4031).

  The frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in the main process instead of the frame button input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. This is a process for setting a corresponding effect when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the period.

  Of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (see FIG. 66), the processes of S4101 and S4102 are the processes of S4101 and S4102 of the frame button input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. Further, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the first implementation. Instead of the transformation setting process in the form (see FIG. 35), the transformation setting process 3 is executed (S4121), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33). Details of the transformation setting process 3 (S4121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 3 (S4121). This transformation setting process 3 (S4121) is a process for setting the display of the corresponding notification mode according to the remaining variation time, the number of transformations, and the like, similar to the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. is there.

  Of the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67), in S4201 to S4208 and S4210 to S4212, the processes of S4201 to S4208 and S4210 to S4212 of the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed.

  Further, in the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4203, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number of transformations corresponding to the effect type of the current continuous transformation effect. Is determined (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is within a period during which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformation is possible) (S4221). That is, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value defined for each effect type.

  If it is determined in the process of S4221 that the success notification mode display (transformation) is not possible (S4221: No), the process is performed in order to set the failure notification mode and select the type of development effect. Goes to S4204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4221 that the present is within a period in which the display of the success notification mode can be set (S4221: Yes), first, the transformation possibility determination table 222e (see FIG. 66B), The value of the effect counter 223n is read (S4222). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223n matches the counter value specified in the success notification mode display determination (successful transformation) specified in the transformation possibility determination table 222e (S4223).

  In the process of S4223, when it is determined that the counter value corresponds to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: Yes), the process proceeds to S4210 in order to display the success notification mode. On the other hand, in the process of S4223, when it is determined that the counter value does not correspond to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: No), the process proceeds to S4204 in order to display the failure notification mode.

  By this transformation setting process 3, whether or not to display the success notification mode can be selected with a lottery probability according to the type of the variable display and the end condition of the operation valid period. Thus, it is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not the result of the current variation display is a win. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the type of notification mode displayed after the operation valid period ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the rate at which the display of the success notification mode is determined varies depending on the variation type of the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, and it becomes a big hit In this case, the display of the success notification mode is determined at a higher rate than in the case of detachment. By comprising in this way, it can be made to play a game paying attention by whether a success alerting | reporting aspect is displayed. In addition, the player confirms whether or not the success notification mode is displayed as many times as possible, and actively presses the frame button 22 to the player who wants to determine the jackpot expectation more accurately. be able to. Therefore, the willingness to participate in continuous transformation production can be improved.

  Also in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number set for each effect type by pressing the frame button 22 and terminating the operation valid period. The configuration can be made. That is, in the third embodiment, when the player actively presses the frame button 22 to abort the operation effective period halfway and continues to win the lottery whether or not to display the success notification mode. The success notification mode can be displayed up to the upper limit number of times. For this reason, compared with 1st Embodiment, the frequency | count that a success alerting | reporting aspect is displayed tends to decrease. In other words, the number of display of the success notification mode is likely to be relatively small in both cases of winning and losing, so even if the continuous transformation effect ends with a small number of times, there is a sense of expectation for being successful. You can hold them. Therefore, the interest with respect to a player's continuous transformation production can be improved more.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the operation effective period ends based on the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22 and when the operation effective period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, The lottery probabilities of whether or not to display the success notification mode are varied. When the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, there is a difference in the lottery probability that the display of the success notification mode is determined in the case of winning super reach and in the case of losing super reach. It is configured to decrease. With this configuration, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing down the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation is not so high, so the continuous transformation effect is being executed. It is possible to positively press the frame button 22 to a player who wants to guess the jackpot expectation more accurately.

  In addition, in this 3rd Embodiment, it was set as the structure which displays a failure notification aspect and complete | finishes a continuous transformation effect, when it fails in the lottery of whether to display a success notification aspect, However, A continuous transformation effect is not necessarily complete | finished There is no need to let them. For example, instead of the number of times of displaying the success notification mode, an upper limit value of the number of times that the operation effective period is set is set, and the continuous transformation effect is continued even if the failure notification mode is displayed until the upper limit value is reached. It is good also as a structure (it sets a new operation effective period after completion | finish of a failure alerting | reporting aspect). By comprising in this way, the display lottery of a success alerting | reporting aspect can be performed over many times. In addition, by actively depressing the frame button 22 and terminating the operation validity period, the success notification mode display lottery can be performed many more times. Therefore, the player can accurately predict whether the success notification mode is displayed or not. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be pressed more actively in the continuous transformation effect.

  In the third embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the success notification mode is more effective than when the operation effective period has passed without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. The winning probability in the lottery for displaying or not is configured to be high, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the person who presses the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, while the special symbol lottery is missed. May be configured such that the winning probabilities are the same whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the jackpot expectation level when the success notification mode is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, so the player presses the frame button 22 more actively to the player. Can be made. In addition, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode is increased. On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is missed, the winner is selected when the frame button 22 is pressed. You may comprise so that a probability may become low. With such a configuration, when the success notification mode is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the jackpot expectation can be further increased. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which makes the lottery probability of whether to display a success alerting | reporting mode depend only on the lottery result of a special symbol. That is, whether or not the success notification mode is displayed with the same probability whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period or the operation effective period elapses without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. The lottery may be performed.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment described above, whether or not to display the success notification mode is determined by lottery, and the success notification mode is displayed when the lottery is won. Further, the lottery probability that the display determination of the success notification mode is made higher when the hit super-reach is being executed than when the miss super-reach is being executed. Thereby, it was set as the structure which can improve the expectation with respect to the jackpot of a player more, so that the display frequency of a success alerting | reporting aspect increases.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, during a predetermined period (two first half operation effective periods) in one continuous transformation effect, the pressing state (player operating state) for the frame button 22 is determined, The ratio at which the success notification mode is set is varied according to the determination result. In other words, in the continuous transformation effect, it is determined whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 when the operation valid period is set, and the degree of expectation of whether or not it is hit is suggested according to the determination result. The method (selection rate when selecting the notification mode) is changed.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment on the configuration is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, In addition, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the third section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. First, the details of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 68 (a) is a block diagram showing the development effect mode selection table 222c in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the development effect mode selection table 222c of the fourth embodiment corresponds to the development mode of the development effect to be selected for each value of the transformation counter 223g and the variation type of the variation display. It is stipulated.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the operation effective period is not interrupted in the same way as in the second embodiment described above, in which the development aspect of the development effect can be determined according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g. It is because it is doing. Further, in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the operation valid period is always set to 5 seconds. For this reason, the relationship between the value of the transformation counter 223g at the time of setting the display of the failure notification mode and the remaining variation time has a one-to-one correspondence. For example, if the value of the transformation counter 223g is 2, it means that the operation valid period for 5 seconds is displayed 3 times and the success notification mode for 1 second is displayed twice. Elapsed time at the time of setting is always 28 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds × 3 + 1 seconds × 2 until the continuous transformation effect is started). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds. Therefore, taking into account 1 second, which is the display period of the failure notification mode, and 1 second, which is the display period of the transition effect, if an effect of 30 seconds is executed as the development effect, the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the development effect Can be matched.

  Similarly, if the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 4, it means that the operation valid period for 5 seconds is displayed 5 times and the success notification mode for 1 second is displayed 4 times. The elapsed time when the display is set is always 40 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds × 5 + 1 seconds × 4). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 20 seconds. Therefore, if the development effect of 18 seconds which reduced the production time of the failure notification mode and the transition effect is executed, the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the development effect mode selection table 222c, the value “2” of the transformation number counter 223g is defined in association with the development effect of the effect time of 30 seconds. In other words, the hit development effect A4 with a production time of 30 seconds is associated with the hit super reach, and the outage development effect A4 with a production time of 30 seconds is associated with the outage super reach.

  Similarly, the development effect having a production time of 24 seconds is defined in association with the value “3” of the transformation counter 223g. In other words, a hit development effect B4 with a presentation time of 24 seconds is associated with the winning super reach, and a lost development effect B4 with a presentation time of 24 seconds is associated with the lost super reach. Further, the development effect with an effect time of 18 seconds is defined in association with the value “4, 5” of the transformation counter 223g. In other words, a winning development C4 with a production time of 18 seconds is associated with the winning super reach, and a falling development effect C4 with a production time of 18 seconds is associated with the losing super reach.

  Thus, by referring to the development effect mode selection table 222c, the type of development effect that matches the remaining variation time can be determined according to the value of the transformation counter 223g. And the end timing of the variable display can be matched.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68B to 68D, details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 68B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment is used when it is determined that a player who tends to press the frame button 22 in a continuous transformation effect is playing a game. When it is determined that the player who tends to not press the frame button 22 and the player who tends to press the frame button 22 are playing a game, the success notification is used. It comprises at least a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 used to determine whether or not to display the mode.

  In addition, in this 4th Embodiment, it is set as the structure which discriminate | determines a player's tendency over two operation effective periods after the start of a continuous transformation effect. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected twice in the first two operation valid periods, it is determined that the player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 is playing a game. On the other hand, in other cases, it is determined that a player who does not tend to press the frame button 22 is playing a game. Note that, in order to determine the player's tendency, the success notification mode is always set as the notification mode after the end in the first two operation valid periods. That is, the failure notification mode is displayed before the player's tendency is discriminated, and the continuous transformation effect is not terminated.

  FIG. 68C is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pressing tendency table 222e1. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the depression tendency table 222e1, an effect counter 223n that is determined to display a success notification mode for each set number of effective operation periods and variation types in one continuous transformation effect. Are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, when the variation type is hit super-reach, “0-79” is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third to fifth operation effective periods in the continuous transformation effect. Yes. Thereby, when the 3rd to 5th operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect ends, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%.

  On the other hand, when the variation type is super-reach, “0 to 59” is defined as the range of the value of the effect counter 223n for the third operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation is effective. “0-39” is defined in association with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and “0-19” as the value range of the effect counter 223n with respect to the fifth operation valid period It is stipulated.

  For this reason, when the detachment super reach is executed, the display of the success notification mode is less likely to be determined as compared with the hit super reach. Furthermore, as the operation effective period increases, the display of the success notification mode becomes difficult to be determined. For this reason, the expectation degree which becomes a big hit increases, so that the display frequency of a success alerting | reporting aspect increases. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who tends to press the frame button 22 to play a game in expectation that the success notification mode is displayed more times.

  FIG. 68D is a diagram showing the specified contents of the non-pressing tendency table 222e2. The non-pressing tendency table 222e2 has the same configuration as the pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68C). That is, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the value of the effect counter 223n that is determined to display the success notification mode is associated with the set number of operation effective periods in one continuous transformation effect and the variation type. It is prescribed.

  Specifically, when the variation type is hit super-reach, “0 to 39” is defined as the range of the value of the effect counter 223n in association with the third operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect. “0-79” is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n with respect to the operation valid period of “0-39”, and the value range of the effect counter 223n with respect to the fifth operation valid period is defined with “0-39”. "Is defined in association with each other. In other words, during the execution of the hit super reach, it is difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation effective period, while the even-numbered (fourth) operation effective period ends. Sometimes it becomes easier to set the success notification mode.

  On the other hand, when the variation type is super-reach, “0 to 69” is defined as the range of the value of the effect counter 223n for the third operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation is effective. “0-49” is defined in association with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and “0-69” is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation effective period. It is stipulated. That is, during the execution of the missed superreach, contrary to the case of the hit superreach, the success notification mode is likely to be set at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation effective period, while the even-numbered superreach is performed. It becomes difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the (fourth) operation effective period.

  Therefore, after the odd-numbered operation valid period ends, the expectation that the failure notification mode is displayed becomes a big hit, while after the even-numbered operation valid period ends, the success notification mode is displayed. The expectation that becomes a big hit will increase. Therefore, in the odd-numbered operation effective period, the game can be performed in the hope that the failure notification mode is displayed after the end of the period, while in the even-numbered operation effective period, after the period ends A game can be performed in the hope that the success notification mode is displayed.

  Thus, the lottery method (table used for lottery) of whether to display the success notification mode is different for the player who tends to press the frame button 22 and the player who tends to press the button. As a result, when a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, the game performance in which the jackpot expectation degree increases as the number of times of display of the success notification mode increases can be provided. On the other hand, when a player who has a tendency to hardly press the frame button 22 is playing a game, when the success notification mode is displayed odd times, the jackpot expectation is lowered, and the success notification mode is displayed even times. If it is done, the gameability which a jackpot expectation degree improves can be provided.

  Further, in the first two operation effective periods in one continuous transformation effect, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method (gameability) for suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot can be switched, the player can select a favorite suggestion method. Therefore, the suggestion method according to the taste for every player is realizable. Also, even if you get bored with one suggestion method, you can switch to the other suggestion method, so that the game can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous.

  In the fourth embodiment, only the continuous transformation effect with the maximum number of transformations of 5 is used as the type of continuous transformation effect so that the expected degree of jackpot can be more accurately determined from the display timing of the success notification mode. The configuration is set. By comprising in this way, the case where a failure alerting | reporting aspect is displayed can be limited to the case where it leaks to the display lottery of the success alerting | reporting aspect based on the transformation | transformation possibility determination table 222e. Accordingly, the player can accurately predict the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 69, the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment has a pressed flag 223 s and a pressed flag, compared to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B). The difference is that a number counter 223u is provided.

  The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in one operation valid period, as in the second embodiment. Further, the number-of-presses counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected among the operation effective periods of the first half in the continuous transformation effect. Based on the counter value of the number-of-presses counter 223u, the player's tendency (whether or not the player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing a game) is determined.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. First, with reference to FIG. 70, the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (S4041) will be described. This frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (S4041) is executed in place of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, and the depression of the frame button 22 is monitored. This is a process for displaying an effect corresponding to the detected case.

  Of the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S4101 and S4102 are the same as the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment. The same processes as those in S4101 and S4102 are executed.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 according to the fourth embodiment, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), is the pressed flag 223s turned on? It is determined whether or not (S4131), and if the pressed flag 223s is on (S4131: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4131 that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4131: No), the pressed flag 223s is set to on (S4132), and then the value of the press counter 223u is set to 1. Update by adding (S4133). Then, a press effect for notifying the player that the press has been detected is set (S4134), and this process ends. In the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the number-of-presses counter 223u can be updated in response to the press on the frame button 22. This can be determined according to the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the processing 4 during the effective period (S4331) will be described. This in-valid period process 4 (S4331) is a process executed in place of the in-valid period process (see FIG. 37B) in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment), and ends the operation valid period. This is a process for performing the corresponding control at the timing.

  Of the processing 4 during the effective period in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 71), the processes in S4501 and S4502 are the same as the processing during the effective period in the third embodiment (see FIG. 37B). Executed. Further, in the processing during validity period 4 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 71), when it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the value of the validity period timer 223f after subtraction is 0 (S4502: Yes), then Then, the pressed flag 223s is set to OFF (S4531), and the transformation setting process 4 is executed (S4532). The transformation setting process 4 is a process for selecting a notification mode in the continuous transformation effect, as in the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment. Details of the transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4532 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 (S4533). That is, as described above, in the fourth embodiment, after the first and second operation effective periods are completed, the success notification mode is always displayed (the transformation is successful). Then, the player's tendency is discriminated based on the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 in the two operation effective periods. In the process of S4533, it is determined whether or not it is time to determine the player's tendency to press (whether or not the first two effective operation periods have ended).

  In the process of S4533, if it is determined that the value of the transformation counter 223g is not 2 (S4533: No), this process is terminated as it is not the timing for determining the tendency of the player to press. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4533 that the value of the transformation counter 223g is 2 (S4533: Yes), whether or not the success notification mode is displayed by determining the tendency of the player to press. The processing of S4534 to S4536 for setting the table used for the lottery is executed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 (S4534). If the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is determined to be 2 (S4534: Yes), the success notification mode is set. As a table used for the lottery (determination of whether or not to change) whether to display or not, a pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68C) is set (S4535), and this process ends. Since the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 means that the player has pressed the frame button 22 twice in the first two effective operation periods in the continuous transformation effect, This is because the player who presses 22 is highly likely to be playing a game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4534 that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 1 or less (S4534: No), there is a high possibility that a player who is less likely to press the frame button 22 is playing a game. And a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 (see FIG. 68 (d)) is set as a table used for the lottery to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode (S4536), and this process ends.

  Next, the details of the above-described transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 4 (S4532). Of the transformation setting process 4 (S4532), in each process of S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 to S4212, S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 of the transformation setting process 3 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 67), respectively. The same process as each process of S4212 is performed.

  In the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4202 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation counter 223g read in the process of S4202 is 2 or more ( S4231). In the process of S4231, if it is determined that the value of the transformation counter 223g is less than 2 (S4231: No), the current transformation setting process 4 is one of the first two effective operation periods of the continuous transformation effect. It means that it was executed at the end timing. As described above, since the success notification mode is always displayed after the operation validity period of the first half is finished, in this case, the processing of S4210 to S4212 for setting the success notification mode is executed, and this process is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4231 that the value of the transformation counter 223g is 2 or more (S4231: Yes), it is set in the in-valid period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the transformation possibility determination table 222e. The table (either the pressing tendency table 222e1 or the non-pressing tendency table 222e2) and the value of the effect counter 223n are read (S4222). As described above, by determining whether or not the success notification mode can be displayed with reference to the pressing tendency table 222e1, the game performance (the expectation level suggestion) increases as the number of successful notification mode displays increases. Method). On the other hand, when the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation valid period by referring to the non-pressing tendency table 222e2 to determine whether or not the success notification mode is displayed, the big hit expectation is lowered, and the even-numbered operation is performed. When the success notification mode is displayed after the effective period, it is possible to realize gameability (expectation suggestion method) in which the degree of jackpot expectation is high.

  When the processing of S4222 ends, it is next determined whether or not the value of the read effect counter 223n is a counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode (successful transformation) specified in the table (S4223). If it is a counter value corresponding to the notification mode display (successful transformation) (S4223: Yes), the processing of S4210 to S4212 for displaying the success notification mode is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4223, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223n is outside the range of the counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode specified in the table (S4223: No), the development effect mode selection table From 222c, the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the mode of the development effect corresponding to the variation type of the present variation display are read (S4232). Next, data corresponding to the correspondence of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), and a failure notification mode is set (S4233). Next, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4234), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72), it is possible to vary the method of suggesting the degree of expectation that is a big hit according to the player's tendency to press the frame button 22, so that the game becomes monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, whether or not a player who is currently playing a game tends to press the frame button 22 during a predetermined period in the continuous transformation effect. Can be discriminated (identified). In addition, a method of suggesting the degree of expectation (gameability) in the continuous notice effect is different between a player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 during the operation effective period and a player who does not. That is, when it is determined that a player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 is playing a game, the larger the number of successful notification display times (the number of successful transformations), the larger the bonus. The suggestion method that increases the degree of expectation is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that a player who does not tend to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, if the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation valid period, the expectation level that is a big hit decreases. When the success notification mode is displayed after the even-numbered operation effective period, the suggestion method is set such that the expectation level that is a big hit is improved.

  With this configuration, various suggestion methods can be realized, so that the player's interest in games can be improved. Further, in the first two operation effective periods in one continuous transformation effect, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method (gameability) for suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot can be switched, the player can select a favorite suggestion method. Therefore, the suggestion method according to the taste for every player is realizable. Also, even if you get bored with one suggestion method, you can switch to the other suggestion method, so that the game can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous.

  In the fourth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined in the first two effective operation periods in the continuous transformation effect. However, the method of determining the player's tendency is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines a player's tendency by the pressing condition in the first operation effective period. Thereby, in the continuous transformation effect, the suggestion method according to the tendency of each player more times and the number of times can be executed. Conversely, the player's tendency may be determined according to the pressing state over three or more operation effective periods. By comprising in this way, a player's tendency can be discriminate | determined more correctly. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides the period for discriminating a player's tendency separately from the operation effective period set in a continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for example, before starting the continuous transformation effect, an effect (pressing effect) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is displayed one or more times, and based on the pressing state in the one or more pressing effects, It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines a player's tendency. By comprising in this way, all the alerting | reporting aspects of continuous transformation production can be set to the suggestion method according to the tendency of a player.

  In the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is always set to five. In other words, the failure notification mode is displayed only when the lottery for determining whether to display the success notification mode executed based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e is limited. It is not something that can be done. Similarly to the above embodiments, a plurality of types having different upper limit times of transformation may be provided. With this configuration, when the failure notification mode is displayed, the failure notification mode is not selected in the lottery based on the transformation determination table 222e, but the upper limit number of transformations in the current continuous transformation production is reached. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is a possibility that the failure notification mode is displayed. Therefore, when it is assumed that the failure notification mode is determined by lottery based on the transformation determination table 222e, even if the failure notification mode is displayed at a timing when the expected level of jackpot is low, the player's expectation level for the jackpot is It can suppress that it falls.

  In the fourth embodiment, the player who positively presses the frame button 22 is configured such that the expectation level that is a big hit increases as the number of times of display of the success notification mode increases. For a player who does not tend to press down so much, the expectation of a big hit is increased when the continuous transformation effect is finished at the odd number of times, but the present invention is not limited to this. The expectation level suggestion method may be different depending on whether the player actively presses the frame button 22 or the player who does not press the frame button 22 for example. On the other hand, when the continuous transformation effect is finished at an even number of times, the expectation level that is a big hit becomes high. On the other hand, for a player who does not press the frame button 22, the expectation level of jackpot is high as the number of times of transformation is finished It is good also as a structure which becomes high. In addition, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the tendency of the number of transformations, the player can use a display mode rule that increases the degree of jackpot expectation when transformation is successful (success notification mode is displayed). It is good also as a structure made to differ according to this tendency. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 22, the degree of expectation may be suggested depending on the type of the back image displayed on the back of the character 811. That is, the rear image may have a higher expectation in the order of wilderness → mountain → sea. On the other hand, in the case of a player who does not tend to press the frame button 22, instead of setting the back image at random, the expression may be suggested by the expression of the character 811. That is, the expression of the character 811 may be configured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of expressionless expression → smile → anger face. Further, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the suggestion method during execution of the continuous transformation effect according to the player's tendency, the content of the development effect may be made different according to the tendency. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who presses the frame button 22 positively, as the character 811 attacks the monster 812 in the development effect, the expectation of a big hit increases, In the case of a player who does not press the button 22, the expectation that becomes a big hit may be increased as the character 811 is attacked by the monster 812.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 82, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the above-described fourth embodiment, in one continuous transformation effect, the player's tendency to press the frame button 22 is determined, and the jackpot expectation degree notification method is made different according to the determination result.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the mode of the continuous transformation effect is made different from the state of the player pressing the frame button 22 in the past continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for the player who actively presses the frame button 22, an effect mode in which the operation effective period is set a relatively large number of times is executed. On the other hand, for players who tend to be difficult to press the frame button 22, a long development effect is set instead of reducing the set number of operation effective periods. As a result, a player who actively presses the frame button 22 is given the opportunity to press the frame button 22 more times, while a player who does not want to press the button is given an opportunity to press it. Instead of reducing, you can entertain the development for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that matches the taste of each player.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, even when the failure notification mode is displayed in the continuous transformation effect, if the set number of operation effective periods (two times or five times) remains, the continuous transformation effect is ended. The operation valid period is set again. That is, it is prevented (suppressed) that the operation effective period is ended with a small number of times even though a player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 is playing a game.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, In addition, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. For other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described in the fourth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 73, the development effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not the player tends to press the frame button 22, and the tendency to actively press the frame button 22 according to the determination result (the participation frequency is high). The tendency is to set a longer operation valid period for the player of (trend). For players who tend not to press the frame button 22 very much (participation frequency is low), the number of times the operation effective period is set is reduced, while the effect time of the development effect is extended. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the first half of the development effect (development effect for low participation frequency) that extends the effect time, the character 811 searches the cave and collects items. Is configured to execute. The discovered item favors the character 811 in the battle with the monster 812 performed thereafter. The effect of searching for the cave (search effect) is configured to suggest a degree of expectation that is a big hit based on the number of items discovered by the character 811 (the more items, the easier it is to win the monster 812) doing). That is, for a player who has a low participation frequency, when the operation effective period is set to a small number of times, instead of reducing the number of executions of an effect that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the character 811 is transformed, a search effect Thus, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the number of items that the character 811 finds. As a result, even when the set number of operation effective periods is small, an opportunity for suggesting the degree of expectation equivalent to the case where the set number of times is large can be provided.

  FIG. 73A is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the search effect described above. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the search effect is started, an effect in which the character 811 advances toward the back of the cave is displayed. In addition, in the display area HR1 displayed above the main display area Dm, characters “search mode” and characters “expectation level increases as items are GET!” Are displayed. Furthermore, the characters “item × 0” are displayed in the display area HR4 displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm. The characters displayed in the display area HR4 are updated according to the number of items found by the character 811. The character 811 can find a maximum of three items in one search effect.

  FIG. 73B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the character 811 finds an item during execution of the search effect. In this case, the effect that the character 811 opens the treasure box displayed in the center of the main display area Dm is executed, and an item appears from the treasure box. Further, on the right side of the treasure box, a display area HR5 for informing the type of the acquired item is displayed. In the example of FIG. 73 (b), the characters “power-up drink GET !!” are displayed in the display area HR5. In addition, the character displayed in the display area HR4 is updated to “item × 1”. By the numbers displayed in the display area HR4, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that is a big hit for the player. In the search effect, there is a possibility that an effect in which the item does not appear although the character 811 finds the treasure box may be executed. That is, in the search effect, the treasure box is basically found three times, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on how many times the item is found out of the three times.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect of the player is low, the search effect is executed instead of reducing the set number of operation effective periods in the continuous transformation effect. In this search effect, the degree of expectation that is a big hit can be suggested by the number of items discovered by the character 811. As a result, even when the set number of operation effective periods is small, an opportunity for suggesting the degree of expectation equivalent to the case where the set number of times is large can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of the change over time in the effect mode when it is determined that the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect is low and when it is determined that the participation frequency is high. First, with reference to FIG. 74 (a), a description will be given of the change over time in the effect mode when the participation frequency of the player is low.

  As shown in FIG. 74A, when it is determined that the participation frequency is low, the operation valid period is set only twice. That is, the operation effective period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are set twice. In the example of FIG. 74A, the failure notification mode is set as the first notification mode, and the success notification mode is set as the second notification mode. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the fifth embodiment, even if the failure notification mode is displayed, the continuous transformation effect is not finished until a specified number of operation effective periods are set. . Thereby, the expectation degree which becomes a big hit can be estimated more correctly according to the display frequency of a success alerting | reporting aspect.

  When the display period of the second notification mode ends, a transition effect for 1 second is then set. When the transition effect is finished, the development effect is started. In the development effect when the participation frequency is low, a search effect for 15 seconds (see FIG. 73B) is first executed. In this search effect, as described above, an effect suggesting a degree of expectation that is a big hit depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811 is executed. Then, when the effect period of 15 seconds elapses, an effect in a mode of battle with the monster 812 is executed. In the example of FIG. 74 (a), the hit development effect A5 in a mode of winning the monster 812 during the effect period of 23 seconds is executed.

  As described above, when the participation frequency is low, the opportunity for suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is given twice by the two operation effective periods set in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, the opportunity to suggest the jackpot expectation is given three times by the search effect. Therefore, there are a total of five opportunities to suggest the jackpot expectation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), a description will be given of the change over time in the effect mode when it is determined that the player participation frequency is high. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), when the participation frequency of the player is high, the operation effective period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are displayed 5 times each. That is, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the failure notification mode is displayed as the first notification mode, the success notification mode is displayed as the second notification mode, and the failure notification mode is displayed as the third notification mode. Success notification modes are displayed as the fourth and fifth notification modes. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the fifth embodiment, the operation effective period is not terminated even when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period. Thereby, since the production time of the continuous transformation effect can be fixed, the production time of the development effect executed after that can also be fixed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare various aspects for each development time of the development effect, the storage capacity for displaying the development effect can be reduced.

  When the display period of the fifth notification mode ends, a transition effect is displayed, and then a development effect A5 per 23 seconds is displayed. In this way, when the player's participation frequency is high, the operation valid period is always set to 5 times in the continuous transformation effect, so there are 5 opportunities to suggest the jackpot expectation as in the case where the participation frequency is low. Given once.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. First, FIG. 75A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment in that an effective period number table 222f is added.

  The effective period number table 222f is a data table that defines the number of operation effective periods set in the continuous transformation effect for each state of the pressing tendency flag 223y. The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating the degree of participation of the player in the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period). If this push tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player is actively participating in the continuous transformation effect, and if it is off, it means that the player is less frequently involved in the continuous transformation effect. .

  Details of the effective period number table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effective period number table 222f. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the state “ON” of the pressing tendency flag 223y is defined in association with “5 times” as the set number of operation effective periods. For this reason, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively pressing the frame button 22) is playing a game, the operation valid period is set five times in the continuous transformation effect. . Of the notification modes displayed after the set five operation valid periods, the number of times (ratio) of displaying the success notification mode can indicate to the player the degree of expectation for the jackpot. .

  In this embodiment, as in the case of the third embodiment described above, in the case of a big hit, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80% after each operation valid period ends, but it falls off. In this case, the transformation possibility determination table 222e is set so that the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, as the number of times of displaying the success notification mode increases, the player's expectation for jackpot can be enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), for the state “OFF” of the pressing tendency flag 223y, “2 times” is defined in association with the set number of operation effective periods. For this reason, in the case where a player who has a low participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect (the frequency of pressing the frame button 22 is low) is playing a game, the operation effective period is set twice in the continuous transformation effect. Of the notification modes displayed after the set two operation valid periods, the number of times (ratio) of the success notification mode displayed can indicate to the player the degree of expectation for the jackpot. .

  In addition, when the participation frequency with respect to the continuous transformation effect is playing a game, the set number of operation effective periods is reduced by three compared to the case of a player with a high participation frequency. That is, the number of times that the expectation degree of jackpot is suggested in the continuous transformation effect is reduced. In order to cover this decrease in the number of suggestions, the fifth embodiment is configured to execute an effect (search effect) that suggests the degree of expectation in the development effect. Thereby, it is possible to secure the number of times of suggestion of jackpot expectation equivalent to a player with high participation frequency even for a player with low participation frequency. Also, by extending the effect time of the development effect instead of reducing the number of times that the operation effective period is set, it is possible to provide an effect mode suitable for the player who does not want to press the frame button 22.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 76, the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 69) in that the effective period number counter 223w, the notification mode timer 223x, and the pressing tendency flag 223y. In addition, at least a total number-of-presses counter 223aa and a total effective period counter 223ab are added. Further, the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

  The effective period number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of times that the operation effective period is set in one continuous transformation effect. The value of the effective period number counter 223w is set to 1 when setting the first operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect (see S4412 in FIG. 78). Each time a new operation effective period is set, the value is incremented by 1 (see S5209 in FIG. 80). The value of the effective period number counter 223w is used to determine whether an operation effective period is newly set or a transition effect is set every time the notification mode display period elapses. That is, if the value of the effective period number counter 223w is less than the number of operation effective periods set in the effective period number table 222f, a new operation effective period is set. On the other hand, when the value of the effective period number counter 223w matches the set number of times defined in the effective period number table 222f, the start of the transition effect is set.

  The notification mode timer 223x is a counter for counting the display period of the notification mode set after the operation effective period ends. The notification mode timer 223x is set to a timer value corresponding to 1 second each time the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is set (see S4241 in FIG. 79). When the value of the notification mode timer 223x becomes 0, it is determined that the success notification mode or the failure notification mode has ended, and it is determined whether a new operation valid period or a transition effect is set. .

  The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating whether or not the player has a tendency to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. If the pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player has a tendency to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect (actively press the frame button 22), and if it is off, the player's tendency to participate. It means that the participation frequency for continuous transformation production is low. The participation frequency is determined by the ratio of the number of operation effective periods in which the player has pressed (participated) the frame button 22 to the set number of total operation effective periods. Specifically, when the operation effective period when the player presses the frame button 22 exceeds 80% of the total, the player who tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game. Determine. This pressing tendency flag 223y is updated every time one continuous transformation effect ends according to the player's participation status (number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect (S5305, S5306 in FIG. 82). reference).

  The total number-of-presses counter 223aa is a counter for counting the total number of operation effective periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. That is, the total number of times of pressing operation 223 aa counts the number of operation effective periods accompanied by pressing of all the frame buttons 22 since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The ratio of pressing the frame button 22 based on the counter value of the total pressing number counter 223aa and the number of all operation effective periods set after the power is turned on (count value of a total effective period number counter 223ab described later) (Player tendency) is determined. This total number-of-presses counter 223aa is updated every time one continuous transformation effect ends according to the player's participation status (number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect (see S5302 in FIG. 82). ).

  The total effective period number counter 223ab is a counter for counting the total number of operation effective periods. In other words, the total number of effective operation times since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is counted by the total effective time number counter 223ab. Based on the value of the total effective period number counter 223ab and the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, the ratio of pressing the frame button 22 (player tendency) is determined. The total effective period number counter 223ab is similar to the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, depending on the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) every time one continuous transformation effect is completed. (See S5301 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82. First, the effect update process 5 (S4051) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect update process 5 (S4051) is the same as the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), while the variable display is being executed, the remaining variable time and the values of various timers. This is a process for changing the production mode according to the above.

  Of the effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in steps S4301, S4302, S4304, and S4310, the effect update processing in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 36), S4301, S4302, The same processes as those in S4304 and S4310 are executed.

  In addition, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4302 that the transformation effect flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the start timing of the continuous transformation effect is set. The transformation effect start determination process 5 for determination is executed (S4341), and this process ends. Details of this transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the effective period flag 223e is on (S4304: Yes), the end period of the effective period is determined. The process 5 is executed during the effective period (S4342), and this process ends. Details of this in-valid period process 5 (S4342) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), it is then determined whether the value of the notification mode timer 223x is greater than 0 (S4343), If the value is greater than 0 (S4343: Yes), it means that the notification mode is being displayed, so the notification mode in-process for determining the end timing of the notification mode is executed (S4344). End the process. Details of the notification mode mid-process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4343, when it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is 0 (S4343: No), is the value of the transition effect time timer 223k greater than 0 (during the transition effect display time)? (S4310), and if the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if the value of the transition effect time timer 223x is a value greater than 0 (S4310: Yes), the transition effect processing 5 for determining the end timing of the transition effect is executed. (S4345), this process ends. Details of this transition effect in-process 5 (S4345) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described with reference to FIG. This transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) determines the start timing of the continuous transformation effect, similarly to the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37A) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Process.

  Of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, in each process of S4401, S4402 and S4404, the transformation effect start determination process (FIG. 37 (a) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. ))), The same processing as S4401, S4402, and S4404 is executed.

  Further, in the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78A) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4402 ends, next, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the validity period timer 223f. At the same time, the validity period flag 223e is set to ON (S4411). Next, 1 is set to the value of the effective period number counter 223w (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4404.

  By executing the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, the start of the continuous transformation effect can be set at the same timing (at the time when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation). The count of the valid period counter 223w can be started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78 (b), the details of the above-described effective period process 5 (S4342) will be described. This in-valid period process 5 (S4342) is similar to the in-valid period process 4 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 71). This is a process for displaying the corresponding notification mode.

  Of the processing 5 during the effective period in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 78 (b)), the processing in S4501, S4502, and S4531 is the processing during the effective period 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment. The same processes as those in S4501, S4502, and S4531 are executed. Further, in the effective period process 5 (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4502 ends, the fourth notification is made to set the display of either the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Instead of the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the embodiment, the transformation setting process 5 is executed (S4541), and this process is terminated. Details of the transformation setting process 5 (S4541) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this transformation setting process 5 (S4541). Among the transformation setting processing 5 (S4541), in each processing of S4201, S4202, S4210, S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233, S4201, S4202, and S4210 of transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. , S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233 are executed.

  In the transformation setting process 5 (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4233 or S4211 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the notification mode timer 223x ( S4241), this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the details of the above-described notification mode processing (S4344) will be described. This in-notification mode process (S4344) is a process for determining the end timing of the display time of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) as described above.

  In the notification mode processing (see FIG. 80), first, the value of the notification mode timer 223x is decremented by 1 (S5201), and it is determined whether or not the timer value after subtraction has become 0 (S5202). In the process of S5202, when it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is not 0 (S5202: No), it means that the display time (1 second) of the notification mode has not elapsed, so this The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5202, when it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x after subtraction has become 0 (S5202: Yes), a process for setting either a new operation effective period or a transition effect is performed. Run. Specifically, the pressing tendency flag 223y and the value of the effective period number counter 223w are read (S5203), and these are compared with the specified contents of the effective period number table 222f (S5204).

  As a result of the comparison by the processing of S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period number counter 223w matches the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205), and it is determined that it matches the upper limit value. In the case (S5205: Yes), a transition effect is set. More specifically, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S5206), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S5207), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5205 that the value of the effective period number counter 223w does not match the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205: No), a new operation effective period is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the value of the validity period timer 223f, and the validity period flag 223e is set to ON (S5208). Next, 1 is added to the value of the effective period number counter 223w (S5209), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this notification mode mid-process (see FIG. 80), the end timing of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is accurately determined, and the corresponding control (start setting of transition effect, or new The operation valid period can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the transition effect in-process 5 described above (S4345) will be described. This transition effect in-process 5 (S4345) is executed instead of the transition effect in-process (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the transition effect processing 5 (see FIG. 81), the processing of S4801 and S4802 is the same as the processing of S4801 and S4802 of the transition effect processing (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment. Is executed.

  Further, in the transition effect processing 5 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k after the subtraction has become 0 (S4802: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the pressing tendency flag 223y is on (S4811). In the process of S4811, when it is determined that the pressing tendency flag 223y is on (S4811: Yes), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is started from the effect time after the search effect (search mode) ends. (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4814.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4811 that the pressing tendency flag 223y is off (S4811: No), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is set to start from the search effect (search mode). (S4813), the process proceeds to S4814.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to switch whether the development effect is started from the search effect or after the search effect is ended according to the state of the push tendency flag 223y (player tendency). Thereby, the development effect matched with the remaining variation time can be executed.

  After the processing of S4812 or S4813, a pressing tendency update process is executed to update the player's tendency (the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y) according to the player's participation frequency in the current continuous transformation effect (S4814). ). Details of the pressing tendency update process (S4814) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S4814, the transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to OFF (S4815), the value of the transformation count counter 223g and the value of the effective period count counter 223w are both reset to 0 (S4816), and this processing is performed. finish.

  Next, the details of the above-described pressing tendency update process (S4814) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the pressing tendency update process (S4814). In the pressing tendency update process (S4814), first, the value of the effective period number counter 223w is added to the value of the total effective period number counter 223ab, thereby obtaining the number of operation effective periods set in the current continuous transformation effect. This is reflected in the set number of times of the total operation effective period (S5301). Next, by adding the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u to the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, the number of operation effective periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the current continuous transformation effect is determined. Is reflected in the total number of operation effective periods detected (S5302).

  When the processing of S5302 is completed, a value obtained by dividing the value of the updated total number-of-presses counter 223aa by the value of the updated total effective number-of-times counter 223ab is calculated (S5303), and the calculated value is 0. It is determined whether the value is greater than .8 (S5304: Yes). In the process of S5304, when it is determined that the calculated value is larger than 0.8 (S5304), when the operation valid period is set, the frame button 22 is pressed at a rate of 80% or more. (That is, the player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game), the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to ON (S5305), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5304 that the calculated value is 0.8 or less (S5304: No), a player who presses the frame button 22 during the operation effective period has a relatively low frequency. Therefore, the depression tendency flag 223y is set to off (S5306), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this pressing tendency update process (see FIG. 82), the player's tendency can be updated every time the continuous transformation effect ends, taking into account the player's participation status in the continuous transformation effect. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, based on the player's participation status for the continuous transformation effect (the ratio of the operation effective period in which the frame button 22 is pressed in the total number of operation effective periods). Thus, the production mode in the continuous transformation production is different. That is, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period) is playing a game, the number of times in the continuous transformation effect (5 Instead of setting the operation effective period of time), the production time of the development effect is shortened. On the other hand, when a player who does not participate much in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period) is playing a game, a relatively small number of operations (two times) are performed in the continuous transformation effect. Instead of setting a valid period, the development time is extended. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give more opportunities to participate in the continuous transformation effect to a player who tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. On the other hand, for players who tend not to participate in the continuous transformation production, the opportunity to participate in the continuous transformation production is reduced, and the development production can be enjoyed for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect according to the player's tendency.

  In the fifth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined based on the ratio of the operation effective period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected with respect to the number of all operation effective periods set after the power is turned on. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a function for identifying a player who is playing a game, and each time it is determined (authenticated) that a different player has started the game, the player's tendency is updated. It is good also as a structure discriminating into these. That is, when it is detected that a different player has started a game, the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa and the value of the total effective period number counter 223ab may be reset to zero. Thereby, since the tendency for every player can be discriminate | determined more correctly, the production according to the tendency of the player can be implement | achieved more. In addition, as a function which identifies the player who is playing a game, a well-known face authentication function, fingerprint authentication function, voiceprint authentication function, etc. are mentioned, for example. Further, it may be configured such that information of a player who is currently playing a game can be acquired from a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. That is, information indicating the type of the card inserted in the card unit (for example, the serial number of the card and the member number) can be output from the card unit to the pachinko machine 10, while the pachinko machine 10 side The card type can be identified from the information output from the card unit. And based on the information output from the card unit, it is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines that the same player is playing a game, while the same card | curd is inserted.

  Furthermore, for a known game system comprising a mobile terminal (cell phone, smart phone, tablet, etc.) possessed by a player, a server that can communicate with the mobile terminal, and a pachinko machine 10 that can communicate with the server. May be applied. That is, in the server, individual information for each player (game history, type and number of effects generated, etc.) is stored, and the information stored in the server is stored in the corresponding mobile terminal (for each player). For a gaming system configured to be able to browse through a mobile terminal that has accessed the server with a given login ID and password, or to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 based on accumulated information May be applied. More specifically, the information of the game history accumulated on the server side includes the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa and the value of the total effective period number counter 223ab. Then, when starting a game with the pachinko machine 10, the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa stored (stored) in the server and the value of the total effective period number counter 223ab are used to start the game. By reflecting the above, it is possible to reflect the proportion of players participating in the continuous transformation production on different days or on different platforms. Therefore, even if the game date and time or the table (hall) where the game is performed are changed, it is possible to accurately determine the tendency for each player and set the effect mode that matches the player's tendency.

  In the gaming system, as a method of reflecting server information on the pachinko machine 10, for example, a password generated based on a common encoding rule between the server and the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pachinko machine 10 or the server. A method is mentioned. That is, when a game is started, a password for starting the game is requested from the portable terminal connected to the server to the server. The server converts a game history or the like corresponding to the connected mobile terminal into a password based on the encoding rule described above. When the player inputs the password to the pachinko machine 10, the password is converted into the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, the value of the total number of times-of-validity counter 223ab, etc., and set in the RAM 223 etc. To do. Thereby, the game can be started from the state of the game history immediately after the operator of the mobile terminal ends the previous game. Further, when the game is to be ended, a predetermined operation for causing the pachinko machine 10 to generate a password corresponding to the game end (for example, selecting an option corresponding to the game end on the menu screen of the pachinko machine 10; Etc.). Based on the predetermined operation, the game history including the current value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa and the value of the total effective period number-of-times counter 223ab is converted into a password based on the above-described encoding rule, and the third symbol display device 81 To display. The displayed password is output to the server by the mobile terminal connected to the server. On the server side, the password is converted into information corresponding to the game history, and the information corresponding to the operator of the connected mobile terminal is updated. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 and the server can share and update individual information for each player.

  In the fifth embodiment, the variation in which the continuous transformation effect is set is determined depending on whether or not the number of operation effective periods when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80% of the total number of operation effective periods. Although the presentation mode (the number of times that the operation valid period is set and the development mode) is configured to be variable, the threshold for changing the presentation mode is not limited to 80%, and may be arbitrarily determined. In the fifth embodiment, an effect mode that is set (easily set) when the ratio of the operation effective period in which pressing of the continuous transformation effect frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%, and when it is 80% or less. However, it is also possible to determine the player's tendency more finely and further subdivide the effect mode. Specifically, for example, when the ratio of the operation effective period when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is 20% or less, a continuous transformation effect is set with the operation effective period set to 1 and the frame button 22 is pressed. If the ratio of the operation effective period in which the operation has been detected exceeds 20% and is 40% or less, the operation effective period in which the operation effective period is set to the continuous transformation effect with the set number of times of the operation effective period is detected and the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. When the ratio of the period exceeds 40% and is 60% or less, the ratio of the operation effective period in which the operation transformation period is set to 3 and the operation button is detected to be pressed is set to 6 When the percentage is over 80% and less than 80%, the operation effective period is set to 4 times, and the ratio of the operation effective period when the frame button 22 is detected is over 80%. If the operation valid period is set to 5 times, continuous transformation It may be configured to set up. That is, according to the player's tendency (participation frequency with respect to continuous transformation effects), one type may be set from five types of effect modes with different number of operation effective periods and effect times of development effects. . By comprising in this way, the production aspect matched with the tendency for every player can be provided.

  In the fifth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined based on the ratio of the operation effective period in which the pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected. However, the method for determining the player's tendency is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with other effects that prompt the user to press the frame button 22 in addition to the continuous transformation effect, the ratio of the player pressing the frame button 22 in the other effects is also taken into account. And it is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines whether it is a player of the tendency to push the frame button 22 (the tendency to participate in a continuous transformation production).

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first to fifth embodiments described above, as a specific winning opening (large opening) that is opened during the execution of the jackpot game (privilege game), a single specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. It was set as the structure which provides. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the lower center of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, the specific winning opening 65a has a flow path provided on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display unit 80. A game ball that has been launched (left-handed) and a game ball that has been launched (right-handed) into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 are also entered. It was a configuration to obtain.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, two types of specific winning openings are provided which have different privileges (number of prize balls) given when a game ball enters. Specifically, a left specific winning opening 650La, to which seven winning balls are awarded each time a game ball enters, is provided on the left side of the area below the first inlet 64, and ten awards are received. The right specific winning opening 650Ra to which the ball is given is configured to be provided on the right side in the region below the first winning opening 64. In other words, the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra are provided in a symmetrical arrangement at the lower center of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. These two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are normally set in a state where game balls are difficult to enter, and one of the specific winning openings is specified when a big hit round is started. The winning entrance is ready to enter. In addition, as will be described in detail later, when each specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) is set to a state in which it is possible to enter a ball, the left-handed game ball is also hit right Both game balls can be entered. Thereby, since the player can freely select a preferred firing direction during the jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110. In addition, the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 84, the board | substrate surface structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, in the sixth embodiment, the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment is deleted. Further, a left variable winning device 650L is provided on the lower left side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64, and a right variable winning device 650R is provided on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the left variable prize-winning device 650L is provided with a left specific prize-winning port 650La through which a game ball can enter on the left side surface when viewed from the front. When the game ball enters the left variable winning device 650L through the left specific winning port 650La, seven prize balls are paid out to the player. The left specific winning opening 650La is always open, and a game ball that has reached the left variable winning device 650L from the right in the front view can always enter. However, a plurality of nails forming an inclination downward in the lower right direction when viewed from the front of the left variable winning device is arranged, and most of the left-handed game balls are below the first entrance 64 through the inclination. Therefore, the game ball flows down in the lower right direction in the area below the first entrance 64. That is, since it flows down in the direction away from the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La in normal times. In addition, the arrangement of the nails and the like of the game board 13 is symmetric, and an inclination downward in the lower left direction is formed above the right variable winning device 650R, but the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device are arranged. Since it is sufficiently far from the device 650R, there is no possibility that a game ball that has been hit right and flowed down the slope formed by the nail above the right variable winning device 650R will directly enter the left specific winning port 650La. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 84, the right side surface (the surface on which the opening is provided) of the left variable prize winning device 650L is configured such that the upper side protrudes rightward as viewed from the front side. As a result, even if the game ball has flowed almost vertically from above, it can be more reliably prevented (suppressed) from entering the left specific winning opening 650Ra by being blocked by the protruding portion. The right variable winning device 650R is the same as the left variable winning device 650L except that the arrangement is symmetrical to the left variable winning device 650L and that 10 winning balls are paid out when a game ball enters. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 84, between the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R, two variable members 650Lb and 650Rb capable of moving in and out (variable operation) on the front side and the back side of the front view. Is provided. Since these variable members 650Lb and 650Rb are normally buried in the back side of the front view (that is, buried in the back side of the base plate 60), the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb are moved to a region below the first entrance 64. The progress of the game ball that has flowed down is not hindered by the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, but the variable member 650Lb forms an inclination in a downward direction in the front view by performing a protruding operation toward the front side in the front view. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end of the right side surface of the left variable winning device 650L, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Lb is guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. In addition, the variable member 650Rb forms an inclination in a downward direction in the front view by performing a protruding operation toward the front side in the front view. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end of the left side surface of the right variable winning device 650R, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Rb is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  In each jackpot round, since the variable member corresponding to the jackpot type protrudes toward the front side of the front view, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter a different variable winning opening according to the jackpot type. More specifically, the variable member 650Rb protrudes in each round of jackpot A6 (16 rounds probable big hit), so that there is a relatively large number of prize balls (that is, ten) to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It becomes easy to enter the ball. On the other hand, in each round of jackpot B6 (7 rounds probable variation jackpot) and jackpot C6 (7 rounds short and large hits), the variable member 650Lb protrudes, so there are relatively few award balls (ie, 7) left It becomes easy for a game ball to enter the specific winning opening 650La.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are almost all the game balls that have reached the lower side of the first entrance 64 from above in the state where both of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are protruded (the state where they are arranged at the protruding position). It is configured to be able to catch. As a result, in a state in which one of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are received by the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb in a state where both are projected. Then, it is guided from the inclination formed by the movable member to the corresponding specific winning port (either the left specific winning port 650La corresponding to the movable member 650Lb or the right specific winning port 650Ra corresponding to the movable member 650Rb). Therefore, even when the left movable member 650Lb is a jackpot type for performing the in / out motion (variable operation) or when the right movable member 650Rb is in the jackpot type for performing the in / out motion (variable operation), The game ball can be entered into the corresponding specific winning port (either the left specific winning port 650La or the right specific winning port 650Ra) simply by continuously firing the game ball in the preferred shooting direction. . Therefore, every time a big hit is made, it is possible to cause the player to select a preferred firing direction and to play a game with a big hit.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the specific winning opening that allows a game ball to enter during the jackpot game is varied according to the jackpot type. Regardless of the type of the specific prize opening where the game ball can enter, both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are guided to the specific prize opening where the game ball can enter. The That is, two specific winning ports (left specific winning port 650La, right specific winning port) are provided for an area where both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can reach (the area below the first entrance 64). The opening 650Ra) is provided. And each movable member for inducing a game ball to each specific prize opening turns almost all the game balls that have reached the area (specific area) below the first ball entrance 64 to the corresponding special prize opening. It is configured to be variably operated so that it can be guided. Thereby, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific winning opening regardless of the launch direction of the game ball during execution of the jackpot game. In other words, while one of the movable members is arranged at the protruding position, the firing strength can reach the game area (at least the launch strength that allows the game ball to fly over the return ball prevention member 68). Most of the launched game balls (game balls that have reached the specific area without entering the first entrance 64 or the general prize opening 63) can enter the specific prize opening. Accordingly, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that can not be won (entered) into the specific winning port and flow down to the out port 66, so that the gaming efficiency during the execution of the jackpot game is reduced. Can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

  In addition, the two specific winning openings are configured so as to have different privileges (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given when game balls enter each other. Then, according to the jackpot type, the type of the specific winning opening that allows the game ball to enter during the jackpot game is varied. By comprising in this way, the difference of the advantageous degree for every jackpot type can be enlarged more. In other words, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the type of game state to be transferred after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the benefits (the number of prize balls to be paid out) that are given each time a player enters a specific winning slot is also a jackpot type Since it can be made different depending on the game, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds per jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value without limitation, and must be set within a range of an upper limit (for example, 16 rounds) or less. For this reason, there is a limit in making a difference in the award sphere to be paid out only by the number of rounds. In addition, if an attempt is made to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type within the upper limit (16 rounds), the number of rounds of the jackpot of the relatively unfavorable type can only be reduced, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. As a result, the jackpot period of the disadvantageous type is shortened. Therefore, in particular, when a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game, etc.) or sound effect (play of a specific music, etc.) is executed during the execution of the jackpot game, it is a disadvantageous type of jackpot. In such a case, there is a possibility that the execution of the jackpot game will end before the player fully enjoys the effects (display effects and sound effects) executed during the jackpot game.

  In contrast, the number of rounds is determined by providing a plurality of specific winning holes with different benefits (the number of winning balls to be paid out) and different specific winning holes that can be entered according to the jackpot type. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing (that is, sufficiently ensuring the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game). More specifically, in the case of an advantageous type of jackpot, while setting a specific winning opening (that is, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) with a lot of benefits (number of winning balls) to be awarded in each round of jackpot, In the case of an unfavorable type of jackpot, a special winning opening (that is, the left specific winning hole 650La) with a small number of benefits (number of winning balls) is set to be able to enter in each round of jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing the number of disadvantageous jackpot rounds. Therefore, it is possible to give a sharpness for each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the configuration of the two variable winning devices (left variable winning device 650L, right variable winning device 650R) in the sixth embodiment will be described in more detail. FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the left variable winning device 650L in a state where the left specific winning port 650La is ready for winning (winning), and FIG. 85 (b) is a right variable winning device. It is a front perspective view in the case where the right specific winning opening 650Ra of 650R is in a state in which a ball can be entered.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in a state where the left specific winning opening 650La can enter a ball, the movable member 650Lb protrudes toward the front side of the front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the portion of the movable member 650Lb that protrudes to the front side of the front side of the base plate 60 forms an inclination that goes downward from the upper right direction toward the lower left direction. A game ball that has reached an area (specific area) below the first entrance 64 is guided in the lower left direction when viewed from the front where the left specific prize opening 650La is provided, and entered into the left specific prize opening 650La. Can do. Further, since the upper left side of the right specific winning opening 650Ra is blocked by the movable member 650Lb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, in the case where the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first inlet 64) is surely only the left specific winning opening 650La. You can enter the ball.

  On the other hand, in a state where the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, as shown in FIG. 85B, the movable member 650Rb protrudes toward the front side of the front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the portion of the movable member 650Rb that protrudes in front of the base plate 60 from the front side forms an inclination that goes downward from the upper left direction toward the lower right direction. The game ball that has reached the area below the first entrance 64 (specific area) is guided in the lower right direction when viewed from the front where the right specific prize opening 650Ra is provided, and enters the right specific prize opening 650Ra. Can be made. Further, since the upper right side of the left specific winning opening 650La is closed by the movable member 650Rb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the left specific winning opening 650La. Therefore, in the case where the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first inlet 64) is surely only the right specific winning opening 650Ra. You can enter the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the detailed configuration of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb described above will be described. In the description of FIG. 86, the lower side of the figure indicates the front side direction of the game board 13, and the upper side indicates the rear side direction of the game board 13. First, FIG. 86A is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. As shown on the left side of FIG. 86 (a), the movable member 650Lb is a base member 650Lb1 that is substantially horizontally long and has a shape that protrudes from the left and right ends of the base member 650Lb1 toward the back side of the game board 13. The protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 are provided. Although not shown in the drawings, the projecting portions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 are connected to the left variable prize winning device solenoid (not shown) at the ends opposite to the base member 650Lb1, respectively. The base member 650Lb1 is moved forward in front of the base plate 60 via the projections 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 by driving the left variable prize winning device solenoid (the solenoid is turned on), and is buried in the back side of the base plate 60. From the base plate 60 to the front side of the base plate 60. On the other hand, when the solenoid for the left variable prize-winning device is turned off, the base member 650Lb1 is moved to the back in the front view and is buried in the back side of the base plate 60.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), a notch 650Lb5 is provided at the center of the base member 650Lb1 from the front side toward the back side, and only the connection portion 650Lb2 provided on the back side as viewed from the front side. Thus, the left side and the right side of the base member 650Lb1 are connected without being separated. The width of the notch 650Lb5 is configured to be wider than at least the thickness of the movable member 650Rb. Although details will be described later, by engaging the movable member 650Rb with the notch 650Lb2, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved in and out independently without interfering with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the movable member 650Rb has the same shape as the movable member 650Lb, except that the orientation (arrangement) of the notch 650Rb5 is opposite to the movable member 650Lb. The notch 650Rb5 of the movable member 650Rb is provided from the rear side of the front view toward the front side of the base member 650Rb1, and is connected to the left side of the base member 650Lb1 only by the connection portion 650Rb2 provided on the front side of the front view. The right side is connected without separation. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 85, the movable member 650 </ b> Lb and the movable member Rb are in a state of being stored behind the base plate 60 in a state where they intersect each other. At this time, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are in a state where the notch portion 650Lb5 and the notch portion 650 are engaged. In other words, the connecting portion 650Lb5 of the movable member 650Lb and the connecting portion 650R5 of the movable member 650Rb are stored facing each other. By storing in this way, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be stored in a relatively small space, so that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively utilized.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the movable member 650Rb performs the protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the movable member 650Rb performs the protruding operation, almost the entire base member 650Rb1 of the movable member 650Rb is exposed to the near side of the base plate 60. Accordingly, the base member 650Rb1 forms an inclination that is directed downward toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that the game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first entrance 64 is along the inclination. It is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  FIG. 86 (c) is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the movable member 650Lb performs the protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the connection portion 650Lb2 of the movable member 650Lb approaches the connection portion 650Rb2 of the movable member 650Rb as the operation proceeds. This projecting operation is continued until the connecting portion 650Lb contacts the connecting portion 650Rb2, and the connecting portions contact each other, thereby preventing the projecting operation of the movable member 650Lb and stopping the operation. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 86C, the movable member 650Lb is in a state where at least the connection portion 650Lb2 is housed behind the base plate 60 at the protruding position. Even if a part of the base portion on the back side (a range including at least the connection portion 650Lb2) is housed, the game ball sufficiently passes through the range protruding to the near side from the base plate 60. The possible width is exposed. Therefore, when the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the projecting position, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first ball inlet 64) is surely left-selected by the inclination formed by the base member 650Lb1. Can be guided to 650 La.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), three types of jackpot types A6, B6, and C6 are defined in the first jackpot type selection table 202b of the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 87, “big hit A6” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”. “Big jackpot A6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and a probability variation state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the “big hit A6” is reached, the right specific winning opening 650Ra enters a state in which it is possible to enter the ball in each round of the big win (that is, the movable member 650Rb changes to the protruding position). For this reason, “Big Jack A6” has the most rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of a special symbol advantageous to the short time state of the normal symbol is set) The number of benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each entry is also large (10). Therefore, “big hit A6” is the big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random value (counter value) associated with “big hit A6” is “0 to 4”. Since there are five, the percentage that “Big Jack A6” is determined when the jackpot is won is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, “big hit B6” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 49”. “Big jackpot B6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is seven and a probability change state of a special symbol is given after the big jackpot ends. Further, when “big hit B6” is reached, the left specific winning opening 650La is allowed to enter in each big hit round (that is, the movable member 650Lb changes to the protruding position). For this reason, “Big Jack B6” has a relatively small number of rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of a special symbol advantageous to the short time state of the normal symbol is set) The number of bonuses (number of prize balls to be paid out) given to each player is relatively small (seven). Therefore, “Big Jack B6” is a kind of jackpot type that is most advantageous in terms of gaming status after jackpot, but at least in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won in jackpot, it is more disadvantageous to the player than “Big Jack A6”. Become. Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random value (counter value) associated with “big hit B6” is “5 to 49”. Since the number is 45, when the jackpot is won, the ratio at which the “jackpot B6” is determined is 45% (45/100).

  Further, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, “big hit C6” is defined in association with it. “Big jackpot C6” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is seven and the short time state of the normal symbol is given only until the end of the 100 special symbol fluctuation display after the jackpot. Furthermore, when the “big hit C6” is reached, the left specific winning opening 650La is allowed to enter in each big hit round (that is, the movable member 650Lb is changed to the protruding position). For this reason, “big hit C6” has a relatively small number of rounds, a disadvantageous gaming state after the big hit, and a relatively small number of bonuses (the number of prize balls to be paid out) during each jackpot (7 ). Therefore, “big hit C6” is the most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the big hit and in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the big hit. Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random value (counter value) associated with “big hit C6” is “50 to 99”. Since the number is 50, when the jackpot is won, the ratio at which the “jackpot C6” is determined is 50% (50/100).

  Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment has not been changed except for the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b, and therefore description of other configurations of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 87B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10) in that a movable type storage area 203aa is added. Yes.

  The movable type storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the movable member that is movable (protruded) in each big hit round. When the jackpot is reached, data indicating a movable member corresponding to the jackpot type is stored for this movable type. More specifically, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot A6 is determined, “01H” indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, while either of the jackpots B6 and C6 is stored. Is determined, “02H” indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (see S322 and S323 in FIG. 88). During the execution of the jackpot game, each time a new round is started, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is identified and the protruding operation of the movable member corresponding to the data is set (FIG. 89). S1021). Further, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa has an initial value set to “00H”, and is reset to the initial value even when the jackpot ends (see S1024 in FIG. 89). The initial value “00H” means that the jackpot game is not being executed (that is, the type of the movable member is not specified).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 88, the special symbol variation start process 6 (S221) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation start process 6 (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Similar to the symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), the lottery for “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol loss” is selected based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 while performing (whether or not).

  Among the special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S311, each of S301 to S311 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, after the display mode corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the process of S306 (S306), the current jackpot type is the jackpot A6. (S321), if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A6 (S321: No), "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa ( S322), the process proceeds to S307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S321 that the current jackpot type is jackpot A6 (S321: Yes), “01H” indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S323). The process proceeds to S307. The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa in each process of S322 and S323 is referred to when a new round is started with a big hit, and the movable member corresponding to the stored data is moved to the protruding position. The

  Next, details of the jackpot control process 6 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (S921). The jackpot control process 6 (S921) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31). ), The pachinko machine 10 is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of a specific winning opening when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol.

  Of the jackpot control process 6 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 89), the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (FIG. 31), the same processes as those of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011 and S1013 to S1016 are executed.

  In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that the start timing of a new round has come (S1004: Yes), it is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa. The protruding operation of the movable member corresponding to the stored data is set (S1021). More specifically, when “01H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the protruding operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that the right specific winning opening 650Ra can be entered. . On the other hand, when “02H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the left specific winning opening 650La can be entered. When the process of S1021 ends, the process proceeds to S1006.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1007 that the closing condition for the large opening (specific winning opening) has been established (S1007: Yes), the process is movable. The burying operation of the movable member corresponding to the data stored in the type storage area 203aa is set (S1022), and this process ends. That is, when “01H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersion operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that the right specific winning opening 650Ra cannot be entered. On the other hand, when “02H” is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersion operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so as to make it impossible to enter the left specific winning opening 650La.

  In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1015 is completed, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is reset to “00H” (S1024). ), The process proceeds to S1016. By this jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89), the variable operation of each movable member is made so that the specific winning opening corresponding to the jackpot type can be entered among the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be controlled appropriately.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to have two specific winning ports (the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra) having different privileges given to the specific area. The specific winning opening that can be entered according to the jackpot type is variable. More specifically, by performing a protruding operation, a movable member 650Lb that forms an inclination that guides the game ball flowing down to the specific area to the left specific winning opening 650La, and the game ball flowing down to the specific area to the right A movable member 650Rb that forms an inclination that leads to the specific winning opening 650Ra is provided between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In the big hit type (big hit B6, C6) that allows the left specific winning opening 650La to enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is controlled to perform the protruding operation in each round of big hit. On the other hand, in the big hit type (big hit A6) in which the right specific winning opening 650Ra can be entered, the movable member 650Rb is controlled to perform a protruding operation in each big win.

  Each of the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb is configured to have a width capable of receiving almost all the game balls that have flowed down to the specific area in a state where the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position. For this reason, in a state where any one of the movable members is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area can be almost certainly entered into the corresponding specific prize opening. Here, the specific region (the region below the first entrance 64) can reach almost all game balls that have not entered the general winning entrance 63 or the first entrance 64 regardless of the launch direction. It is configured. In other words, most (90% or more) of the left-handed game balls and the right-handed game balls reach the specific area. Therefore, both the case where the left movable member 650Lb is a jackpot type arranged at the projecting position and the case where the right movable member 650Rb is a jackpot type arranged at the projecting position are supported regardless of the launch direction of the game ball. The game ball can be entered into the specific winning port (either the left specific winning port 650La or the right specific winning port 650Ra). Therefore, every time a big hit is made, it is possible to cause the player to select a preferred firing direction and to play a big hit game.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a surface on which a game ball can enter (left specific winning port 650La, The right specific winning opening 650Ra) is arranged to face each other. Then, each movable member forms a slope that is directed downward toward each specific winning opening, thereby constituting a state in which a game ball can enter each specific winning opening. In other words, each specific prize opening is provided in a direction in which the game ball does not normally travel, and each movable member can change the traveling direction of the game ball in a direction different from the normal direction to enter each specific prize opening. State. Thereby, the configuration of the specific winning opening 65a of the first embodiment and the like described above (provided in the course of the flow path through which the game ball travels even in the normal state, so that most of the game balls flowing down the flow path are allowed to flow in. Each specific winning opening can be made compact as compared to the (open structure). That is, since each specific winning opening can be configured with an area of one game ball or more and less than two, it is possible to reduce the area of the specific winning opening. Therefore, since each variable prize-winning device can be made compact, the area that the two variable prize-winning devices show on the board surface can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of large winning openings (specific winning openings) that are opened and closed during the execution of the jackpot game are provided on the board surface, each of the large winning openings is a flow path in which the large winning opening is provided. Generally, it is configured to be openable with substantially the same width. In addition, a plurality of big winning holes are arranged side by side in the vertical direction when viewed from the front in one channel, and a game ball is placed in any of the big winning ports just by continuing to fire game balls into the same channel during the big hit. Generally, it is configured to allow entry. However, in this configuration, the installation area increases as the number of special winning openings increases, so that there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration is reduced. In contrast, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, each variable winning device can be configured in a compact manner, so that the degree of freedom in the configuration of the board surface can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, the two specific winning ports (the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra) are given benefits (the number of winning balls to be paid out) when game balls enter each other. Are configured differently. Then, according to the jackpot type, the type of the specific winning opening that allows the game ball to enter during the jackpot game is varied. By comprising in this way, the difference of the advantageous degree for every jackpot type can be enlarged more. In other words, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the type of game state to be transferred after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the benefits (the number of prize balls to be paid out) that are given each time a player enters a specific winning slot is also a jackpot type Since it can be made different depending on the game, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds per jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value without limitation, and must be set within a range of an upper limit (for example, 16 rounds) or less. For this reason, there is a limit in making a difference in the award sphere to be paid out only by the number of rounds. In addition, if an attempt is made to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type within the upper limit (16 rounds), the number of rounds of the jackpot of the relatively unfavorable type can only be reduced, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. As a result, the jackpot period of the disadvantageous type is shortened. Therefore, in particular, when a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game, etc.) or sound effect (play of a specific music, etc.) is executed during the execution of the jackpot game, it is a disadvantageous type of jackpot. In such a case, there is a possibility that the execution of the jackpot game will end before the player fully enjoys the effects (display effects and sound effects) executed during the jackpot game.

  In contrast, the number of rounds is determined by providing a plurality of specific winning holes with different benefits (the number of winning balls to be paid out) and different specific winning holes that can be entered according to the jackpot type. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing (that is, sufficiently ensuring the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game). More specifically, in the case of an advantageous type of jackpot, while setting a specific winning opening (that is, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) with a lot of benefits (number of winning balls) to be awarded in each round of jackpot, In the case of an unfavorable type of jackpot, a special winning opening (that is, the left specific winning hole 650La) with a small number of benefits (number of winning balls) is set to be able to enter in each round of jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing the number of disadvantageous jackpot rounds. Therefore, it is possible to give a sharpness for each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, an independent drive source is provided for each movable member. However, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb may be configured to be controllable by one drive source. More specifically, for example, only one motor is provided as a drive source, and the motor is driven in the forward direction (first direction) with each movable member 650Lb being disposed at the immersive position (embedded position). As a result, only the movable member 650Lb moves toward the protruding position, while only the movable member 650Rb moves toward the protruding position by driving the motor in the negative direction (second direction). May be. That is, two types of gears are provided for the rotation shaft of one motor: a left tilting gear for transmitting a driving force to the movable member 650Lb and a right tilting gear for transmitting a driving force to the movable member 650Rb. The left tilt gear is arranged in such a manner that the movable member 650Lb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the forward direction at the retracted position of each movable member. That is, the teeth are arranged in such a range that the gear on the movable member 650Lb side and the left tilting gear engage only when the motor rotates forward. Further, the right tilting gear is arranged in such a manner that the movable member 650Rb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the negative direction at the retracted position of each movable member. That is, the teeth are arranged in such a range that the gear on the movable member 650Rb side and the right tilting gear are engaged only when the motor rotates negatively. With this configuration, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be separately moved by one drive source, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the sixth embodiment, each variable winning device is configured to be disposed below the first entrance 64, but is not limited thereto. For example, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a right-handed game ball is placed in a state where any movable member is disposed at the protruding position. , Almost all of them may be guided to a specific winning opening. Conversely, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and left-handed in a state where any movable member is disposed at the protruding position. You may comprise so that a game ball may be guide | induced almost all to a specific winning opening. Since the right channel and the left channel of the variable display device unit 80 have a smaller space than the area below the first entrance 64, each variable winning device and each movable member are placed on the board surface. The occupied area can be further reduced. In this case, the width and inclination angle of each movable member may be adjusted according to the width of the flow path.

<Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. 92, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the above-described sixth embodiment, two specific winning ports (left specific winning port 650La and right specific winning port 650Ra) are provided, and a specific winning port is formed by projecting a movable member corresponding to each specific winning port. The game ball that reaches the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is guided to the specific prize opening by forming an inclination toward the top.

  On the other hand, in this modification, instead of the two movable members, a single moving member 650b capable of parallel movement in the left-right direction in front view is provided between the two specific winning holes in the specific region. As will be described in detail later, the moving member 650b forms a slope whose left side is directed toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front, while its right side is formed as a slope directed toward the lower right direction when viewed from the front. When the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball, by moving the moving member 650b in the left direction when viewed from the front and adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, the left specific winning opening 650La is inclined by the left side of the moving member 650b. The game ball can be guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. On the other hand, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball, by moving the moving member 650b in the right direction when viewed from the front, the right specific winning opening 650Ra is moved to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the right inclination of the moving member 650b. A game ball is configured to be movable. In this way, the number of solenoids for driving various movable members can be reduced by translating the single movable member 650b to the left and right, so the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  The board surface structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 90, the game board 13 in the present modified example has a movable member 650b instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 84) of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment described above. It differs in that it is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the moving member 650b is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and in a normal state (when the big hit game is not being executed), the moving member 650b is in a stationary state at an intermediate position of each specific winning opening. In this state (see FIG. 90), a space equal to or more than one game ball is generated between the moving member 650b and each specific winning opening. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) during normal times is a flow path between the moving member 650b and the left specific winning opening 650La, or the moving member 650b and the right specific prize. It flows down the flow path between the port 650Ra and is guided to the out port 66.

  Next, the detailed structure of the moving member 650b will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 (a) is a top view of the moving member 650b, and FIG. 91 (b) is a front view of the moving member 650b. 91 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the XCI-XCI shown in FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), the moving member 650b is configured such that a plate-like protruding portion 650bb having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape protrudes on the back side of a substantially triangular prism-shaped member. Although not shown, the protrusion 650bb is connected to a moving member motor (not shown), and the moving member motor is driven in the forward direction to move the protrusion 650bb in the left direction when viewed from the front. The driving force is transmitted, and the moving member 650b moves parallel to the left in the front view. Further, when the moving member motor is driven in the negative direction, a driving force in the right direction in the front view is transmitted to the protrusion 650bb, and the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction in the front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), a right slope 650b1 and a left slope 650b2 each having a width of one or more game balls are provided on the right side and the left side of the moving member 650b. Yes. The game ball that has reached the moving member 650b from above flows down along either the right slope 650b1 or the left slope 650b2.

  FIG. 91 (d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b. As shown in FIG. 91 (d), the protruding portion 650 bb of the moving member 650 b is included behind the base plate 60 through the left / right moving hole 650 ba formed in the base plate 60. The end of the protrusion 650bb on the far side as viewed from the front is connected to the moving member motor as described above. When a driving force in the left-right direction is applied to the moving member 650b by the moving member motor, the protrusion 650bb moves in the left-right direction along the left-right moving hole 650ba, and as a result, the moving member 650b translates in the left-right direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the flow-down direction of the game ball for each arrangement of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction in the front view and is adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball has reached the specific area from the left direction. (I.e., the left-handed game ball) falls to the slope on the left side when viewed from the front of the moving member 650b, and flows down along the slope to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the right direction (that is, the game ball that has been hit to the right) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the right variable winning device 650R in the direction of the out port 66. Flow down. Thereby, in a state where the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction, the game ball can be entered only into the left specific winning opening 650La.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction in the front view and is adjacent to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the right direction (I.e., a right-handed game ball) falls to the slope on the right side of the front view of the moving member 650b, and flows down along the slope to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the left direction (that is, the game ball left-handed) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the left variable winning device 650L in the direction of the out port 66. Flow down. Thereby, in a state where the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction, the game ball can be entered only into the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment, instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, the single moving member 650b is translated in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the moving direction. One of the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra) is configured to form a state in which a game ball can enter. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the state of the two specific winning holes with one driving source (moving member motor) (switching between a state where it is possible to enter and a state where it is difficult to enter). Therefore, since the number of drive sources can be reduced as compared with the sixth embodiment described above, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition, during the execution of the big hit game, the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening on the side close to the moving member 650b by the inclination provided on the left and right sides of the moving member 650b. Only by visually recognizing the arrangement in the left-right direction, the player can easily understand the firing direction in which the game ball can easily enter. That is, when the moving member 650b is moved to the right in the front view and is close to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball can easily enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra by making a right strike. Can be balled. On the other hand, when the moving member 650b is moved to the left in a front view and is close to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball can easily enter the left specific winning opening 650La by left-handed. Can be balled.

  Further, in this modified example, similarly to the sixth embodiment described above, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a game ball can be entered. The planes (the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra) are arranged to face each other. Thereby, similarly to the sixth embodiment, as the area of each specific winning opening, it is sufficient to secure an area equal to or more than one game ball, and the area of the specific winning opening can be reduced. That is, each variable winning device can be made compact, so that the area shown on the board surface by the two variable winning devices can be reduced. Therefore, the freedom degree of a board surface structure can be raised.

  In the modification of the sixth embodiment, the specific winning awards are arranged in the left-right direction and the moving member 650b is configured to be movable in the left-right direction between the specific winning awards. It is not a thing. For example, each specific winning opening may be arranged in the vertical direction, and the moving member 650b may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction from a position close to one specific winning opening to a position close to the other specific winning opening. Moreover, in this case, you may delete the inclination of the side surface on the opposite side to the side surface in which the specific winning opening is arrange | positioned among the moving members 650b. With this configuration, the area occupied by each variable winning device and the moving member 650b on the board surface can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

  In the sixth embodiment and its modified examples, the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra are always open, and each specific winning port is directed to the flow direction of the game ball (up and down direction in front view). Although it was configured to be oriented in an orthogonal direction, it was configured to prevent (suppress) the game ball from entering each specific winning opening during normal times (a state other than during the execution of the jackpot game) However, it is not limited to this. For example, an opening / closing door for opening / closing each specific winning opening may be provided separately from the movable member. In the jackpot gaming state, only the opening / closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type (the opening / closing plate associated with the specific winning opening where the game ball that has reached the specific area by the movable member is easily guided) may be opened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game ball is thrown into the specific winning opening at the normal time and the prize ball is paid out even though it is not in the big hit game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. In this case, the movable member may be configured to be movable periodically or randomly regardless of the jackpot type. By configuring in this way, to achieve the gameability of launching the game ball aiming at the timing at which the game ball is easily guided by the movable member with respect to the specific winning opening with the open / close door opened Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In order to realize this gameability, the player understands to which specific winning opening the game ball is more easily guided by using the moving member 650b in the modification of the sixth embodiment. Since it becomes easy, it is more effective. It should be noted that the period during which the movable member is moved periodically or randomly may be only during the execution of the jackpot game, or may be configured to always move while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Also good. In addition, when performing the modification which provides an opening / closing door with respect to each specific prize opening in the modification of 6th Embodiment mentioned above, arrangement | positioning of the moving member 650b is an intermediate position of left specific prize opening 650La and right specific prize opening 650Rb In addition, each opening and closing door tilts in the direction of the moving member 650b, thereby forming a flow path toward the specific winning opening by the side surface of the moving member 650b and the inclined opening and closing door, It is good also as a structure which will be in the state which can enter each specific winning opening. By configuring in this way, in a state in which it is possible to enter each specific winning opening, the width that allows the game ball to be guided to the corresponding specific winning opening is widened, thereby reducing the possibility of generating a waste ball. can do. Therefore, a player's profit can be increased more.

  In the sixth embodiment and the modification thereof, when a game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra, ten winning balls are paid out, whereas when a game ball enters the left specific winning opening 650La Although seven prize balls are paid out, the amount of privilege granted when a game ball enters each specific prize opening can be arbitrarily determined. In this case, it is not always necessary to increase the number of prize balls given when entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra to be greater than the number of prize balls awarded when entering the left specific winning slot 650La. . For example, the number of awarded balls may be matched, or the number of awarded balls may be increased when entering the left specific prize opening 650La than when entering the right specific prize opening 650Ra. Good. In addition, the privilege given when entering each specific winning opening is not limited to the winning ball. For example, if a game ball enters one specific winning opening during the jackpot game, only the winning ball is paid out, whereas if a game ball enters the other specific winning opening, Instead of paying out the balls, or in addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability change state of the special symbol is given as a privilege after the end of the jackpot.

  In the sixth embodiment and the modifications thereof, the configuration is such that two specific winning holes are provided in the specific area, and the specific winning hole that is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball according to the jackpot type is switched. It is not something that can be done. For example, one or both of the two specific winning openings provided in the specific area may be used as a winning entrance (second entrance) that triggers a special symbol lottery. That is, at least one of the two specific winning openings may be a second entrance having the same function as the first entrance 64. In this case, it may be configured such that the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb (moving member 650b) can be moved in a predetermined movable pattern when the winning symbol is a normal symbol lottery. In addition, when changing into a combination of the specific winning opening and the second winning opening, the condition that each winning opening (the specific winning opening and the second winning opening) can enter can be satisfied at the same time. Like the movable member in the sixth embodiment, it is desirable that the movable member for forming a state in which a ball can be entered into each winning opening can be operated independently. The through gate 67 is in a state in which a game ball can always pass through, and the normal symbol lottery is executed in the same manner as in the normal time even during the execution of the big hit game. Therefore, during the round game of each jackpot (while the movable member corresponding to the specific winning opening is located at the protruding position), it is a win in the normal symbol lottery, and the movable member corresponding to the second entrance is protruding. There is a possibility that the condition to move to the position is satisfied. For this reason, if the movable member which can form the state which can enter only into one entrance is used like the moving member 650b in the modification of 6th Embodiment, at least one prize will be won. There may be a problem in that it becomes impossible to enter a state where it is possible to enter a ball even though the condition for allowing a ball to enter the mouth is satisfied. Therefore, as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which separate movable members corresponding to each winning opening can be controlled to move independently, each winning opening can enter the ball. Even if the conditions are satisfied in an overlapping manner, the movable members corresponding to the winning ports can be moved simultaneously. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes impossible to enter a state where it is possible to enter a ball even though the condition that enables entering a ball to at least one winning opening is established.

  In the sixth embodiment and the modification thereof, the two specific winning holes are arranged to face each other in the specific area (the area below the first ball opening 64) and go to each specific winning hole. Although it was configured to guide the game ball that reached the specific area by forming an inclination to the corresponding specific prize opening, the configuration for placing the game ball into the specific prize opening and the specific prize opening is However, it is not limited to these. For example, in the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, two variable winning devices having different numbers of awarded balls may be arranged vertically in a specific area. And it is good also as a structure which changes the special winning opening opened according to jackpot classification.

  In the sixth embodiment and the modification thereof, the specific winning opening that allows the player to enter according to the jackpot type is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, it may be configured such that a specific winning opening that allows a player to enter according to the number of jackpot rounds is made different. Thereby, the freedom degree of control can be raised more.

  In the sixth embodiment and the modification thereof, the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra are opposed to each other. That is, the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port La are arranged side by side, and the left specific winning port 650La is configured to face right in the front view, and the right specific winning port 650Ra is configured to face left in the front view. There is no need to face each specific prize opening. While the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position, it is possible to enter the ball (easy to enter), and while the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, and each movable member is in the embedded position (immersive position). The left specific winning opening 650La is provided at a position where it is impossible to enter a ball (it is difficult to enter) while it is arranged, and it is possible to enter a ball while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position (entrance) Easy), and while the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position and when each movable member is disposed at the embedment position (immersion position), it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter). Any structure may be used as long as the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided. As a specific example, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the entrance spherical surface of the left specific winning opening 650La and the entrance spherical surface of the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be arranged in parallel. In other words, as shown in FIG. 136, a left specific winning port 650La configured by a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 is provided on the lower left side of the movable member 650Lb, and at the lower right side of the movable member 650Rb. Alternatively, a right specific winning opening 650Ra configured by a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 may be provided. In addition, for each person who guides the game ball that has flowed down the movable member to the specific prize opening in a state where the corresponding movable member is arranged at the protruding position with respect to the periphery of each specific prize opening, the corresponding movable member has It is good also as a structure which provides outer edge part 650La1 and 650Ra1 for preventing (suppressing) that the game ball which flowed down in the state arrange | positioned in an immersion position (immersion position) reaches | attains a specific winning opening. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially inverted “U” -shaped peripheral portion 650La1 is provided around the left specific winning opening 650La. The game ball flowing down during normal time is prevented from reaching the left specific winning opening 650La by the upper side and the left side of the peripheral portion 650La1. Further, in a state where the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower left via the movable member 650Lb is from the upper right side in the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral portion 650La1. The left specific winning opening 650La is guided by the downward inclination. In addition, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially “U” -shaped peripheral portion 650Ra1 is provided around the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball that has flowed down in the normal time is prevented from reaching the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the upper side and the right side of the peripheral portion 650Ra1. Further, in a state where the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower right via the movable member 650Rb is from the upper left side of the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral edge portion 650Ra1. The slope is directed to the lower right side, and is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. As described above, even if the right specific winning port 650La and the left specific winning port 650Ra are not configured to face each other, the same gameability as in the sixth embodiment described above can be realized.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modifications, in each of the big hits, the corresponding movable member is moved to the projecting position so that the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball and the right specific winning opening Although it was set as the structure which forms the state which can enter into 650Ra, it is not restricted to this. For example, a state in which the player can enter the left specific winning opening 650La and a state in which the player can enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be switched according to the passage of the game ball. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a movable member whose state (arrangement) is switched structurally each time the game ball passes, or by providing a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball. It is good also as a structure implement | achieved in.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 108, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning holes (left) with different numbers of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the specific area (the area below the first inlet 64). The specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and according to the jackpot type, the type of the specific winning slot that can be entered in each round of jackpot is variable.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, instead of the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, a game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the probability change game after the jackpot ends. Two probability variation winning holes (left probability variation prize opening 655La, right probability variation prize winning hole 655Ra) are provided to trigger the state (the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short state of the normal symbol). In the first round of the big hit, either one of the two probability variation winning awards is set in a state where the player can enter the ball for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). That is, one movable member moves to the projecting position, thereby forming an inclination that is directed downward toward one of the probability variation winning awards. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. During a predetermined period (one second) in which one probability variation winning opening can be entered in this first round, Among the game balls that have been left-handed and have reached a specific area, one of the game balls can enter the probability variation prize opening and the other has a period during which it is difficult to enter. For this reason, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to realize a novel game performance in which a player can predict a launch direction in which a player can enter a probability variation prize opening and fire a game ball.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110. In addition, the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 93, the board | substrate surface structure of the game board 13 in this 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the board configuration (see FIG. 84) of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment, instead of the left variable winning device 650L. The variable prize winning device 655L is provided, the right variable prize winning device 655R is provided instead of the right variable prize winning device 650R, and the variable prize is provided below the area where the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are provided. The only difference is that the device 65 is provided.

  The left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R are respectively provided with a left certain variation winning port 655La and a right certain variation variation winning port 655Ra having the same shape as the left specific winning port 650La and the right specific winning port 650Ra in the sixth embodiment. Yes. For this reason, the game ball that has reached the specific area in the normal time (a state other than the execution of the jackpot game) does not enter the left probability change winning opening 655La or the right probability change winning prize opening 655Ra, and does not enter the out slot 66. Flow down in the direction of. Further, in the state in which the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the movable member 650Lb forms an inclination (an inclination toward the lower left direction from the upper right direction in front view) toward the left probability variation winning opening 655La. The reached game ball is guided to the left probability variation entrance 655La. On the other hand, in the state in which the movable member 650Rb protrudes, the movable member 650Rb forms an inclination (an inclination toward the lower right direction from the upper left in the front view) toward the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra. The game ball that has reached the right is led to the right probability change entrance 655Ra. Note that, as described above, the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position only for one second (predetermined period) in one round, so that any one of the movable members is disposed at the protruding position. Even if the game ball reaches the specific area, the movable member will be immersed if it cannot reach the corresponding probability change prize opening after one second has elapsed after being placed at the protruding position. As a result, the game ball flows down toward the out port 66.

  The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 provided in the game board 13 of the first embodiment or the like. That is, a specific winning opening 65a into which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis (Not shown). The specific winning opening 65a in the seventh embodiment is set to an open state in which a game ball can enter in each round after the second round of jackpot. More specifically, in the first round of jackpot, either the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is changed to the protruding position for one second according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, in each round after the second round of the jackpot, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are maintained in an immersive state, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is opened forward to the specific winning opening 65a. And an open state in which a game ball can enter. This open state continues until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round or until ten or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. When a game ball enters one of the probability winning prize openings (left probability changing prize opening 655La or right probability changing prize opening 655Ra) in the first round of the jackpot, the probability changing gaming state (special symbol probability changing state, In addition, if a game ball does not enter the probability change prize opening during the jackpot game, while the bonus game is being executed, 100 times of the short game state (special A low probability state of a symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol). Therefore, since the degree of advantage after the jackpot is varied depending on whether or not the game ball enters the probability variation entrance, the game ball enters the probability variation entrance in the first round for the player. It can be noticed by whether or not. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R will be described. FIG. 94A is an enlarged front view of a specific area portion in the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 94B is a cross-sectional view taken along XCIV-XCIV shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R are connected on the back side of the base plate 60. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the game ball that is provided in the left probability variation winning device 655L and enters the left probability variation winning port 655La is guided to the back side of the base plate 60 and discharged. And a right probability variation flow path 655Rd for guiding and discharging the game ball that has entered the right probability variation winning prize opening 655Ra to the back side of the base plate 60, and the back side of the base plate 60. Have joined. In addition, a discharge port 656 for discharging the entered game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided at a position where the left probability variation channel 655Ld and the right probability variation channel 655Rd merge. Although not shown in the figure, the discharge port 656 is provided with a ball passage switch (probability change switch) that can detect the passage of the game ball. By detecting the passage of the probability variation switch, it is determined that a game ball has entered one of the probability variation winning awards, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, the respective probability variation winning devices are joined together, and the game balls that have entered the certain probability variation winning prize outlet are discharged through one outlet 656, and further, the passage of the one outlet is monitored. By doing so, it is possible to limit the number of probability variation switches to a minimum by determining whether or not a game ball has entered one of the probability variation winning awards. That is, when a probability variation switch is provided for each probability variation winning device, it is necessary to provide at least two probability variation switches. However, by adopting the configuration of the seventh embodiment, two probability variation prize winning ports are formed with only one probability variation switch. It is possible to accurately determine that a game ball has entered either of the above. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of probability change switches. Moreover, it can be handled as one winning device by joining each probability variation winning device inside. Here, in the game rules, an upper limit (for example, two) is set for the number of winning devices that can be entered during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, since the number of winning devices in the game rules can be reduced by adopting a configuration in which two probability variation winning devices are handled as one winning device as in the seventh embodiment, it is easier to satisfy the game rules. A pachinko machine 10 can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, regarding the flow direction of the game ball in the first round when the movable member 650Rb is a jackpot type in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position in the first round in the seventh embodiment. explain. For simplification of description, in the following description, the movable pattern (open pattern) in which the movable member 650Lb is disposed at the protruding position is an open pattern that is easy to win in the left probability variation winning opening 655La. Is called an "open pattern". On the other hand, the movable pattern (open pattern) in which the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position is referred to as a “right V open pattern” in the sense of an open pattern that is easy to win in the right probability change winning opening 655Ra.

  FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the right V opening pattern (movable pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position) is determined and the player makes a left strike. is there. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the left-handed game ball falls on the movable member 650Rb from the left in the front view with respect to the specific area. Since the movable member 650Rb forms an inclination that goes downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, the momentum of the game ball flowing down (the momentum in the lower left direction) is not cut off. Therefore, it is possible to make it relatively easy to enter the right probability variation prize opening 655Ra during one second when the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position.

  FIGS. 95 (b) and (c) are diagrams showing the flow direction of the game ball when the right V opening pattern is determined and the player makes a right strike. As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the right-handed game ball falls on the movable member 650Rb from the right in the front view with respect to the specific area. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the game ball has a momentum (momentum) toward the left in the front view, so that the momentum is scraped (momentum becomes zero). Then, it rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the upper left direction when viewed from the front. When the moment of rolling in the upper left direction disappears due to the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb (the momentum becomes 0), the game ball rolls in the lower right direction in front view along the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. To start. However, since it takes a relatively long time (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the momentum of the game ball reaches zero, the momentum gradually accelerates from the state where the momentum is zero, and reaches the right probability change prize opening 655Ra. Just no time left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), one second elapses while the game ball rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, and the movable member 650Rb is immersed. In other words, since the inclination toward the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra is lost, the game ball rolling on the movable member 650Rb falls downward and is discharged through the out port 66. For this reason, when the right V opening pattern is determined and the player makes a right strike, the player reaches the right probability change prize opening 655Ra in one second when the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position. It becomes extremely difficult to do.

  Note that when the left V opening pattern is determined, the left and right operations of the right V opening pattern are reversed, which is essentially the same as the right V opening pattern. Therefore, although the illustration is omitted, it will be briefly described. However, when a right-handed strike is made when the left V opening pattern is determined, the game ball has a momentum in a leftward direction from the right in front view with respect to the specific area. Since the movement proceeds in a state, the player enters (wins) a ball into the left probability variation winning opening 655La along the inclination of the movable member 650Lb while maintaining the momentum. On the other hand, if left-handed is performed when the left V opening pattern is determined, the game ball proceeds with a momentum in the right direction from the left in the front view with respect to the specific area. Accordingly, the game ball that has fallen on the movable member 650Lb rolls in the upper right direction for about 0.5 seconds, and then flows down in the lower left direction in front view along the inclination. Accordingly, the movable member 650Lb is immersed before reaching the left probability variation winning opening 655La, as in the case where the right V opening pattern is determined and the right hand is hit (see FIGS. 95 (b) and 95 (c)). Then, the game ball flows down to the out port 66.

  Here, the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment has a period of about 1 second before the shot game ball reaches the specific area, whether left-handed or right-handed. Cost. Therefore, in the method of launching the game ball after confirming the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position in the first round of jackpot, immediately before the game ball reaches the specific area or immediately after reaching the specific area After 1 second, the movable member is returned to the immersive position. In other words, even if the game ball is fired after confirming the type of the movable member, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the probability variation prize opening. Therefore, for a player who wants to enter a game ball into the probable winning opening, in the first round of jackpot, any movable member is moved to the protruding position before moving to the protruding position. The type of the movable member to be predicted can be predicted, and the game ball can be fired in the predicted launch direction. Thereby, if the movable member predicted that the player is arranged at the protruding position matches the movable member actually arranged at the protruding position, the game ball can be entered into the probability variation prize opening. On the other hand, when the movable member opposite to the prediction is arranged at the protruding position, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the probability variation winning opening. Therefore, in the first round of each jackpot, the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position (the launch direction that makes it easier to enter the probability variation entrance) is more seriously predicted and the game ball is launched. Since it is possible to provide a novel gameplay, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 (b). In the seventh embodiment, the left V opening pattern (opening pattern in which the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position) is a big hit in the first round. The rate at which the type is determined is configured to be higher than the rate at which the jackpot type of the right V opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position) is determined. On the other hand, the average number of rounds for each jackpot type for which the left V open pattern is set is configured to be smaller than the average number of rounds for each jackpot type for which the right V open pattern is set. Therefore, in the first round of jackpot, by making a right-hand hit each time, a high probability (70%) will give a probable gaming state after the jackpot ends, but a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds (10 rounds or more) When the type is determined, the probability variation gaming state ends at a high rate. On the other hand, each time a game method that predicts an open pattern and changes the firing direction is performed, the transition to the probability change game state is confirmed, and a larger number of rounds (10 rounds or 16 rounds) is played. However, depending on the accuracy of the player's prediction, the rate of transition to the probabilistic gaming state will be greatly reduced (for example, a rate of 50% or less). There is a risk.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the gaming method in the first round of jackpot depending on what element the player gives priority to. More specifically, for players who place the highest priority on (priority) the rate at which the probability-changing gaming state is set, a right rate of about 70% can be achieved by making a right turn every time in the first round of jackpot The game method to which the probability variation state is given can be selected. On the other hand, for players who want to make a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds (a lot of rounds and want to have a good gaming state after the big hit), It is possible to select a game method in which it is predicted whether or not the number of rounds with a large number of jackpots is large, and the shooting direction of the game ball is varied according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for the jackpot won in the normal state (so-called first win), the right hit is made with an emphasis on the setting ratio of the probability variation gaming state, while the jackpot (so-called renso) won during the probability variation gaming state. A game method for predicting the jackpot type for hitting and switching the firing direction for the first hit, and a jackpot type for predicting the first hit and switching the firing direction, while for the consecutive hits, the probability ratio gaming state setting ratio (ie It is possible to allow the player to select various game methods, such as a game method in which right-handed is performed with an emphasis on the ratio to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to select a favorite game characteristic for each player and cause the game to be performed, so that it is possible to realize a wide range of game characteristics according to different preferences for each player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 received by everyone can be realized, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the first round of jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of jackpot. As shown in FIG. 96, when the jackpot is reached, a display region HR8 and a display region HR9 each having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape are formed for the upper left portion and the upper right portion in the main display region Dm. Inside the display area HR9, a character “Big jackpot” indicating that the jackpot game is currently being executed is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player understand that the jackpot game is being executed.

  Inside the display area HR8, various information indicating the progress status of the jackpot (display indicating the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds, and the total number of winning balls acquired in the jackpot of 1 are acquirable. Display showing the maximum number of winning balls). During the first round, the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of winning balls that can be acquired are concealed from the player. That is, as shown in FIG. 96, “ROUND: 01 / ???” is displayed as a display indicating the number of rounds, and “GET: 0000 / ???” is displayed as a display indicating the number of winning balls. Is done. This is because if the maximum number of rounds or the maximum number of winning balls is displayed first, the player who has viewed the displayed content will be recognized the jackpot type, and the type of movable movable member (probable change prize) This is because there is a possibility that the launch direction in which the ball can enter the mouth) may be specified. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, information that can identify the jackpot type, such as the number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls, is concealed until at least one round is completed. This eliminates clues for the player to specify the type of movable member that can be moved to the protruding position, and more seriously, the type of movable member that can be moved to the protruding position (probable entry into the probable winning prize opening). It is possible to select a launch direction in which a ball is possible. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Also, below the display areas HR8 and HR9, a display mode (selection effect) for prompting the player to select whether to make a left strike or a right strike is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, the display area HR10 is formed at a substantially central portion in the main display area Dm, and the letters “Choose!” Are displayed inside the display area HR10. Further, below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm (the left half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR11 in which the characters “Expectation Low” are displayed, and “Number of rounds” A horizontally long oval display area 12 on which the characters “High” are displayed, and a left-pointing arrow image YG1 simulating the left-pointing arrow are displayed. On the other hand, in the main display area Dm, below the display area HR9 (on the right half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical display area HR13 in which the characters “expectation High” are displayed, A horizontally long oval display area HR14 in which the characters “Several Low” are displayed, and a right-pointing arrow image YG2 simulating a right-pointing arrow and a right-pointing arrow are displayed.

  Depending on these indications, if left-handed, there is a low expectation that a game ball will enter the probability variation prize opening, but if a game ball enters, there is a possibility that it is a big hit with a large number of rounds It is possible to make the player understand that the price is high. Also, if you make a right-hand shot, there is a high expectation that a game ball will enter the probability variation entrance, but if a game ball enters, there is a high probability that it will be a big hit with a small number of rounds Can be understood by the player. Therefore, after understanding the meaning of each launch direction, it is possible to predict the launch direction that can be entered into the probability variation prize opening and launch the game ball, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, an opening pattern that can be set for each movable member in the first round of jackpot will be described. FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the movable position of each movable member when the right V open pattern is set, and FIG. 97 (b) is the left V open pattern set. It is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member in a case.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the opening pattern of the right V is set, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position when one second has elapsed after the start of one round. The state in which the movable member 650Rb protrudes continues for one second, and when one second has elapsed since the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb is buried in the base plate 60. Thereafter, the movable member 650Rb is kept buried until the big hit is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the movable member 650Lb is maintained in a state where it is buried throughout the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when one round is started, a selection effect (see FIG. 96) is started. More specifically, when a round number command indicating the start of the first round is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the display control is performed from the main control device 113. The device 114 is instructed to start executing the selection effect. When the player who visually recognizes this selection effect makes a left strike, the game ball can enter the right probability change winning opening 655Ra through the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb moved to the protruding position. On the other hand, when the player who visually recognizes the selection effect makes a right strike, since the movable member 650Rb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the right probability change prize opening 655Ra, the game ball is inserted into the right probability change prize prize opening. Cannot enter into 655Ra.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the opening pattern of the left V is set, the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position when one second has elapsed after the start of one round. The state in which the movable member 650Lb protrudes continues for 1 second, and when 1 second elapses after the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb is buried in the base plate 60. Thereafter, the movable member 650Lb is kept buried until the jackpot ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the movable member 650Rb is maintained in a state where it is buried throughout the jackpot. When a player who has visually recognized the selection effect displayed from the start of the first round makes a right strike, the game is played through the slope formed by the movable member 650Lb moved to the projecting position to the left-probability winning prize opening 655La. A ball can enter. On the other hand, when the player who visually recognizes the selection effect makes a left turn, the movable member 650Lb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the left probability variation winning opening 655La. Cannot enter into 655La.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 98A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is an open pattern compared to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11A). The difference is that a table 202aa is added. Another difference is that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. Since other configurations are the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The opening pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines variable operations to be set for the movable member in each opening pattern (the opening pattern for the right V and the opening pattern for the left V). At the start of the first round of jackpot, the opening pattern data corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa and set as a variable operation of the movable member (see S1103 and S1104 in FIG. 101). ).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98B, the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 98B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, “big hit A7” is defined in association with each other (in FIG. 98 (b)). 202b1). This “big jackpot A7” is the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is as large as 16 rounds and the right V open pattern is set in the first round of jackpot. Among 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, five random values (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit A7”. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the ratio at which “jackpot A7” is determined as the jackpot type is 5% (5/100).

  Further, “big hit B7” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 29” (see 202b2 in FIG. 98B). This “big jackpot B7” is the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the second largest after “round jackpot A7”, and the right V open pattern is set in the first big jackpot. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, 25 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit B7”. In this case, the ratio at which “big hit B7” is determined as the big hit type is 25% (25/100).

  Further, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 69”, “big hit C7” is defined in association (see 202b3 in FIG. 98B). This “big jackpot C7” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is seven and less than “big jackpot A7” and “big jackpot B7”, and the left V open pattern is set in the first jackpot. Out of 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, 40 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit C7”. In this case, the ratio that “big hit C7” is determined as the big hit type is 40% (40/100).

  Further, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “70 to 89”, “big hit D7” is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 98 (b)). This “big hit D7” has five rounds and is the big hit type with the second smallest round number among all the big hit types. Further, “big hit D7” is a big hit type in which a left V open pattern is set in the first round. Out of 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, 20 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit D7”. In such a case, the ratio that “big hit D7” is determined as the big hit type is 20% (20/100).

  In addition, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, “big hit E7” is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 98B). This “big hit E7” is the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the smallest, two rounds, and the left V open pattern is set in the first round. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 random number values (counter values) are defined in association with “big hit E7”. In this case, the ratio at which “big hit E7” is determined as the big hit type is 10% (10/100).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when “big hit A7” or “big hit B7” is set, the right V opening pattern is set, while “big hit C7” to “big hit E7” are set. In this case, the left V open pattern is set. Since the ratio at which either “big hit A7” (5% distribution) or “big hit B7” (25% distribution) is determined is 30%, the right V open pattern setting ratio (30%) is The left V open pattern is set lower than the ratio (70%). Therefore, for the player who places the highest priority on the rate at which the probability variation gaming state is set (prioritized), the probability variation state is increased at a high rate of about 70% by making a right turn every time in the first round of jackpot. The game method to be given can be selected. On the other hand, for players who want to make a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds (a lot of rounds and want to have a good gaming state after the big hit), It is possible to select a game method in which it is predicted whether or not the number of rounds with a large number of jackpots is large, and the shooting direction of the game ball is varied according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for the jackpot won in the normal state (so-called first win), the right hit is made with an emphasis on the setting ratio of the probability variation gaming state, while the jackpot (so-called renso) won during the probability variation gaming state. A game method for predicting the jackpot type for hitting and switching the firing direction for the first hit, and a jackpot type for predicting the first hit and switching the firing direction, while for the consecutive hits, the probability ratio gaming state setting ratio (ie It is possible to allow the player to select various game methods, such as a game method in which right-handed is performed with an emphasis on the ratio to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to select a favorite game characteristic for each player and cause the game to be performed, so that it is possible to realize a wide range of game characteristics according to different preferences for each player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 received by everyone can be realized, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (c). FIG. 98C is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 98 (c), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 87 (b)) in that a probability variation setting flag 203ba and a probability variation passage counter are used. The difference is that 203bb, a winning number counter 203bc, a remaining ball timer flag 203bd, a remaining ball timer 203be, and a discharged number counter 203bf are added.

  The probability change setting flag 203ba is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by whether or not the game ball has entered the probable change winning opening during the big hit game. More specifically, when the game ball passes the above-described probability variation switch provided in the discharge port 656, the probability variation setting flag 203ba is set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203ba is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 102). The probability variation setting flag 203ba is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch before the power-off is cut off, and it can be determined that it has passed. Only in this case, the probability variation setting flag 203ba may be officially set to ON and returned. In this case, whether or not the probability variation switch has been passed before the power is turned off can be determined based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203bb described later has a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such that only the probability variation setting flag 203ba is rewritten on and the power is turned on again in a state where the power is cut off, and the damage to the hall can be reduced.

  The probability variation passage counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch after the end of one round in the jackpot game (one round of jackpot in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the probability variation winning opening in the first round have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203bb and a later-described discharged number counter 203bf. The probability variation passing counter 203bb is updated by incrementing the value by one every time a passage through the probability variation switch is detected in a predetermined period (a so-called ball throwing period) after the end of one round (S1409 in FIG. 104). ). In addition, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the probability variation prize opening matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1415 in FIG. 104). The probability variation passage counter 203bb is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203bc is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the probability variation winning holes 655La, 655Ra or the specific winning hole 65a in each round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that it is detected that the game ball has passed through the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-described probability changing switch provided in the probability changing winning device, One is added and updated (S1303 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 and the probability variation winning device (the total value of the winning number counter 203bc and the probability variation passing counter 203bb) and the number discharged (the number of ejections). And the counter 203bf is reset to the initial value “0” (see S1415 in FIG. 104). The value of the winning number counter 203bc is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203bd is a ball throwing period for discharging the remaining game ball when the game ball remains in the variable winning device 65 or the probability variable winning device when the round is completed. It is a flag indicating whether or not. When the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, it means that it is a ball throwing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, a later ball timer 203be, which will be described later, is added and updated by 1 (see S1405 in FIG. 104).

  The remaining ball timer 203be is a variable winning device 65 or a probable winning device (left promising winning device) at the time when one round is completed and the specific winning port 65a or the probable changing winning ports 655La and 655Ra are changed to a difficult to enter state. 655L, a right probability change winning device 655R), when a game ball remains, it is a counter for determining whether or not a time required for the remaining game ball to be discharged has elapsed. The time required until the game ball is discharged is 0.5 seconds. In the seventh embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be. Based on the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203be, whether the winning number and the discharging number in the variable winning device 65 or the probability variable winning device match. Is discriminated (S1411 in FIG. 104). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game balls are clogged in the variable prize device 65 or the probability variable prize device. In addition, it is possible to suppress illegal acts that illegally leave the game ball in the probability variation winning device and allow the game ball to flow down to the probability variation switch in anticipation of the first round of jackpot.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203ba is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. You may make it the structure which is not set to. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probable state is provided improperly.

  The discharged number counter 203bf is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside from the variable winning device 65 or the probability changing winning device in each big hit round. This discharged number counter 203bf passes the game ball through the ball discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or probability variable winning device) (ball discharge provided at the ball discharge port). Each time the exit switch is turned on by passing a game ball), the value is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 104). This discharged number counter 203bf wins the variable prize device 65 or the probability variable prize device. After the match between the number of played balls and the number of discharged balls is determined, the initial value is reset to 0 (S1415 in FIG. 104).

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment is V-winned with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B). The difference is that a flag 223aa is added.

  The V winning flag 223aa is a flag indicating whether or not it has already been detected that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot. If the V winning flag 223aa is on, it means that the passage of the probability variation switch has been detected, and if it is off, it means that the passage of the probability variation switch has not been detected. The V winning flag 223aa is set to ON in the first round of jackpot based on the first receipt of the probability variation prize command output from the main controller 110 each time passage of the probability variation switch is detected ( (See S5503 in FIG. 108). The V winning flag 223aa is set to OFF when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is ON at the end timing of the first round (see S5404 in FIG. 107). At the timing when the V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON, a V-winning success effect is executed to notify the player that the winning has been made to the probability variation winning opening. By executing this V winning success presentation, it is possible to recognize that the player has selected himself (launching direction) and that the game will shift to the probable gaming state after the jackpot is over. Can make people feel more satisfied.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 104. First, with reference to FIG. 100, the jackpot control process 7 (S931) in the seventh embodiment will be described. The jackpot control process 7 (S931) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30) of the main controller 110.

  Of the jackpot control process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 100), in the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011, S1001 to S1004 of the jackpot control process 6 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 89), respectively. , And the same processes as the processes of S1009 to S1011 are executed. In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1004 (S1004: Yes), the release according to the round and the jackpot type is performed. A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation is executed (S1031), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot end is set. Is executed (S1032), and the process is terminated. The details of the jackpot end process (S1032) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect in the process of S1011 (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the probable winning prize A winning process for performing a process corresponding to the winning in the mouth is executed (S1033). The details of the winning process (S1033) will be described later with reference to FIG. After completion of the winning process (S1033), an abnormal process is performed to determine whether or not the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a and the probability changing winning opening are normally discharged (S1034). Exit. Details of the winning process (S1033) and the abnormality process (S1034) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, respectively.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1031) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1031). This jackpot operation setting process (S1031) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the round and jackpot type as described above.

  In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101), and when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first jackpot (S1101: No) ), The opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the start timing is the first round (S1101: Yes), the release pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the release pattern table 202aa (S1103). In this processing of S1103, if the current big hit type is big hit A7 or big hit B7, while reading data for performing variable operation with the open pattern of the right V (see FIG. 97 (a)), the current big hit type Is one of the big hits C7 to E7, the data for performing the variable operation is read with the left V open pattern (see FIG. 97 (b)).

  When the process of S1103 is completed, the start of the release pattern read in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. In the process of S1105 executed after the process of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be variably controlled in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1032) will be described with reference to FIG. This jackpot end process (S1032) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. In the jackpot ending process (S1032), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203ba is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203ba is off (S1202: No), This means that none of the game balls entered (winning) into the probability change winning opening (left probability changing winning opening 655La and right probability changing winning opening 655Ra) during the big hit, so By setting 100, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the short-time gaming state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the short-time state of the normal symbol) (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203ba is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the probability variation winning award during this jackpot. By setting the flag 203e to ON, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability changing gaming state (the probability changing state of the special symbol and the short state of the normal symbol) (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  In the process of S1204 executed after the process of S1202 or S1203, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the process of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204). The probability variation setting flag 203ba is set to OFF (S1205), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 102), an appropriate gaming state can be set according to the state of the probability variation setting flag 203ba.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S1033) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this winning process (S1033) is a process for performing processing according to winning in the specific winning port 65a and the probability changing winning port. In this winning process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S1301). Here, the round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a or the probability changing winning opening becomes ready to enter a ball until the interval period ends. If it is not the round effective period in the processing of S1301 (S1301: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the current period is the round effective period (S1301: Yes), then a winning at any one of the specific winning ports (the specific winning port 65a or the probable winning port) is detected. Is determined (S1302), and if it is determined that no winning at the specific winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a or the probable winning opening) is detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning for the specific winning opening is detected (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203bc for updating (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304.

  In the processing of S1304, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1304). If it is determined that the game has passed the probability change switch (S1304: Yes), the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON ( In step S1305, a probability change prize command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch is set (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1304 that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1307.

  In the processing of S1307, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203bc is 10 or more (S1307), and when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is 10 or more (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309 to set the end of the current round. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1307 that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is less than 10 (S1307: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the round time has passed (S1308), and the round time If it has elapsed (S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309 and the end of the current round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1308: No), it is not necessary to end the round, and thus the present process ends. In the processing of S1308, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has passed if the set release pattern end timing is reached, while in the second round and later, When 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

  In the process of S1309, closing of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or probability variation winning opening) is set (S1309), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1310). Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON to set the ball throwing period (S1311), and this process is terminated.

  Next, details of the abnormality process (S1034) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this abnormal process (S1034) is a process for determining whether or not the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a and the probability changing winning opening have been normally discharged. In this abnormal process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round effective period (S1401). If it is not the round effective period (S1401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball is discharged from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device) Whether it has been discharged or not is determined (S1402).

  In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203bf (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is off (S1404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is currently being thrown away, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is set to 1. Is updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (that is, whether or not the end timing of the ball throwing period (when 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the end of the round)) (S1406). When it is determined that the value of 203be is not the upper limit (not the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the current is the ball throwing period after the end of the first round. (S1407) When it is determined that the ball is thrown after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1408). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed (S1408: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the game ball has passed the probability variation switch (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203bb (S1409), and the probability variation setting flag 203ba is set to ON. (S1410), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the current ball throwing period is the ball throwing period after the second and subsequent rounds are finished (S1407: No), each of S1408 to S1410 The process is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit (the end timing of the ball throwing period) (S1406: Yes), then the number of discharged (the number of discharged counter 203bf) It is determined whether or not (value) matches the winning number (the total value of the winning number counter 203bc and the probability variation passing counter 203bb) (S1411).

  If it is determined in the process of S1411 that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of passing the game ball through the probability variation switch while the probability variation prize opening is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the number of discharged coins matches the number of winning prizes (S1411: Yes), the process of S1412 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to OFF (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is reset (S1414). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203bc, the discharging number counter 203bf, and the probability variation passing counter 203bb are reset (S1415), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 104), each of the specific winning awards (specific winning awards 65a, and so on) is caused by a ball clogging inside each variable award winning device (variable winning device 65 and probability variable winning device). It is possible to detect and notify at an early stage the occurrence of a problem that the game ball that has entered the respective probability variation winning award) is not normally discharged.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. First, with reference to FIG. 105, the command determination process 7 (S4021) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This command determination process 7 (S4021) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for analyzing an unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 41).

  Of the command determination processing 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, the processing of S4901 to S4910 and S4918 is the command determination processing in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 41). The same processes as those in S4901 to S4910 and S4918 are executed. In the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that no winning information command is included in the unprocessed command (S4909: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to winning is received (S4921). Here, the commands related to winning are specifically an opening command, a round number command, a closing command, a probability change prize command, an ending command, and the like.

  In the processing of S4921, if it is determined that any command related to winning is received from the main controller 110 (S4921: Yes), the type of the unprocessed command related to winning is analyzed, and the command The hit related command process for executing the control according to the type of the process is executed (S4922), and this process is terminated. Details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4921, when it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 does not include a hit-related command (S4921: No), the process proceeds to S4918.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) described above will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the hit related command processing (S4922). Of the hit-related command processing (S4922), the processing of S4911 to S4917 is the same as that of S4911 to S4917 executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Since each processing is just transplanted as it is, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In the hit-related command process (see FIG. 106) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4913 that the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 does not include a round number command (S4913). Next, it is determined whether or not a close command is included in the unprocessed commands (S4951). In the process of S4951, when it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 includes a close command (S4951: Yes), this means that it is the end timing of one round of jackpot Therefore, the closing command process for setting the production mode at the end of the round is executed (S4952), and this process ends. Details of the closing command process (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the close command has not been received (S4951: No), then whether or not the probability change prize command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110. (S4953), and if it is determined that the probability variation prize command is included (S4953: Yes), it means that it is the timing when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch. The probability variation prize command processing for performing control according to the number of times of passing is executed (S4954), and this processing is terminated. Details of the probability variation winning command processing (S4954) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the process of S4953, when it is determined that an unprocessed command does not include a probability change prize command (S4953: No), the process proceeds to S4916.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the details of the above-described closing command process (S4952) will be described. This closing command process (S4952) is a process for setting the effect mode at the end of the round as described above. In this closing command process (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not it is the first round of jackpot (S5401), and if it is determined that it is not the first round of jackpot (S5401: No) Then, the execution of the interval effect according to the number of rounds is set (S5402), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5401 that the currently completed round is the first round (S5401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5403).

  In the process of S5403, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5403: No), the probability variation prize opening (either the left probability variation prize opening 655La or the right probability variation prize opening 655Ra) is made during one round. Means that the V winning flag 223aa is set to OFF (S5404), and the process proceeds to S5402. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the V-winned flag 223aa is off (S5403: No), one round of jackpot will not be allowed to enter the game ball into the probability variation prize opening during one round. Therefore, a V winning failure effect is set for notifying the player that the game ball could not be won in the probability change winning opening (S5405), and the process is terminated. . By executing this V prize-winning effect, the game ball did not enter the probability variation prize opening (the launch direction selected by the player and the launch that makes it easy for the game ball to actually enter the probability variation prize opening. The player can easily understand that the direction did not match. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think more seriously to predict the launch direction so that the game ball wins (wins) in the next big hit. Therefore, since the player's motivation for the next jackpot can be improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, details of the above-described probability variation prize command processing (S4954) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the probability variation prize command processing (S4954). This probability variation winning command processing (S4954) is processing for performing control according to the number of times the probability variation switch has passed, as described above.

  In this probability variation winning command processing (S4954), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is ON (S5501), and if it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is OFF (S5501: No). This means that the probability variation winning command this time is a command that is output based on the passage of the first probability variation switch in the first round of jackpot, so that the game ball has entered the probability variation winning opening. For this reason, execution of the V winning success effect is set (S5502), the V winning flag 223aa is set to ON (S5503), and the process ends. By executing this V winning success presentation, the game ball has entered the probability variation prize opening (the launch direction selected by the player and the launch direction that makes it easy for the game ball to actually win the probability variation prize opening. Can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, since the player can have a greater satisfaction, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5501: Yes), it means that the V winning success effect has already been executed, so the V winning success effect is duplicated. In order to prevent the process from being executed, the processes of S5502 and S5503 are skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a game ball enters during execution of the jackpot game, so that the probability change game state (the special symbol probability change state and the normal symbol time-short state after the jackpot ends) ) Is provided as two triggers (left probability variation prize opening 655La, right probability variation prize opening 655Ra). In the first round of the jackpot, either one of the two probability variation winning openings is set in a state where the player can enter the ball. That is, one movable member moves to the projecting position, thereby forming an inclination that is directed downward toward one of the probability variation winning awards. Since the period in which the movable member is arranged at the protruding position in the first round of the big hit is as short as 1 second, if the time for the game ball to roll on the upper surface of the movable member is not shortened as much as possible, the inclination formed by the movable member Accordingly, the movable member is buried before the game ball enters the probability variation prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter the probability variation prize opening. In the seventh embodiment, if left-handed when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the time for rolling the upper surface of the movable member 650Lb becomes longer than when the right-handed is performed. When a strike is made, it becomes difficult to enter a game ball into the left probability variation winning opening 655La, while when a right strike is made, it becomes easy to enter a game ball into the left probability variation winning opening 655La. On the other hand, if the right-handed operation is performed when the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, the time for rolling the upper surface of the movable member 650Rb is longer than that when the left-handed operation is performed. While it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra, when the player hits the right, it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the left probability variation winning opening 655Ra. Here, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to detect in advance the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position from the production mode etc. It is possible to realize a novel gameability in which the player can predict the firing direction (type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position) that can be made. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, one of the probability variation winning openings can be entered in the first round of jackpot (that is, any of the movable members can be changed to the protruding position). However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, a round in which any of the probability variation winning entrances is set in a state where it can be entered may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the round in which the probability variation winning opening is set to be able to enter the ball is not limited to once, and may be set twice or more in one big hit. In this case, if the game ball can be entered into the probability variation prize opening in the first round in which the probability variation prize opening is set to be ready for entry, the probability variation prize entry can be entered after the next round. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports (navigates) with respect to the player the launch direction which a game ball can enter in the round set to a state.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the first round of jackpot, the period required for the game ball to reach the probability change prize opening is configured to vary depending on the launch direction of the game ball. In other words, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area by hitting the right side has a shorter probability of winning the left than the game ball that has reached the specific area by hitting the left side. The configuration is such that it easily reaches the mouth 655La. In addition, when the movable member 650Rb is disposed at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area by left-handed hits the right probability change prize in a shorter period of time than the game ball that has reached the specific area by left-hand hit. Although it was set as the structure which becomes easy to reach | attain 655Ra, it is not restricted to this. In the round in which the probability variation prize opening is ready to enter, the launch direction in which the period required to reach the probability variation prize opening is shortened may be fixed. In other words, in all jackpot types, it may be configured such that the right-handed person takes less time to reach the probability variation winning entrance than the left-handed person. It may be configured such that the time required for the hitting to reach the probability variation prize opening is shortened.

  In the seventh embodiment, depending on the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position, the period until reaching the corresponding one probability variation winning opening is different between right-handed and left-handed, It is not limited to this. For example, the left probability variation winning opening 655La is arranged at a position where a game ball may enter only when left-handed, and the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra is entered only when right-handed. It is good also as a structure which makes it the structure arrange | positioned in the position where there is a possibility of performing, and changes the period until it arrives at each probability variation prize opening according to jackpot type. More specifically, for example, in the case of one jackpot type, a game ball launched by left-handed hitting a left-handed promising change prize is longer than a period until a game ball fired by right-handed hitting the right-handed winning prize opening 655Ra While it is configured so that the period until reaching the mouth 655La is shorter, in other jackpot types, the game ball launched by left-handed hitting is more than the period until it reaches the left probability variation winning opening 655La Further, it may be configured such that the period until the game ball fired by the right strike reaches the right probability change winning opening 655Ra is shorter. Also, in this case, the winning opening that allows right-handed entry and the winning opening that allows left-handed entry do not necessarily have to be probable variation winning openings, and one or both of them receive a game ball. By doing so, a configuration may be adopted in which it is replaced with a specific winning opening in which only the winning ball is paid out. Also, if you make a right-hand hit according to the type of jackpot, the time to reach the winning opening is not different from the time to reach the winning opening if you make a left-hand hit. The period until this may be fixed regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, depending on the arrangement of nails, windmills, etc., it is configured so that the right-handed or left-handed one who aimed at the winning hole on the other side has a shorter time to reach the winning hole than the aiming at the winning hole on the other You may do it.

<Modification of the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the above-described seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above, two probability variation winning devices (a left probability variation winning device 655L and a right probability variation winning device 655R) and one variable are awarded as winning devices that can be entered during the execution of the jackpot game. The winning device 65 is provided, and the type of the winning device that can be entered according to the big hit round is variable. In other words, in the first round of jackpots, one of the probability winning prize openings (left chance changing prize opening 655La, right chance changing prize opening 655Ra) is set to a state in which it is possible to enter a ball, while in the second and subsequent rounds of jackpot, a specific prize is awarded. It was set as the structure which sets the opening | mouth 65a in the state which can enter.

  On the other hand, in this modification, only two probability variation winning devices (left probability variation winning device 655L, right probability variation winning device 655R) are provided, and a plurality of flow paths (probability variation switches are provided in the probability variation winning device). And a flow path that is not provided with a probability change switch), and depending on the number of rounds of jackpots, to one of the probability change prize winning holes (left probability change prize winning hole 655La, right probability change prize winning opening 655Ra) The flow path through which the game balls that have entered are distributed is varied. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the probability variation prize opening in the first round of the jackpot is a channel in which a probability variation switch is provided among a plurality of channels provided in the probability variation prize winning device. On the other hand, the game balls that have entered the probability variation winning award after the second round of jackpot are controlled so as to be distributed to a flow path not provided with a probability variation switch. By configuring in this way, a round (first round) in which a probabilistic gaming state is given after the jackpot is completed by entering the probable winning prize entrance by only two promising prize winning devices, and a game ball is launched into a specific area By continuing to do so, it is possible to provide a round (after two rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment in terms of the configuration in that the variable winning device 65 is deleted, the left probability changing winning device 655L, In addition, the internal structure of the right probability winning device 655R is changed, and the operation contents of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the seventh embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133, the board surface structure of the game board 13 in the modification of 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board 13 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 133, the game board 13 in the present modification is different from the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment in that the variable winning device 65 is deleted. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 134, but the internal structure of each probability variation winning device (left probability variation winning device 655L and right probability variation winning device 655R) is also partially changed from the seventh embodiment described above. Yes. Since the other panel configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each probability variation winning device in this modification will be described. FIG. 134 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a specific area in the game board 13 of the present modification. As shown in FIG. 134, in this modified example, in the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R and on the back side of the base plate 60, the left probability variation winning port 655La and the right probability variation winning port 655Ra are provided. A plurality of flow paths through which the incoming game balls flow down are provided. More specifically, the downstream side of the left probability variation winning device 655L is branched into two channels (probability variation guidance channel 655Ld1, normal guidance channel 655Ld2), and the probability variation guidance channel 655Ld1 is downstream of the probability variation guidance channel 655Ld1. A probability variation entrance 656a provided with a switch is provided. When a game ball is guided to the probability variation entrance 656a by flowing down the probability variation guide channel 655Ld1 during execution of the jackpot game, the game ball always passes the probability variation switch. The gaming state after the end is set to the probability changing gaming state. Note that the game ball that has entered the probability variation entrance 656a and passed through the probability variation switch is directly discharged to the outside.

  On the other hand, a ball discharge port 656b1 for discharging game balls to the outside is provided downstream of the normal guide channel 655Ld2. Since the ball discharge port 656b1 is not provided with a probability change switch, even if the game ball passes through the ball discharge port 656b1, it does not affect the game state after the big hit. In other words, regardless of the number of passes of the ball discharge port 656b1 during the execution of the jackpot game, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch even once, the game state after the execution of the jackpot game has ended If the state is set and the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch, the short-time game state is set as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 134, the game ball is placed at one of the flow paths (probability induction flow path 655Ld1, normal induction flow path 655Ld2) at a position where it branches into the probability change induction flow path 655Ld1 and the normal induction flow path 655Ld2. A flow path distribution valve 655Lc for distribution to any one of them is provided. The flow path distribution valve 655Lc is tilted in the left direction when viewed from the front in the first round of the jackpot (a state in which an inclination is formed so as to descend from the upper left side to the lower right side when viewed from the front) (see FIG. 134). That is, the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is closed by the flow distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1 is opened. In this state, the game balls that have entered the left probability variation winning opening 655La are distributed to the probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1 that is open on the upstream side, and are guided to the probability variation entrance ball opening 656a. For this reason, if the game ball can be entered into the left probability variation prize opening 655La in the first round of the jackpot, a prize ball for entering the left probability variation prize entry hole 655La is given, and the probability variation switch Since the game ball can be passed, the probability variation game state is given as the game state after the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the first round of jackpot ends and the ball throwing period elapses, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc tilts in the right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the upstream side of the probability variation guiding channel 655Ld1 is closed by the channel distributing valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the normal guiding channel 655Ld2 is opened. In this state, the game balls that have entered the left probability variation winning opening 655La are distributed to the normal guide channel 655Ld2 that is open on the upstream side, and guided to the ball discharge port 656b1 on the downstream side of the normal guide channel 655Ld2. Is done. For this reason, in the second and subsequent rounds of jackpots, even if a game ball is entered into the left probability variation winning opening 655La, the entered game ball cannot pass through the probability variation switch. Only prize balls for balls are awarded.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the internal structure of the right probability variation winning device 655R is simply left-right symmetrical with the internal structure of the left probability variation winning device 655L. The flow path distribution valve 655Rc provided in the probability variation prize winning device 655R is tilted to the right when viewed from the front, whereby the upstream side of the probability variation induction flow path 655Rd1 is opened (the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Rd2 is closed). As a result, the game balls that have entered the right probability variation winning prize opening 655Ra in the first round of the jackpot are distributed to the probability variation induction flow path 655Rd1 and enter the probability variation entrance ball opening 656a. On the other hand, in the second and subsequent rounds of jackpot, the upstream side of the normal guiding channel 655Rd2 is opened (the upstream side of the probability variation guiding channel 655Rd1 is closed) by the channel distribution valve 655Rc tilting to the left in front view. As a result, the game balls that have entered the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra after the second round of the jackpot are distributed to the normal guiding channel 655Rd2 and enter the ball discharge opening 656b2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, an operation pattern (flow path switching pattern) of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc in the probability variation winning device will be described. FIG. 135 compares the change over time of the variable operation of the movable member 650Rb with the change over time of the flow path in the probability variation prize apparatus when the left V open pattern is set for the movable members 650Lb and 655Rb. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 135, in the first round of jackpot, each flow distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc is connected to each normal induction flow channel (normal induction flow channel) until 1 second has elapsed when the movable member 650Rb protrudes to the protruding position. 655Ld2 and normal guidance flow path 655Rd2) are held in an arrangement that distributes the game balls. Then, when one second has elapsed since the first round of the jackpot is started and the movable member 650Rb is moved to the projecting position, each flow distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc is changed to each probability variation guide flow channel (probability variation flow channel 655Ld1, probability variation). The game balls are moved to an arrangement (see FIG. 134) that distributes the game balls to the guide channel 655Rd1). The arrangement of distributing the game balls to the probability variation guide channel continues even after the first round is finished and the movable member 650Rb is moved from the protruding position to the immersive position, and is 0.5 seconds from the end of the first round. As time passes, the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc are returned to the arrangement in which the game balls are distributed to the normal induction flow paths (normal induction flow path 655Ld2, normal induction flow path 655Rd2). The 0.5 second after the end of one round is a so-called ball throwing period. That is, a sufficient period of time is set for a game ball that has entered the probability variation entrance opening just before the end of one round to reach the probability variation entrance 656a. By setting a ball throwing period of 0.5 seconds, there will be a situation in which the probability variation state will not be given after the jackpot ends despite entering the probability variation prize opening just before the end of one round. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the pachinko machine 10 and the hall.

  After the end of the first round, the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc is not switched until the jackpot ends. Therefore, the game balls that have entered the probability variation winning entrance (either the left probability variation winning entrance 655La or the right probability variation winning entrance 655Ra) after the second round of the jackpot are guided to either of the ball discharge openings 656b1 and 656b2. The On the other hand, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position after the second round. That is, the movable member moved to the protruding position in the first round is also moved to the protruding position in the second and subsequent rounds. That is, it becomes easy to enter the probability variation winning opening (the time from launching the game ball to entering the probability variation winning opening is shortened). This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the launch direction that makes it easier to enter the probable winning opening in each jackpot by simply checking the type of the movable member moved to the protruding position in the first round. Therefore, for a player who wants to quickly digest the jackpot game, the game ball can be fired in the launch direction in which the period until entering the probability variation prize opening tends to be short. On the other hand, for players who want to digest the jackpot game over a longer period of time (want to enjoy it slowly), the game ball is launched in a launch direction that tends to increase the period until entering the probable entrance prize opening. Can be made. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player himself to select a game method according to the preference of each player.

  It should be noted that in the jackpot where the left V open pattern is set, the operation is exactly the same except that the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position in each jackpot round. That is, the flow path switching pattern (the operation pattern of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc) inside the probability variation winning device is exactly the same as the jackpot in which the right V opening pattern is set.

  Thus, in this modification, only two probability variation winning devices are provided on the board surface, and whether the probability variation winning device can be passed or difficult to pass every jackpot round inside the probability variation winning device. Switching is made (the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc is varied). With this configuration, the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment can be deleted, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment and its modifications, the selection effect is always executed until one of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is moved to the protruding position after one round of big hit is started. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs the alerting | reporting effect which alert | reports the launch direction which becomes possible to enter a probability variation winning opening instead of a selection effect at a predetermined | prescribed ratio (for example, ratio of 1% when it becomes a jackpot). . By comprising in this way, a player can be pleased when a notification effect is performed.

  In the seventh embodiment and its modifications, the two probability variation winning openings are arranged so as to face each other in the left-right direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of them is replaced with a entrance (second entrance) having the same function as the first entrance 64 (that is, a special design lottery is executed by entering a game ball), You may delete the electrically-driven accessory 64a provided accompanying the 1st entrance 64. FIG. And when it is a win in the normal symbol lottery, the movable member on the side capable of entering the second entrance may be moved to the protruding position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to efficiently enter a game ball that has reached a specific area into the second entrance in the short time state of the normal symbol, so that the game efficiency during the short time state is further improved. be able to. In this case, it is easy to enter the second entrance during the probability variation gaming state in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set and the short time gaming state (the second entrance after the game ball is launched). It is good also as a structure which alert | reports to a player the direction which the period until it enters a ball | bowl tends to become short. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the game ball enter the second entrance more reliably during the period in which the movable member is located at the protruding position as a normal symbol.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning ports (a left specific winning port 650La and a right specific winning port 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning port is projected. The game ball that reaches the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is guided to the specific prize opening by forming an inclination toward the specific prize opening.

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, one movable member 657b having a shape in which the two movable members in the sixth embodiment are combined is provided, and according to the movable position (projection amount) of the movable member 657b, The game balls that have reached the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) are allowed to enter (that is, guided by the movable member 657b), and the type of the prize opening is made different. In the eighth embodiment, instead of the two specific winning ports in the sixth embodiment, one specific winning port 657a and one general winning port 630 are provided. The movable member 657b is completely disposed at the projecting position, thereby forming an inclination capable of guiding the game ball to the specific winning opening 657a, while the movable member 657b is moved from the buried position (immersion position) to the projected position. The game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630 at an intermediate position in the middle of movement.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that a general winning port 630 is provided instead of the left specific winning port 650La, and the right specific winning port is provided. The specific winning port 657a is provided instead of the port 650Ra, the movable member 657b is provided instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the sixth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (a) is a front perspective view of the movable member 657b, FIG. 109 (b) is a front view of the movable member 657b, and FIG. 109 (c) is a view of the movable member 657b from the left side when viewed from the front. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 109A to 109C, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment forms a front-side inclined member 657bf that forms an inclination in a downward direction from the upper right direction toward the lower left direction on the front side of the front view. And a rear inclined member 657bb that forms an inclination in a downward direction from the upper left direction toward the lower right direction. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c), the front inclined member 657bf and the rear inclined member 657bb are joined to each other at a substantially central portion of each side surface to constitute one member.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 109A and 109C, two portions of the rear side surface of the rear inclined member 657bb protrude in a bar shape. Although not shown in the figure, a movable member solenoid for moving the movable member 657b in and out (variable operation) is connected to the tip of the protruding portion (the end opposite to the rear inclined member 657bb). ing. In each big hit round, the movable member solenoid is driven to move the movable member 657b to the protruding position. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 111, in the eighth embodiment, the moving operation of the movable member 657b in each round is changed according to the jackpot type, and the general winning opening 630 is executed during the jackpot game. A jackpot type in which an appearance operation that tends to increase the number of winnings is set and a jackpot type in which an appearance operation that tends to decrease is set are provided. During the performance of the jackpot game, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot increases as the game ball enters the general prize opening 630, so the chance to win the general prize opening 630 tends to increase. A game can be played in the hope that the type will be determined. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the operation | movement content of the movable member 657b in this 8th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 110 (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where the movable member 657b is disposed at an intermediate position temporarily disposed between the time when the movable member 657b performs the projecting operation and the time when the movable member 657b is disposed at the projecting position. As shown in FIG. 110, when the movable member 657b performs a protruding operation and only the front inclined member 657bf protrudes to the near side of the base plate 60 (only the rear inclined member 657bb is buried), the front inclined member is inclined. The state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the general winning opening 630 is temporarily formed by the inclination of the member 657bf formed from the upper right side to the lower left side. In each big hit round, when a specified number (10) or more of game balls are entered into the specific winning opening 657a or a specified time (30 seconds) elapses before the specified number of balls has entered Therefore, no matter how many game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the end condition of the round is not affected. That is, the more winning balls are inserted into the general winning opening 630, the larger the winning balls are. Therefore, the more balls are inserted into the general winning opening 630, the more the player can be pleased. Therefore, the player can positively launch the game ball toward the specific area while the intermediate position (see FIG. 110 (a)) that can be arranged while performing the protruding operation. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 110B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the movable member 657b is disposed at the protruding position. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the movable member 657b is disposed at the protruding position, in addition to the front inclined member 657bf, the rear inclined member 657bb also protrudes closer to the front side than the base plate 60. . As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area falls to the rear inclined member 657bb, and the specific winning opening is formed by the inclination formed by the rear inclined member 657bb downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. Guided to 657a. That is, the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position (see FIG. 110B), thereby forming a state where it is easy to enter the specific winning opening 657a.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the winning opening through which the game ball reaching the specific area is guided is made different according to the arrangement (projection amount) of the movable member 657b. In an intermediate position where the movable member 657b can be arranged until it reaches the protruding position, a state where the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guiding state) is formed, and the movable member 657b is in the protruding position. As a result, the game ball is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a (second guidance state). As a result, as the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 during the first guiding state, the number of winning balls that can be acquired during the jackpot gaming state increases, so that the player is in the first guiding state. In the meantime, it is possible to positively launch a game ball toward a specific area. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the movable member 657b is arranged within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position even if the arrangement of the movable member 657b does not completely coincide with the intermediate position shown in FIG. 110 (a). If so, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf. More specifically, for example, the front inclined member 657bf of the movable member 657b is disposed so that approximately 70% of the whole protrudes from the base plate 60, and the rear inclined member 657bb protrudes from the base plate 60 of approximately 30% of the entire. Until this arrangement is reached, the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the movable pattern of the protruding member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns (movable patterns A and B) are provided as the movable patterns set for the movable member 657b in each jackpot round. The movable pattern A is a movable pattern in which the chance of entering a game ball into the general winning opening 630 is greater than that of the movable pattern B (that is, the number of times of entering the first guiding state is increased). First, with reference to FIG. 111A, a description will be given of a change with time of the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable pattern A is set.

  As shown in FIG. 111, when the movable pattern A is set, the movable member 657b starts moving to the protruding position simultaneously with the start of the big hit round. As shown in FIG. 111, it takes 2 seconds for the movable member 657b embedded in the base plate 60 to protrude to the protruding position. Of the two seconds that move to the protruding position, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 for about 0.7 seconds (first guiding state, see FIG. 110A). Therefore, by continuing to fire the game ball toward the specific area immediately after the start of the round, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the general winning opening 630 during the first guiding state. In each jackpot round, an upper limit value (10) is set for the number of balls entered for the specific winning port 657a, but no limit is imposed on the number of balls entered for the general winning port 630. As the player enters the general winning opening 630, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases. Therefore, it is possible to positively fire the game ball to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the state where the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening 657a continues for 2.5 seconds. During this 2.5 seconds, every time the game ball reaches the specific area, it is guided to the specific winning opening 657a, so that it is possible to obtain a winning ball every time it enters the specific winning opening 657a. In addition, since the game balls can be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, 4 to 5 balls can be fired for 2.5 seconds by continuing to show the game balls from the start of the round. A certain amount of game balls can be made to enter the specific winning opening 657a.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), when 2.5 seconds have elapsed after the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position (that is, when 4.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round), the movable member 657b is buried. Start moving to (immersion position). The variable operation to the burying position is performed over 2 seconds similarly to the variable operation to the protruding position. That is, since the operation completely opposite to the variable operation to the projecting position is executed, the first guiding state is maintained for about 0.7 seconds during the variable operation to the buried position. Therefore, it is possible to cause one to two game balls to enter the general winning opening 630 by continuously firing the game balls to the specific area even during the variable operation to the buried position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the movable position is moved from the buried position to the protruding position over 2 seconds, and the state of being placed at the protruding position is maintained for 2.5 seconds. The operation of moving to the buried position is repeated twice at intervals of 0.5 seconds. For this reason, when the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A, the first guiding state is set up to six times at the maximum. Note that the movable pattern A is forcibly terminated even when not all the variable operations shown in FIG. 111 (a) have been completed when ten game balls have entered the specific winning opening 657a. Note that the period during which the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position is 7.5 seconds (2.5 seconds × 3 times) in total, so that by continuously firing the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds, About 13 game balls can be reached. Therefore, it is possible to surely enter a specified number (10) of game balls into the specific winning opening 657a and to set up the first guiding state up to six times simply by continuing to fire the game balls. Can do. Therefore, in addition to the prize balls for the predetermined number of entries to the specific prize opening 657a, it is possible to obtain prize balls based on winnings to the general prize opening 630 by setting the first guidance state up to six times. . Accordingly, since the number of prize balls exceeding the prescribed number of prize balls can be easily obtained in each round, the satisfaction of the player can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

  FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram showing a change with time of the movable position of the movable member 657 b when the movable member 657 b is moved in the movable pattern B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the movable pattern B is set, the movable member 657b moves to the protruding position over 2 seconds immediately after the start of the round, and the state where the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position is 26 at the maximum. It continues for 2 seconds (until 28 seconds have passed from the start of the round), and when 26 seconds have passed, it is moved to the immersive position (immersion position) over 2 seconds. For this reason, when the movable pattern B is set, the first guiding state in which it is possible to enter the general winning opening 630 is only two times immediately after the start of the round and at the end of the round.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the number of times that the movable member 657b is in the first guidance state (a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630) according to the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b. Are configured differently. If the number of times of entering the first guiding state is large, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the execution of the jackpot game is also increased. You can have greater joy. Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the set movable pattern, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be further improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 shows the first type in the eighth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content of the hit classification selection table 202b. The configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment except that the specified content of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. Descriptions other than the hit type selection table 202b are omitted. As shown in FIG. 112, five types of jackpot types A8 to E8 are defined in the first jackpot type selection table 202b of the eighth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 112, “big hit A8” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” (see 202b1 in FIG. 112). “Big jackpot A8” is a jackpot type with 16 rounds, to which a probability variation gaming state (a special symbol probability variation state and a normal symbol time-short state) is given after the jackpot. Further, when “big hit A8” is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (movable pattern in which the number of times of being in the first guiding state is likely to increase) in each round of big hit. For this reason, “Big jackpot A8” has the largest number of rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot finishes is advantageous (that is, a probability variation gaming state that is more advantageous than the short-time gaming state is set). And more opportunities to enter the ball (the number of prize balls to be paid out in each jackpot round increases). Therefore, “big hit A8” is the big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random value (counter value) associated with “big hit A8” is “0 to 4”. Since there are five, the percentage that “Big Jack A8” is determined when the jackpot is won is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, “big hit B8” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 29” (see 202b2 in FIG. 112). “Big jackpot B8” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probability change gaming state is given after the jackpot is over. Further, when “big hit B8” is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (movable pattern in which the number of times of being in the first guiding state is likely to increase) in each round of big hit. For this reason, “Big Jack B8” has the second largest number of rounds after “Big Jack A8”, and the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous (that is, the probability variation gaming state is more advantageous than the short-time gaming state). Opportunities to enter the general winning opening 630 are increased (the number of winning balls to be paid out in each big hit round is increased). Therefore, “big hit B8” is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player after “big hit A8”. Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the random value (counter value) associated with “big hit B8” is “5 to 29”. Since the number is 25, when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the “jackpot B8” is determined is 25% (25/100).

  Further, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 54”, “big hit C8” is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 112). “Big jackpot C8” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the probability variation gaming state is given after the jackpot is over. Further, when “big hit C8” is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (movable pattern with a small number of times of being in the first guiding state) in each round of big hit. For this reason, “Big jackpot C8” has the second largest number of rounds after “Big jackpot A8”, and the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous, but there are fewer opportunities to enter the general winning opening 630 during the jackpot (Big jackpot The number of prize balls to be paid out in each round of is relatively small). Therefore, “big hit C8” is a big hit type that is disadvantageous to the player on the award sphere compared to “big hit A8” and “big hit B8”. Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random value (counter value) associated with “big hit C8” is “30 to 54”. Since the number is 25, when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the “jackpot C8” is determined is 25% (25/100).

  In addition, “big hit D8” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “55 to 69” (see 202b4 in FIG. 112). “Big jackpot D8” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is seven and the probability variation gaming state is given after the jackpot is over. Further, when “big hit D8” is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (movable pattern with a small number of times of being in the first guiding state) in each round of big hit. For this reason, “big hit D8” is advantageous in the gaming state after the big hit, but the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chance to enter the general winning opening 630 during the big hit is reduced (each round of big hits) The number of prize balls that will be paid out will be relatively small). Therefore, although “big hit D8” is advantageous in terms of the gaming state after the big hit, it is a big hit type that is most disadvantageous to the player on the award sphere. Among 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random value (counter value) associated with “big hit D8” is “55 to 69”. Since the number is 15, when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the “jackpot D8” is determined is 15% (15/100).

  Further, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “70 to 99”, “big hit E8” is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 112). “Big jackpot E8” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is seven and the short-time gaming state is given 100 times after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when “big hit E8” is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (movable pattern with a small number of times of being in the first guiding state) in each round of big hit. For this reason, the game status after the jackpot ends is unfavorable, and the “big jackpot E8” has the least number of rounds, and the chance to enter the general winning opening 630 during the jackpot is reduced (paid in each jackpot round) The number of prize balls will be relatively small). Therefore, the “big hit E8” is a big hit type that is most disadvantageous to the player in both the game state after the big hit and the award sphere. Among 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random value (counter value) associated with “big hit E8” is “70 to 99”. Since the number is 30, when the jackpot is won, the ratio at which the “jackpot E8” is determined is 30% (30/100).

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b in each round of jackpot game is configured differently according to the jackpot type. Thereby, a game can be performed in anticipation that the movable pattern A that gives a lot of opportunities to enter the general winning opening 630 is a big hit type (one of big hits A and B) that is set. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the jackpot control process 8 (S941) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 8 (S941) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, and is similar to the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, it is a process for performing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of a specific winning opening.

  Of the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 are respectively the jackpot control process in the sixth embodiment. 6 (see FIG. 89), the same processing as S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 is executed.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1004 (S1004: Yes), the movable pattern corresponding to the jackpot type (movable) The start of either pattern A or B) is set (S1041), and the process proceeds to S1006. More specifically, if the current big hit is either a big hit A8 or B8, the movable pattern A is set as the movable pattern of the movable member 657b, while if the big hit is any of the big hits C8 to E8, the movable member 657b. The movable pattern B is set as the movable pattern.

  In the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1011: Yes), the jackpot type of this time is the jackpot E8. If it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot E8 (S1042: Yes), the process proceeds to S1013 in order to set the gaming state after the jackpot to the short-time gaming state and end the jackpot And migrate. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1042 that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot E8 (any of jackpots A8 to D8) (S1042: No), the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probabilistic gaming state. In order to end the jackpot, the process proceeds to S1014.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the front inclined member 657bf that forms an inclination in the downward direction from the upper right direction in the front view and the downward direction from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. The movable member 657b has a shape in which the rear inclined member 657bb that forms the inclination is combined in the front-rear direction, and the specific region (first input) is set according to the movable position (projection amount) of the movable member 657b. The game balls that have reached the area below the ball opening 64 are allowed to enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b), and the types of winning holes are different. More specifically, in the arrangement in which only the front inclined member 657bf protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 60 and the rear inclined member 657bb is housed inside the base plate 60, the front upper right side formed by the front inclined member 657bf is formed. Due to the downward inclination from the direction to the lower left direction, a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 disposed on the left side in front view with respect to the movable member 657b. On the other hand, in a state where the movable member 657b is completely protruded (a state where the movable member 657b is disposed at the protruding position), it is specified by the inclination in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when the rear inclined member 657bb is formed. The game ball that has reached the area is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a disposed on the right side of the movable member 657b. The general winning opening 630 does not affect the end condition of the round no matter how many game balls enter during execution of the jackpot game, so the gaming ball enters the general winning opening 630 during execution of the jackpot game. The more balls you win, the more prize balls you can earn. Therefore, in the intermediate position until the movable member 657b reaches the protruding position (the first guiding state in which the gaming ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf), the gaming ball is actively Since it can be fired to a specific area, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern that is set for the movable member 657b in each jackpot round tends to increase the number of times the first induction state is set during one round. One of the two movable patterns, A and the movable pattern B that tends to decrease the number of times of entering the first guiding state, is set. More specifically, when one of the jackpots A8 and B8 is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A in each round of jackpots, whereas when one of the jackpots C8 to E8 is reached, the movable member 657b is The movable pattern B is movable. Thereby, since it can be made to play a game more strongly expecting that it will become either jackpot A8 and B8 in which the frequency | count of becoming a 1st induction state increases, the interest to a player's game can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B are provided with two types of movable patterns. However, the movable pattern is not limited to two types and may be more than two types. Good or less. By reducing the number of movable patterns to one, it is not necessary to perform a control process to select a movable pattern according to the jackpot type at the start of a new round, so the processing load during the execution of the jackpot game is reduced. can do. In addition, the number of types of movable patterns is increased from two types (for example, five types), and the number of times of entering the first guiding state is further diversified, so that the game is performed with more attention to the set movable patterns. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

  In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b is varied in each big hit round according to the big hit type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, the movable pattern may be switched according to the number of rounds. Thereby, since the operation of the movable member 657b can be further diversified, the game can be played with attention paid to the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b every time a new round is started. .

  In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A is set when the big hit A8 or B8 is reached, and the movable pattern B is set when the big hit C8 to E8 is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence between the movable pattern type and the jackpot type can be arbitrarily determined. For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A may be set when the number of rounds is a big hit type (for example, a big hit of seven rounds). By configuring in this way, when the number of rounds becomes a jackpot type, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each jackpot round is likely to increase, so that the jackpot of a small number of rounds has been determined Thus, the player can be prevented from being discouraged.

<Modification of Eighth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The modification of the eighth embodiment is different in that a rotating member 658 is provided instead of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment described above. As shown in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the rotating member 658 is configured to be capable of rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the rotating shaft 658a as the rotating shaft. By turning to the state where the upper end of the rotating member 658 comes close again to the lower end of the specific winning opening 657a (see FIG. 114C), a state where it is easy to enter the specific winning opening 657a is formed. That is, a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the specific winning opening 657a by the inclination formed by the rotating member 658 in the downward direction from the upper left side in the front view to the lower right side. In each of the big hit rounds, the turning member 658 is controlled to rotate in a predetermined turning pattern, so that a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. Although details will be described later, depending on the rotation position (rotation angle) until the rotation member 658 reaches the specific winning opening 657a (see FIG. 114 (c)). It is configured to change the winning opening that allows balls. That is, the same operation as that in the above-described eighth embodiment can be realized.

  The rotating member 658 normally stands upright in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 114 (a). The game ball that has reached the specific area in this state is a space between the rotating member 658 and the general winning opening 630 (left side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front), or between the rotating member 658 and the specific winning opening 657a. , And flows down to the out port 66 (right side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front).

  FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram showing an intermediate position temporarily placed until the turning member 658 is turned to a state where the game ball can be guided to the specific winning opening 657a. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), at the intermediate position, the rotating member 658 forms an inclination that goes from the upper right side of the front view to the lower left side. A state that is easy to be guided is formed. If the rotating member 658 is further rotated in this state, it becomes easy to enter the specific winning opening 657a shown in FIG. 114 (c). When releasing the state in which a game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 657a, the rotating member 658 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 114 (a). It is returned to the state.

  As described above, in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, the rotation member 658 that rotates between the general winning port 630 and the specific winning port 657a is provided. The rotating member 658 has an arrangement (see FIG. 114 (b)) that can guide the game ball to the general winning opening 630 according to the rotation position (rotating angle), and the specific winning opening 657a. An arrangement (see FIG. 114 (c)) that forms an inclination capable of guiding the game ball can be taken. More specifically, in each jackpot round, the game is temporarily played to the general winning port 630 at an intermediate position in the middle of the rotation of the rotating member 658 until the game ball can enter the specific winning port 657a. The ball is placed in a state where it can enter. As a result, as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of winning balls that can be acquired in the jackpot increases as the gaming ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

  In addition, the rotation member 658 in the modification of this 8th Embodiment can also be diverted to 6th Embodiment mentioned above and 7th Embodiment. More specifically, a rotation member 658 is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the left specific winning opening 650La in the sixth embodiment and the left probability changing winning opening 655La in the seventh embodiment can be entered. In this case, the rotation member 658 may be rotated counterclockwise so as to form an inclination that goes downward from the upper right side in the front view to the lower left side. In addition, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment and the right probability changing winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment can be entered, the rotating member 658 is rotated clockwise to start from the upper left side of the front view. What is necessary is just to form the inclination of the direction which goes down to the lower right side.

  In the eighth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in the state of being arranged at the intermediate position. However, the state where the gaming ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 is as follows. The game ball is not limited to the intermediate position, and may be configured such that the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 within a movable range including an open position or a closed position. Further, it is not limited to the general winning opening 630 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a prize opening that triggers a special symbol lottery, a chance prize winning slot that triggers a chance to be given a promising state after the end of the jackpot, or a prize opening that triggers the start of a jackpot (A so-called two-type V prize opening) may be used. Moreover, a privilege does not need to be given to a player (for example, out mouth).

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, according to the movable position (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b that is movable in a predetermined movable pattern (any one of the movable patterns A and B) during the execution of the jackpot game, The winning opening that enables winning is variable. This makes it possible to vary the winning opening through which the game ball is guided according to the timing when the game ball reaches the specific area, and to change the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game. It was.

  On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the type of the entrance that is easy to enter is variable according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that is moved when the normal symbol is drawn. did. This makes it possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of the entrance into which the game ball enters in the short-time game state where the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed and provided in the main controller 110. The ROM 202 and the RAM 203 are partially changed in configuration, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 is changed. The control process to be executed is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 115, the board | substrate surface structure of the game board 13 in this 9th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. In the description of the above-described eighth embodiment, the description of the board configuration of the game board 13 is omitted, and the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment is replaced (the general prize opening 630, the specific prize opening 657a, the movable member). Since only 657b) has been described, in the description of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment, differences from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) will be described for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment is electrically connected to the first entrance 64 with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 84) in the sixth embodiment. The point 64a is deleted, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are deleted, and the variable winning device 65 is provided. A second entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter, an electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and the second entrance 640 in front view with respect to the flow path that is It differs in that it is provided on the left side and a general winning opening 63 through which a game ball can enter is provided. The second entrance 640 is an entrance that triggers a lottery of a special symbol when a game ball enters. That is, it has the same performance as the first entrance 64. In addition, if a game ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is the number of entrances to the first entrance 64. Separately hold up to 4 times. In addition, when there is a holding ball for entering the first entrance 64 and a holding ball for entering the second entrance 640 at the same time, the reservation for entering the second entrance 640 is reserved. A special symbol lottery based on a ball is preferentially executed.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 116. In the ninth embodiment, the second entrance is provided in association with the second entrance 640, and when the normal symbol lottery is won. The traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the electric combination 640a is variable according to the movable position of the electric combination 640a that is movable in an open state in which a game ball can enter the mouth 640. The traveling direction of the game ball for each movable position of the electric accessory 640a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 116 shows the flow path of the game ball when the game ball that has been driven rightward into the flow path provided in the right direction in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 has reached the electric accessory 640a. It is the figure shown for every movable position of the electrically-driven accessory 640a. FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a closes the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position), and FIG. FIG. 116 (c) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a is disposed at an intermediate position in the middle of moving to the open position that opens the second entrance 640, and FIG. 116 (c) shows the electric accessory 640a in the open position. It shows the state of being placed.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in a state where the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, the game ball launched toward the right side of the variable display device unit 80 by right-handed is closed. The space between the entrance 640 and the general winning entrance 63 flows down. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the plurality of nails that are disposed above the general winning opening 63 and that have an inclination downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction are the upper right of the general winning opening 63. It protrudes in the right direction rather than a plurality of nails that constitute an inclination in the direction from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. Therefore, the possibility that the right-handed game ball will flow down toward the general winning opening 63 is extremely low in a state where the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), the right-handed game ball is likely to collide with the tip portion of the electric combination 640a at the intermediate position where the electric combination 640a is moved to the open position. When the game ball collides with the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a, the collided game ball is reflected in the left direction when viewed from the front, and is easily guided in the direction in which the general winning opening 63 is provided. Thereby, it becomes easy to acquire a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) based on the winning ball to the general winning opening 63.

  In the ninth embodiment, even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 116 (b) is not completely coincided with, within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position (for example, before and after the arrangement shown in FIG. 116 (b)). If it is within a movable range of about 10%, the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 63. For this reason, the possibility that the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 63 can be further increased.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (c), in the state where the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the open position (the state where the second entrance 640 is opened), the right-handed game ball is basically electric. It is guided to the second entrance 640 by the accessory 640a. In addition, in the state in which the electric accessory 640a is completely opened, the electric winning combination 640a is arranged at the upper right of the general winning opening 63 from the height of the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a, and descends from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. Of the plurality of nails constituting the inclination of the direction, the height of the nail at the upper end is higher. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the second entrance 640 along the path formed by the electric accessory 640a, and even if it collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected leftward in the front view, It is difficult to reach the general winning opening 63 through the top of the nail. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected leftward flows downward through the space on the left side of the tip of the electric accessory 640a, as shown in FIG. 116 (c). .

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment, a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 63 is formed according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a, or is easily guided to the second entrance 640. A state is formed, or a state in which it is difficult to enter any entrance is formed. Therefore, when a winning is made by the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the movable position of the electric combination 640a when the game ball reaches the electric combination 640a. Note that the ninth embodiment is configured such that the number of winning balls that are awarded to the general winning opening 63 is greater than the number of winning balls that are awarded to the second winning slot 640. Therefore, the more the game ball reaches the electric combination 640a at the intermediate position where the electric combination 640a is moved to the open position, the more advantageous for the player. Therefore, since the game property to which attention is paid by the movable position of the electric accessory 640a can be realized, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is second compared to the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 11 (a)) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The difference is that a hit type selection table 202ba is added.

  The second hit type selection table 202ba is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric utility item 640a when a win is made in the normal symbol lottery. Details of the second hit type selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b).

  FIG. 117B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second hit type selection table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the second hit type selection table 202ba, the type of release pattern set in the electric accessory 640a and each release pattern are determined for each state of the normal symbol. The value of the hit type counter is defined in association with it. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is “in the range where the value of the second hit type counter is“ 0 to 94 ”. An opening pattern that is opened for “0.1 second × 5 times” is defined in association with it (see 202c1 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second per-type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern that is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times”. Since 95 random numbers (counter values) are “0 to 94”, an open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “0.1 second × 5 times” in the low probability state of the normal symbol is determined. The ratio is 95% (95/100). Since it becomes extremely difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the 0.1 second when the electric accessory 640a is released, even if it is released 5 times, “0.1 It is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 while the release pattern of “5 times per second” is set.

  Further, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the range in which the value of the second hit type counter is “95 to 99” is associated with an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “once for 2 seconds × 1”. (See 202c2 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern that is opened “2 seconds × 1”. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) is “95 to 99”, in the normal symbol low probability state, the ratio of determining the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1” is 5 % (5/100). Since it is easy to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 in 2 seconds, the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in the opening pattern of “2 seconds × 1”. It is an open pattern that is easy to ball.

  In this way, in the normal symbol low probability state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, and even if it hits the normal symbol, most of them are open patterns of “0.1 seconds × 5 times”. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 even if the player hits the right in the low probability state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is moved in an open pattern that is opened “0.1 second × 5 times”, the electric accessory 640a is continuously between the closed position and the open position for a short period of time. Is located at an intermediate position (see FIG. 116 (b)). Therefore, while the electric accessory 640a is performing the opening operation with the opening pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times”, to the general prize opening 63 that has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out by making a right stroke. Enter at a high rate. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to make a right strike while the release operation is being performed with the release pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times”.

  In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the ninth embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is executed based on entering the second entrance 640 in a low probability state of the normal symbol, A very long variation time (for example, 300 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special symbol. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, it becomes a disadvantageous state that the lottery of the special symbol is not executed for five minutes thereafter. Therefore, in a low probability state of a normal symbol, if the player hits the right side while the “2 seconds × 1 time” release pattern (open pattern that makes it easy to enter the second entrance 640) is performed, It is disadvantageous for the person. For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, a “0.1 second × 5 times” release pattern that is almost impossible to enter the second entrance 640 in the low probability state of the normal symbol is determined. In such a case, a notification (right-handed navigating effect) that prompts the player to make a right turn is performed, while a “two seconds × one time” release pattern that facilitates entry to the second entrance 640 is determined. Is configured not to perform a right-handed navigation effect. As a result, while giving the player the maximum chance to enter the general winning opening 63, the player is excessively disadvantaged in the low probability state of the normal symbol (the special symbol lottery is performed for 5 minutes or more). Will not be disadvantageous).

  In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the special symbol lottery executed based on the fact that the player has entered the first entrance 64 and the variation display are referred to as “first special symbol lottery” and “ This is referred to as “variable display of the first special symbol”, and the special symbol lottery executed based on the fact that the player has entered the second entrance 640 and the variable display are referred to as “second special symbol lottery” and “ This is referred to as “2 Special Symbol Fluctuation Display”.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the short time state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is “0.1 second × 5 for the second hit type counter value range of“ 0 to 29 ”. The opening pattern to be released is defined in association with each other (see 202c3 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second per-type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern that is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times”. Since 30 random numbers (counter values) are “0 to 29”, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “0.1 seconds × 5 times” in the short time state of the normal symbol is determined. The ratio is 30% (30/100).

  In addition, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened “2 seconds × 1” is defined in association with the range of the second hit type counter value “30 to 99” (FIG. 117). (See 202c4 of (b)). Of 100 random values (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with an opening pattern that is opened “2 seconds × 1”. Since there are 70 random numbers (counter values) of “30 to 99”, the percentage of the open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released “2 seconds × 1” in the short time state of the normal symbol is 70%. (70/100).

  In this way, in the normal symbol time-short state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high, and when it hits the normal symbol, it becomes an open pattern of “2 seconds × one time” at a rate of 70%. By continuously making a right strike in the short time state of the symbol, the game ball can be continuously entered into the second entrance 640. Further, when the release pattern of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” is selected, it becomes easy for game balls to enter the general winning opening 63, so that more prize balls can be obtained. In addition, in the normal symbol time-short state, the variation time of the second special symbol variation display is shortened (equivalent to the variation time of the first special symbol), so lots of lots of the second special symbol are drawn at short intervals. Can be performed. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to make a right stroke while the normal symbol's short-time state is set. Therefore, a right-handed navigation effect is executed while the normal symbol's short-time state is set. Continue to be.

  In the short-time gaming state, the player can continue to make a right strike and continuously execute the “2 seconds × 1” release pattern, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be continuously executed without reducing the holding ball. it can. In addition, if many open patterns of “0.1 seconds × 5 times” are selected fortunately in the short time state, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by entering the general winning opening 63 without reducing the number of time reductions. . For this reason, the player has an opening pattern with a short period of time placed in the opening position during the short-time gaming state (that is, an opening pattern with relatively little opportunity to enter the second entrance 640). It is possible to realize a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the hope of being determined. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (c). FIG. 117 (c) shows the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure. As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment is a special design compared to the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 87 (b)) in the eighth embodiment (and the sixth embodiment). Instead of the reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided. The difference is that a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided. Another difference is that the movable type storage area 203aa is deleted.

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first entrance 64, and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the second entrance 640. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 have the same configuration as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. Yes. That is, there are four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas includes a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Each value is stored. When the special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the holding first area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 (when the holding ball of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1. The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area Determination such as symbol lottery is performed. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters the second entrance 640 Based on (start winning prize), the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the special symbol (first symbol) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) is 4 at the maximum. It is a counter that counts up to once. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is set to zero. Every time the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added (see S424 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S228 in FIG. 118). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set to zero. Every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added (see S430 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S223 in FIG. 118).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 122. First, with reference to FIG. 118, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 9 (S141) in this 9th Embodiment is demonstrated. This special symbol variation process 9 (S141) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). In the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), it is a process for setting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37, the variation pattern of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. is there.

  Among the special symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, the special symbol variation process (in FIG. 118) in the eighth embodiment (first embodiment) is performed in S201, S202, and S208 to S217. 23)), the same processing as S201, S202, and S208 to S217 is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S202 that the special symbol is not varying (S202: No), the number of second special symbol retention balls The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (S222).

  In the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c2 is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol reservation 1 is subtracted and updated from the value (N2) of the ball counter 203c2 (S223), and a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the updated value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is set (S224). . The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S222 that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value (a value equal to or greater than 1) greater than 0 (ie, 0) (S222: No) Next, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is greater than zero. Is determined (S227).

  In the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value (a value equal to or greater than 1) greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S227: No), Since there is neither a reserved ball of one special symbol nor a reserved ball of the second special symbol, it means that it is not possible to newly start a special symbol variable display, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special symbol 1 is subtracted and updated from the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (S228), and a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the updated first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is set ( S229). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and is executed by the MPU 201 in the same manner as the special figure 1 reserved ball number command. In the external output process (S901), the signal is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113.

  After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the process of S225 (S230). The process proceeds to S208.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the details of the start winning process 9 (S142) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This start winning process 9 (S142) is executed in place of the start winning process (see FIG. 25) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for executing the corresponding control when the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is detected.

  In the start winning process 9 (S142), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S421). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined in the process of S421 that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol) The variable display hold count N1) is acquired (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S423).

  Then, in the process of S421, if it is determined that no winning is made to the first entrance 64 (S421: No), or even if there is a game ball winning in the first entrance 64, the process of S423 is performed. When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. Among these, it transmits toward the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the held ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S425, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described above. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S427. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640 (S427). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S421, the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined in the process of S427 that the game ball has won the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (the second special symbol lottery is selected). The corresponding variable display hold count N2) is acquired (S428), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S429).

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol of the RAM 223. The stored ball number is stored in the counter 223b.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S431, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the fluctuations updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described above. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the process of S433 Migrate to In the process of S432, as in the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S433, a prefetch process for prefetching the success / failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S433), and this process is terminated. The details of this prefetch process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S433). In this pre-reading process (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 has been detected in the current start winning process 9 (see FIG. 119). However, if it is determined that a new ball has not been detected (S1501: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that a new ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (ie, 4). (S1502), and if it is determined that the upper limit value is reached (S1502: Yes), the process is terminated as it is. In contrast, if it is determined in S1502 that the number of held balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), various counter values (start winning process 9 (FIG. 119) acquired at the time when a ball is detected are detected. (See) (S426 or various counter values stored in the process of S432), whether or not the lottery is a special symbol (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type), A fluctuation pattern is predicted (S1503).

  If the process of S1503 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S1504), and this process is terminated.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the normal symbol variation process 9 (S143) in the ninth embodiment will be described. The normal symbol variation process 9 (S143) is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is performed in the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling the change display of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640, and the like.

  Of the normal symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment, the processes in S501 to S519 are the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those in S501 to S519 are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win in the process of S519 (S519: Yes), the second hit type Referring to the selection table 202ba, an opening pattern to be set for the electric combination 640a is determined, and an electric combination operation starting process for starting an opening operation based on the determined opening pattern is executed (S531), This process ends. The details of the electric accessory operation start process (S531) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the above-described electric accessory operation start process (S531). In the electric accessory operation start process (S531), first, the second hit type selection table 202ba (see FIG. 117 (b)) is read (S1601), and the current normal symbol state and the first normal symbol state are read from the read table. An open pattern corresponding to the value of the type counter per 2 is read (S1602). Here, the current normal symbol state is determined to be the normal symbol time-short state if the probability variation flag 203e is on, or the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, while the probability variation flag 203e. Is off and the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a low probability state. As described above, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “0 to 94”, “0.1 second × 5 times” is selected as the release pattern, If the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “95 to 99”, “2 seconds × 1 time” is selected as the release pattern. Also, in the short time state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of “0 to 29”, “0.1 second × 5 times” is selected as the release pattern, while the second hit If the value of the type selection counter is in the range of “30 to 99”, “2 seconds × 1 time” is selected as the release pattern.

  When the process of S1602 ends, next, the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a by the opening pattern read out in the process of S1602 is set (S1603). Then, it is determined whether or not the current state is the low probability state of the normal symbol (the probability variation flag 203e is off and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0) (S1604). If there is (S1604: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the release pattern whose start is set in the processing of S1603 is a release pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times” (S1605). In the process of S1605, when it is determined that the opening pattern set to start this time is an opening pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times” (S1605: Yes), “0.1 second × 5 times” is released. An opening start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the pattern has been started is set (S1606), and this process ends. The sound lamp control device 113 executes a right-handed navigation effect that prompts the player to right-hand by receiving the opening start command. Thus, when an opening pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times” is set, which gives many opportunities to enter the general winning opening 63, the player is given an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63. Can be given reliably. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game in the most disadvantageous normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1604 that the current state is a short time state of a normal symbol (S1604: No), and when it is determined in the process of S1605 that an open pattern of “2 seconds × 1” is set. (S1605: No), the process of S1606 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

<Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 9 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. The command determination process 9 (S4031) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the command determination in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the process (see FIG. 41), this is a process for analyzing an unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command.

  Of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, the processes of S4901 to S4918 are S4901 to S4901 in the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those in S4918 are executed. Further, in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the winning information command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110. (S4909: No), then, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes an opening start command (S4931), and it is determined that an unprocessed command includes an opening start command. When it does (S4931: Yes), the right-handed navigation effect of the effect mode that prompts the player to make a right-handed is set (S4932), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4931, when it is determined that the open command is not included in the unprocessed command (S4931: No), the process proceeds to S4911.

  When a right-handed navigation effect is set by the processing of S4932, a “0.1 second × 5 times” opening pattern that allows many opportunities to enter the general winning opening 63 is set. The player can be surely given an opportunity to enter 63. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game in the most disadvantageous normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a that is moved to the open position is temporarily moved to the open position. A board surface configuration that makes it easier for the game ball to be guided to the general winning port 63 disposed on the left side of the second ball slot 640 when the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at an intermediate position where it can be placed. did. This makes it possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of the entrance into which the game ball enters in the short-time game state where the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high. Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, it is easy to be placed at the intermediate position (the number of times of being placed at the intermediate position is large), but it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 ( The opening pattern of the second entrance 640 is short) and it is difficult to be placed at the intermediate position (the number of times of being placed at the intermediate position is small), but it is easy to enter the second entrance 640 (second And an opening pattern having a long opening period of the entrance 640 is provided. By setting an opening pattern that is easy to be placed at the intermediate position (the number of times of being placed at the intermediate position is large), an opportunity to win a large number of prize balls by entering the game balls into the general winning opening 63 is obtained. Therefore, it is more difficult for a player to enter the second entrance 640 than an opening pattern that makes it easier to enter the second entrance 640 (that is, an unfavorable release in a general gaming machine). It is possible to realize a novel gameability that allows a game in a short-time game state to be played in the hope of becoming a (pattern). Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, in the normal gaming state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol), the electric accessory 640a is easily placed at the intermediate position (the number of times of being placed at the intermediate position). When the execution of the release pattern is determined, a right-handed navigation effect (an effect suggesting that a game ball is launched toward the second entrance 640) is executed. With such a configuration, in the gaming state that is most disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to give a chance to win a winning ball by entering the general winning opening 63 every time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, it can suppress that a game becomes monotonous in an unfavorable gaming state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the normal gaming state can be improved.

  In the ninth embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the right-handed operation is performed only when the execution of the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is easily arranged at the intermediate position (the number of times of being arranged at the intermediate position) is determined. Although the navigation system is configured to execute, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a right-handed navigation effect may be executed regardless of the open pattern when a normal symbol is hit, and it is difficult to place the right-handed navigation effect at the middle position (the number of times of placing at the middle position is small). A right-handed navigation effect may be executed only when an opening pattern that is easy to enter the entrance 640 (the opening period of the second entrance 640 is long) is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the chances of entering the second entrance 640 in the normal gaming state, so that the game in the normal gaming state can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the ninth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided (reflected) to the general winning port 63 in the state of being arranged at the intermediate position. However, it is easily guided to the general winning port 63. This state is not limited to the intermediate position, and the game ball may be easily guided to the general winning opening 63 within a movable range including an open position or a closed position. Further, it is not limited to the general winning opening 63 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning opening that triggers a special symbol lottery, or a winning opening that triggers the start of a jackpot (so-called two-type V winning opening). Moreover, a privilege does not need to be given to a player (for example, out mouth).

  In the ninth embodiment, there is an open pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times” while the short time state of the normal symbol is set, and in the low probability state of the normal symbol and hitting the normal symbol. Although the right-handed navigation effect is executed only when the right-handed navigation effect is determined, the execution timing of the right-handed navigation effect is not limited to this. For example, when the normal symbol is hit during the time-short state, and after the time-short state is finished, the variation of the normal symbol is ended and the opening pattern of “0.1 second × 5 times” is started, the “0.1” It is good also as a structure which extends the right-handed navigation effect performed during the short-time state until the opening pattern of “5 times per second” ends. Thereby, right-handed navigation effect is executed immediately after the player returns to left-handed, and it can be suppressed that the player is confused.

  In the ninth embodiment, a state where it is easy to enter the general prize opening 63 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640 a that opens and closes the second entrance 640, and the entrance to the second entrance 640 is entered. Although the easy state and the state where it is difficult to enter any of the entrances are switched, this configuration is not limited to the second entrance 640. For example, the specific winning opening may be configured in the same manner as the second winning opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a in the ninth embodiment, and the arrangement of the general winning opening 63 may be the same as in the ninth embodiment. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63 during the jackpot game, so that the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game can be increased. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126. In the first to ninth embodiments described above, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 (nail arrangement, windmill arrangement, etc.) is substantially bilaterally symmetric and is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the game board 13. A game ball (right-handed game ball) fired toward the current flow path and a game ball (left-handed game ball) fired toward the left-hand flow path The period from when the ball is launched to when it reaches the specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is substantially the same.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the game ball launched toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13 (the right-handed game ball) is on the left side. It is configured such that the period until reaching a specific area is longer than the game ball launched toward the flow path provided in In addition, in the present tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the variable display device unit 80 is more than the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The game balls that have flowed down the flow path provided on the left side are configured such that the ratio of entering the specific winning opening 65a is higher.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first implementation. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 124, the board configuration of the gaming board 13 in the tenth embodiment is a variable display unit in the gaming board 13 as compared to the board configuration (see FIG. 2) of the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment described above. On the right side of 80, there is a difference in that a detouring accessory 700 capable of entering a play ball into the inside is provided. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but this detour accessory 700 has a time until the game ball that has been hit right (launched to the right side of the game board 13) reaches the specific winning opening 65 a. It is provided to make it longer. In other words, the detour bonus object 700 is until the game ball fired by the right strike reaches the specific winning opening 65a, rather than the period until the game ball launched by the left strike reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to lengthen the flow time of the right-handed game ball so that the time becomes longer. In the tenth embodiment, the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 to 2 seconds, whereas the right-handed game ball is the specific winning opening 65a. The period until reaching is set to 7 seconds to 8 seconds.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the details of the detouring accessory 700 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a detouring accessory 700. As shown in FIG. 125, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at the top thereof. The game ball fired by right-hand hitting can enter the inside of the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 for discharging the game ball that has flowed down in the detour bonus 700 to the outside of the detour bonus 700 is provided below the detour bonus 700. Further, in the detouring accessory 700, the frontal front side, the rear side, and the left-right direction are prevented by the peripheral portion 730 in order to prevent the sphere that has progressed inside from being discharged outside without passing through the opening 720. The four directions are enclosed. Since the peripheral edge portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily see how the ball flows down.

  Moreover, since the plane on the back side in the front view of the peripheral edge portion 730 can be assembled so as to be substantially the same plane as the base plate 60, a gap is generated between the peripheral edge portion 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap. Furthermore, since the front plane front side of the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are configured to contact each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed, the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of flow paths (guide flow paths 740 to 790) that are inclined toward the lower side of the detour role 700 are provided inside the detour role 700. In each of the guide channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere contacts has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side in front view and the inner wall on the front side in front view). The distance between the two is substantially the same. That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and each of the guide passages 740 to 790, so that a sphere can be prevented from passing through the gap.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the guide channels 740, 760, 780 are inclined in a direction downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. In addition, the guide channels 750, 770, and 790 are inclined in a direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. In addition, guide channels 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, and 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detouring accessory 700. That is, a flow path that is inclined in a downward direction from the upper right direction in the front view to a lower left direction and a flow path that is inclined in a downward direction from the upper left direction in the front view are alternately provided.

  The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first falls into the guide channel 740 and flows down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front along the inclination formed by the guide channel 740. When the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740, the game ball falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750. Then, the dropped game ball flows down in the lower right direction as viewed from the front along the guide channel 750. When the game ball that has flowed down reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the game ball falls into the guide channel 760 and flows down in the lower left direction as viewed from the front along the inclination formed by the guide channel 760.

  Thereafter, the game ball alternately repeats the action of flowing down along the flow path and the action of dropping into the lower flow path. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide channel 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that has entered the detouring accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 720. Each time the flow path of the game ball changes, the direction of the flow of the game ball changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). The momentum (flow velocity) of the sphere can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game ball that has entered the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. Thus, compared to launching a game ball to the left side of the game board 13, when the ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is positioned below the game board 13 (the first entrance 64 or variable prizes). The time required to reach the region where the device 65 is disposed can be increased (7 seconds or more).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is pivotally supported by the channel support shafts 741 to 791, and each channel support shaft is used as a rotation axis, either clockwise or counterclockwise. It is comprised so that rotation is possible. Further, the rotation operation is performed by rotating the lower surfaces of the guide channels 740 to 790 relative to the rotation stop members 742 a to 792 a or the rotation stop members 742 b to 792 b provided below the guide channels 740 to 790. Stop by touching. This rotation operation will be described using the guide channel 740 as an example.

  As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This turning operation is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guide channel 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, so that the upper half of the guide channel 740 moves downward. A force in the direction of turning is generated. That is, a force is applied to rotate the guide channel 740 clockwise in front view, so that the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation stops when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much clockwise and the guide channel 740 from tilting in the opposite direction.

  Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially cylindrical member, and is joined to the inner wall on the near side and the inner wall on the far side of the peripheral edge 730, respectively. That is, the position is not shifted by an impact when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 comes into contact. The other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b have the same structure as the rotation stop member 742b.

  On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guide channel 740, so the lower half of the guide channel 740 is rotated downward. Directional force is generated. That is, since a force is applied to rotate the guide channel 740 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation stops when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. That is, it can be suppressed that the inclination of the guide channel 740 becomes too large and the momentum of the game ball cannot be cut. Therefore, the game ball fired by the right strike can surely flow down to the lower side of the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64 and the specific winning opening 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. . In addition, when a game ball flows down in a state where the inclination of each guide channel 740 to 790 is maximized, each guide channel is set so that it takes 7 seconds until the game ball reaches the second entrance 640. A path length of 740 to 790 and a maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare for game balls to flow down with all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintaining the maximum inclination angle, it is ensured that the time for the game balls to reach the second entrance 640 is 7 seconds or more. be able to.

  In this way, by configuring the guide channels 740 to 790 to change in inclination based on the load due to the weight of the game balls, the flow speed of the game balls flowing down the guide channels 740 to 790 is varied. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700. In the above description, the case where one sphere travels on the guide channel 740 has been described. However, a state in which a plurality of spheres travel on the same guide channel may occur during an actual game. In this case, the rotation operation of each of the guide passages 740 to 790 can be made more irregular, so that it is possible to vary the time until the game ball finishes passing the detour accessory 700.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners at the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded compared to the corners at the left and right ends of the upper surface. By comprising in this way, when each guide flow path 740-790 rotates, it can make it difficult to contact the corner | angular part of a lower surface, and the inner wall part of the peripheral part 730. FIG. Therefore, since each guide channel 740-790 can be arranged at a position closer to the peripheral portion 730, a gap is formed between each guide channel 740-790 and the peripheral portion 730, and a game ball is formed in the clearance. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught or the game ball from passing through the gap. In addition, each guidance flow path 740-790 is comprised so that it may return to the arrangement | positioning with the largest inclination by dead weight in the state in which the game ball is not flowing down. For example, in a state in which the sphere does not flow down the guide channel 740, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise with the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide channel comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when it contacts the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow paths 750 to 790 are configured to perform a rotation operation until the rotation of the game balls 750 to 790 comes into contact with the rotation stop members 752 a to 792 a by their own weight in a state where the game balls are not flowing down. As a result, whether the game ball flows down while each of the guide passages 750 to 790 is rotating, or whether the game ball flows down after the rotation of each of the guide passages 750 to 790 is completed Accordingly, the flow velocity of the sphere can be varied.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each induction | guidance | derivation flow path 740-790 does not rotate with dead weight, but rotates only by passage of a game ball. Further, for example, each guide channel 740 to 790 may be configured to rotate regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 124, a number of nails are arranged below the detour role 700 so as to restrict the flow direction of the game ball flowing out from the detour role 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour role 700. Is arranged. With these nails, all the game balls that have flowed out of the detouring accessory 700 can be dropped onto the curved member 800 provided on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the variable winning device 65 (of the first entrance 64). Game balls can be prevented from flowing down in the direction). The game ball that has fallen on the curved surface member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 800 and is guided toward the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 124, since the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (only a width less than one game ball), the curved surface member is in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is opened. Almost all game balls guided to the left end of 800 can be won (entered) into the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the variable winning device 65, a relatively wide space (with a width exceeding one gaming ball) for guiding the gaming ball to the out port 66 below the variable winning device 65. (Flow path) is provided. For this reason, in the case where the specific winning opening 65a is opened, when a game ball is fired by left-handed, many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, but some game balls (for example, 10 The ratio of one ball to the ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 65a.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the detour accessory 700 and the curved member 800 are provided in the flow path on the right side when viewed from the front of the game board 13. As a result, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning port 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning port 65a. Basically, it takes longer for the right-handed player to reach the specific winning hole 65a, but depending on the game ball reflection direction, the shooting situation, etc., the left-handed person will enter the specific winning hole 65a. The possibility that the time to reach will be longer is also not 0 (for example, when a game ball launched in the left direction temporarily stops or a clogged ball occurs in the left channel of the variable display device unit 80) etc). For this reason, the period until the game ball that has flowed (passed) through the right channel of the variable display device unit 80 reaches the specific winning opening 65a as compared to the game ball that has flowed (passed) through the left channel. In other words, it can be said that the length of the game ball that has flowed down the left channel is likely to be shorter.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ratio of the right-handed gaming balls entering the specific winning opening 65a is set to the ratio of the left-handed gaming balls to the specific winning opening 65a. It can be higher than the rate of entering the ball. As a result, a player who wants to advance the jackpot game quickly (to finish the jackpot game at an early stage) will incur a slight loss (a waste of about one in ten balls) during the jackpot game. The ball can be played aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handed. On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate waste balls (loss) as much as possible, they will aim for a specific winning hole 65a by right-handed, with the intention of extending the jackpot game period. Can be made. Therefore, the favorite gameability can be selected for each player during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the gameability can be realized in accordance with the preference of each player. Each jackpot round ends when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed. Even if the game ball starts to be fired by right hit after each big hit round starts, 10 game balls pass through the detour bonus 700 before 30 seconds elapse, and the specific winning opening 65a (10 game balls can be entered in 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right spherical surface from being disadvantageous when a right strike is made (the round ends before the specified number of game balls have won the specific winning opening 65a).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a display mode during execution of the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 126, in the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot is reached, display areas HR15 and HR16 having substantially rectangular shapes are formed on the upper left side in front view and the upper right side in front view in the main display area Dm. A display region HR17 having a substantially rectangular shape and a larger area than the display regions HR15 and HR16 is formed below the display region HR15 and the display region HR16. In the display area HR15, an image imitating a left-pointing arrow is displayed, and the characters “high-speed mode with left-handed” and the characters “you can digest big hits quickly” are displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the left-hand strike is made during the jackpot, the jackpot can be digested in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot proceeds at a relatively high speed). Can do.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 126, in the display area HR16, an image imitating a right-pointing arrow is displayed, and the words “Right-handed, low-speed mode” and “You can digest the jackpot carefully”. Characters are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the player hits the right during the jackpot, the jackpot can be digested over a relatively long time (the jackpot proceeds at a relatively low speed). Can be made.

  As shown in FIG. 126, various images and information indicating that the jackpot is being displayed are displayed on the display area HR17. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126, an image TB simulating a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed at the center of the display area HR17, and at the upper right side in the display area HR17, “ A display area HR19 with the letters “big hit” is formed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the jackpot game is being executed. Further, on the upper left side in the display area HR17, a display area HR18 for displaying characters indicating the progress status of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of prize balls paid out) is formed. In the example of FIG. 126, the characters “ROUND: 01/16” (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters “GET: 0000/1600” (the prize balls to date) Information indicating the comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts). With the display contents displayed in these display areas HR18, the player can easily understand the progress status of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning port 65a is longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning port 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of the right-handed gaming balls entering the specific winning opening 65a is set to the left-handed gaming balls. It is set as the structure made higher than the ratio which enters 65a. With these configurations, a player who wants to advance the jackpot game speedily (want to win a lot of prize balls in a shorter period of time) loses some loss during the jackpot game (1 in 10 balls). A game can be played aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handed after preparing for a certain amount of wasted balls). On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate as many waste balls (loss) as possible, the game is aimed at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handed with the intention of extending the jackpot game period. Can be performed. Therefore, the favorite gameability can be selected for each player during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the gameability can be realized in accordance with the preference of each player.

  In the tenth embodiment, by providing the detouring accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball launched by the right strike reaches the variable winning device 65 is left-handed. The game ball fired by is configured to be longer than the period until it reaches the variable winning device 65. In other words, by making the path length when the game ball fired by the right strike flows down longer than the path length when the game ball fired by the left strike flows down, The flow time is longer than that of hitting, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known cruising means may be provided instead of the detouring accessory 700 in the flow path on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display device unit 80. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period from reaching the cruising means to passing through the cruising means. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the flow time of the game ball fired by the right strike. Further, for example, instead of the detouring accessory 700, an accessory that stops the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the base plate 60 Among them, by configuring the right side of the game board 13 with a material (for example, an elastic body such as rubber) having a higher friction coefficient than the left side, the flow velocity of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is reduced with the base plate 60. It may be configured to be easily decelerated by this friction. Further, instead of the detouring accessory 700, the left flow path of the variable display device unit 80 and the right flow path are made different in arrangement of nails, so that the flow of the left flow path is lower. You may comprise so that the period until it reaches | attains the lower area | region (area | region where the 1st entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arrange | positioned) in the game board 13 may be longer than the case where it flows down the path.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, the gameability when left-handed and the gameability when right-handed are made are respectively displayed in the display area HR15 and the display area HR16. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit, only the image prompting the left strike may be displayed, or only the image prompting the right strike may be displayed. By adopting a configuration in which only the image that prompts the left strike is displayed, the big hit can be completed in a short time, and a large amount of prize balls can be acquired in a short time. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by displaying only the image that prompts the player to make a right strike, it is possible to reduce waste balls (game balls that enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 65a). The player's profit in the jackpot can be increased.

  Further, in the case of informing the player of the firing direction during the jackpot, the firing direction to be notified may be made different depending on the type of jackpot or the type of effect executed during the jackpot. More specifically, for example, when a probabilistic jackpot is reached, a variable display effect (an effect mode that is executed only when the probable jackpot is reached) is performed with the main symbols (probable variation symbols) with odd numbers attached. In addition, it is configured to determine by lottery whether to execute a variable display effect (an effect mode that is always executed when a big jackpot) is performed, in which main symbols (ordinary symbols) with even numbers are aligned. And when it becomes a normal jackpot or a probable big jackpot, and when an effect with regular symbols is determined by lottery, it is configured to execute an effect to notify whether or not the promising big hit is made during the jackpot . In this case, an effect mode for notifying whether or not it is a promising jackpot (for example, an effect that does not know whether or not it is a promising jackpot until the final round of jackpot, and immediately alerting at the end of the first round The player is allowed to select the production mode to be played and the production mode to be notified of in each round of the jackpot (that is, operation means such as buttons and levers that can be operated by the player) And determining the production mode corresponding to the operation content), the selection of the production mode may be executed in the first round. And in order to secure a longer time for selecting the production mode, a configuration that suggests a right-handed strike in the first round of the jackpot (the jackpot of the regular symbol notification) that is informed by the variable display effect in which the regular symbols are aligned. It is good. By comprising in this way, since the period for making a player select the production | presentation aspect can be ensured longer, a player can select a favorite production | generation aspect more reliably. On the other hand, when the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when the jackpot is notified by a variable display effect in which probability variation symbols are aligned), the left-handed hit may be notified during the jackpot. . With this configuration, the period until the jackpot is completed can be shortened, so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

  In addition, for example, when an effect in which a normal jackpot or a probable big hit is made and an effect in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, an effect is provided to notify whether or not the probable big hit is in the first round of the jackpot And it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation (operation production) which urges operation with respect to an operation means in the said production. More specifically, for example, a push button that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means, and an effect that prompts the user to continuously press the push button within a predetermined period is executed. The display mode is variable (for example, the gauge of the indicator is accumulated) according to the number of times the push button is pressed, and the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in conjunction with the press (for example, the gauge is changed). It is good also as a structure alert | reported that it is a probable big hit by accumulating to the maximum of an indicator. In this case, if the effect is a big jackpot or a probable big hit, and an effect that the regular symbols are aligned is determined by lottery (when the operation effect is executed), a right-hand hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot By setting it as the structure to perform, since the round period of 1 round can be made comparatively long, the period for performing an operation effect can be ensured longer. Therefore, the production effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced. On the other hand, if an effect that is a probable big hit and a certain probability variation pattern is determined by lottery (when the operation effect is not executed), a left hit is notified in the first round. The period until the end can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to receive a large amount of prize balls in a relatively short time.

  Also, instead of selecting an effect mode when notifying whether or not it is a promising jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of music (sound effect) played during the jackpot game is selected. It is good also as a structure which is comprised so that selection is possible and alert | reports a right-handed at least during the period (music selection period) for selecting a music. More specifically, in the first round of jackpot, a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (production by voice) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each of a plurality of (for example, 10) pieces of music set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with operation means such as buttons that can be operated by the player instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the operation content of the operation means. The selected one image can be selected. For example, on the music selection menu screen, images corresponding to each music piece are arranged in a vertical row, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) is turned on, and the other images are turned off. Configure as follows. Further, as operation means, there are provided three types of buttons: a button corresponding to upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to determination operation (decision button). To do. Then, by detecting the pressing of the upper button during the music selection period, the image that has been turned on until immediately before the pressing is switched to the appearance of being extinguished, and the image arranged one above is switched to the appearance of being turned on. (Each lit appearance image is moved upward by one). Similarly, when the pressing of the lower button is detected, the lit appearance image is moved downward by one. Furthermore, by detecting the pressing of the determination button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that is turned on at the time of pressing is determined as the music to be played during the current jackpot. In other words, the music is set to be played from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the big hit. By configuring in this way, the player's favorite music can be played during the jackpot, so the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

  Under such circumstances, when the left-handed strike is notified in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, so the music selection period is also shortened. For this reason, there is a possibility that the music selection period ends before the player selects a favorite music piece by operating the upper button and the lower button and sets the reproduction by the determination button. On the other hand, by setting it as the structure which alert | reports a right strike during the 1st round (music selection period) of the jackpot (the jackpot where execution of the production which selects the music is determined) by which a music selection period is set, it is 1 round. Since the eye round period can be set to a relatively long period, the player searches for a favorite song from the song selection menu screen (operates the upper and lower buttons so that the corresponding image appears to be lit) It is possible to secure a longer period for determination (pressing the determination button). Thereby, the favorite music can be surely selected without irritating the player, so that the convenience of the player when selecting the music can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed by speeding up the game by adopting a configuration in which the left-handed is notified during the first round of the jackpot (a jackpot where the normal jackpot effect is executed) in which the music selection period is not set. The jackpot game can be digested. Therefore, an appropriate launch direction can be notified to the player according to the effect mode executed during the jackpot.

  Furthermore, in the case where an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means (operation effect) such as setting a music selection period in the first round is executed at a predetermined ratio in the case of a big hit, the player's past It is good also as a structure which can change the firing direction alert | reported in the 1st round according to the operation condition (operation history). More specifically, for example, information (operation history) indicating whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation means in the first round of the jackpot in which the operation effect is set is configured to be stored. And when starting the jackpot in which the operation effect is set, based on the stored past operation history, the game is performed over the jackpot in which the operation effect of the past predetermined number (for example, 5 times) is set. When the player is not performing an operation, the left-hand beating may be notified. On the other hand, when the player is performing the operation within a predetermined number of times, the right-hand beating may be notified. That is, for players who tend not to operate even if the operation effect is executed, a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time by notifying the left strike and ending the first round of jackpot earlier. While realizing the gameability that can be acquired, for players who tend to actively operate during the operation effect, the execution period of the operation effect is lengthened by informing the right-handed, the player in the operation effect A period for performing a sufficient operation on the operation means can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to realize gameability according to the player's tendency.

  In the tenth embodiment, the right-handed person has a winning spherical surface by adopting a board configuration in which the right-handed person has a higher entrance rate to the specific winning opening 65a than the left-handed person. Although the configuration is slightly advantageous, the configuration for making the right-handed advantage advantageous with the aspherical surface is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of a game ball fired by a right strike and a game ball fired by a left strike at the specific winning opening 65a, the right side of the specific winning opening 65 (ie, left-handed) It is also possible to provide a general winning opening with a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15) at a position where it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter and a right-handed game ball can enter. That is, in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the left-handed game balls basically enter the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the game balls cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a and are out. While flowing down to the mouth 66, the right-handed game balls may basically enter the specific winning opening 65a, and a part of the gaming balls may enter the general winning opening. With this configuration, when the player makes a right-hand shot, the winning ball obtained by entering the general winning opening is the winning ball due to the jackpot (that is, the gaming ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a). In this case, it is advantageous to make a right-hand hit during a big hit with the award sphere. Therefore, a player who wants to win more prize balls can be made to make a right-hand strike with the expectation that the jackpot period will be longer. On the other hand, for players who want to win a big hit prize ball in a shorter period of time, be prepared to make a left hit during the jackpot with the award sphere being prepared to be slightly disadvantageous than right hit Can do.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the configuration in which the right-handed feature and the left-handed feature are displayed on the display areas HR15 and HR16 are configured (see FIG. 126). ), But not limited to this. For example, a sensor that can detect whether the game board 13 is right-handed or left-handed at a predetermined location (for example, the left channel and the right channel of the variable display device unit 80). It is good also as a structure which provides the detection means of these etc. and discriminate | determines the direction which the player is emitting the game ball from the detection result by a detection means. And it is good also as a structure which varies the production | presentation in jackpot according to the determined launch direction. For example, when a right strike is detected, the display area HR15 is turned off and the display area HR16 is turned on. On the other hand, when a left strike is detected, the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned on. It is good also as a structure made into the lighted-out appearance. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of gameability is achieved depending on the firing direction selected by the player.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 132. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, in the game board 13, the game ball is placed in the channel provided on the right side of the game ball 13, rather than the game ball flowing down in the channel provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80. In the case where the player has flowed down, it is easier to increase the time until it reaches the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged). The path length of the flow path, the flow direction of the game ball, and the like were configured. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (that is, during the execution of the jackpot game), the game is made by hitting right than when the game ball is launched by hitting left. A game board 13 having a board configuration that makes it easier to win (enter) a specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate when a ball is fired.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a right probability variable winning device 659 is provided as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during the jackpot. The right probability variation winning port 659a of the right probability variation winning device 659 is set in an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of jackpot, and is similar to the left probability variation winning port 655La and the right probability variation winning port 655Ra in the seventh embodiment described above. In addition, when a game ball enters during the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state is given after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, the specific prize opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the big hit, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded when game balls enter. Further, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both in the case of making a left strike and in the case of making a right strike. Although details will be described later, the left strike is made in the first round. As the number of game balls that reach the probability variation prize winning device 659 increases while the right probability variation prize opening 659a can enter the ball, the percentage of the game balls that have reached the right probability variation prize opening 659a increases. It is configured to be low. On the other hand, if the player continues to make a right turn in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the probability variation prize winning device 659 decreases while the right probability variation prize opening 659a is ready to enter, but the reached game ball Is configured such that the ratio of entering the right-probable change winning opening 659a increases. As a result, the gameability in the first round of jackpot can be made different according to the launch direction of the game ball, so that the gameability of each player (the probability of entering the right probability change prize opening 659a is low). Instead, it is possible to select a game property that increases the number of game balls to be reached, or a game property that increases the entrance rate instead of having a smaller number of game balls to be reached.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110. In addition, the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed to be the same as the various control processing in the seventh embodiment. . Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the tenth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, in the gaming board 13 in the eleventh embodiment, a curved surface member 810 is provided instead of the curved surface member 800 provided in the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 124) in the tenth embodiment. Is different. As shown in FIG. 127, a probability variation winning device 659 is arranged on a part of the slope of the curved surface member 810.

  The probability variation prize winning device 659 is provided with a horizontally elongated rectangular right probability variation prize winning opening 659a at a substantially central portion thereof. The right chance winning prize opening 659a is normally closed by the open / close door 659f1 (that is, it is difficult to enter), and when the first round of big hit is started, the open / close door 659f1 is a big hit. It is opened and closed with a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each type. In other words, in the first round of jackpot, the state where it is possible to enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a and the state where it is difficult to enter are switched with a specific switching pattern. Then, when the game ball enters the right probability change winning opening 659a while the open / close door 659f1 is opened (while the right probability change winning opening 659a can be entered), the game state after the end of the jackpot is reached. The probability change state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol are set (the probability change flag 203e is set to ON at the end of the jackpot). On the other hand, if a game ball has never entered the right-probability winning prize opening 659a in a jackpot of 1, the game state after the jackpot is in a low probability state of a special symbol and a short-time state of a normal symbol It is set (100 is set to the value of the hour / short counter 203f). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the right probability change entrance 659a than when the game ball never enters the right probability change entrance 659a during the jackpot. (The gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous).

  As shown in FIG. 127, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is arranged along the curved path on the upper surface of the curved member 810. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the detour accessory 700 and dropped onto the curved member 810 is By rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, it is possible to easily reach the right probability change prize opening 659a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, the left end on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 and the left end of the right probability change prize opening 659a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. In addition, the curved surface member 820 provided below the left flow path in the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end in the condition of the curved surface member 810. . A plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810 so as to form an inclination in a downward direction from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810 as shown in FIG. With these configurations, when a game ball that has been left-handed and passed through the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 820, the upper surface of the curved surface member 820 rolls to Reach the right edge. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved member 820 to the right in the front view flows down to the lower right in the front view while interfering with a nail planted between the curved member 820 and the curved member 810. Then, it reaches the left end of the curved surface member 810. A game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 from the left side with respect to the curved surface member 810 can easily reach the right probability change prize opening 659a by rolling the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 in the right direction when viewed from the front. Can do. Therefore, in the first round of jackpot, the game ball can be made to reach the probability variation winning device 659 regardless of whether the player makes a right strike or a left strike. Therefore, in the first round of jackpot, the game ball can be fired in a favorite direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the structure of the probability variation winning device 659 will be described in more detail. FIG. 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the probability variation prize winning device 659 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probability variation winning prize device 659 is closed (a state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right probability variation winning prize opening 659a). (B) is a probability change in a state in which the open / close door 659f1 of the probability variation prize winning device 659 is switched from the closed state to the opened state (a game ball is switched from a state in which it is difficult to enter the right probability variation prize winning opening 659a to a state in which it can be entered). It is a front perspective view of winning device 659.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (a), in the state where the right probability variation winning opening 659a is closed, the probability variation winning prize device 659 is selected from the left end of the open / close door 659f1 that closes the right probability variation winning prize opening 659a and the upper surface of the curved surface member 810. The portion on the left side (left floor surface 810b) is smoothly connected with almost no step. On the other hand, a convex portion 659g1 is provided at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1 to prevent the game ball rolling from the left in front view from passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 and rolling to the right. Is provided. Since the convex portion 659g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1, the game ball rolling on the opening / closing door 659f1 from the left side of the opening / closing door 659f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 659g1. The movement stops. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), the upper surface of the open / close door 659f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction, so that the game ball whose rolling is prevented by the convex portion 659g1 is opened and closed. The upper surface of the door 659f1 flows downward in the front left direction. Then, the left floor surface 810 b rolls in the left direction when viewed from the front, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66. Note that the game ball that has flowed from the right side of the probability variation prize winning device 659 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a strong flow force due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, and therefore the opening / closing door 659f1. In the closed state, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659g1 and flow down to the direction of the out port 66. In this way, by arranging the probability variation winning device 659 to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being accumulated on the upper part of the opening / closing door 659f1 during the period when the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed, and to the out port 66. Can flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (b), in the first round of jackpot, when the right probability variation winning opening 659a is switched to a state in which it can enter the ball, the opening / closing door 659f1 that has blocked the upper side of the right probability variation winning prize opening 659a, The sliding door 659f1 is opened by sliding to the left in the front view. As shown in FIG. 128 (b), while the opening / closing door 659f1 is in the middle of opening, the game ball rolling from the right side in front view can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, but it rolls from the left side in front view. The game ball that has moved is blocked by the convex portion 659g1, making it difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 659. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, when the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b have substantially the same height (almost smoothly connected). Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left side with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability variation prize winning port 659a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow direction of the game ball that has reached the probability variation winning device 659 when the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probability variation winning device 659 is closed and opened will be described. First, FIG. 129 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the probability variation prize winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), when the opening / closing door 659f1 is fully opened, the height of the upper end of the convex portion 659g1 provided at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1 is substantially the same as the height of the left floor surface 810b. Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left in the front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can easily pass through the convex portion 659g1. In other words, it is possible to easily enter (win) a ball into the right probability variation winning opening 659a without being obstructed by the convex portion 659g1. In addition, game balls that have rolled from the right in front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 (flowed along the right floor surface 810a) may also interfere with the winning (winning) to the right probability variation winning opening 659a. Since it does not exist, it is possible to easily enter the winning (winning) into the right probability variation winning opening 659a.

  FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the probability variation prize winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 129 (b), in the state where the open / close door 659f1 is closed, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is blocked by the open / close door 659f1, so that the game ball cannot enter. In this state, the game ball that rolls from the left in the front view with respect to the probability variation prize winning device 659 is subjected to gravity that moves downward in the lower left direction due to the inclination in the upward direction that the opening / closing door 659f1 forms. , The momentum of rolling is cut off. In addition, since the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1 is provided with a convex portion 659g1 protruding upward from the other portions of the opening / closing door 659f1, the momentum of rolling in the right direction is strong, and the opening / closing door 659f1 is almost Even if the climb can be completed, the convex portion 659g1 prevents the right floor surface 810a from being reached. Therefore, it flows down in the lower left direction along the inclination of the open / close door 659f1, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right in front view with respect to the probability variation prize winning device 659 is in a state in which sufficient momentum to get over the convex portion 659g1 is added by the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659g1 and pass through the opening / closing door 659f1. Accordingly, the curved member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the out port 66.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, the opening pattern of the open / close door 659f1 (right probability change prize opening 659a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, in the first round of jackpot, the jackpot type (jackpot A11) in which the right-probable change winning opening 659a is set in a state in which a player can enter a relatively long period of time and a relatively short period of entry. A jackpot type (big hit B11) set in a possible state is provided. If the state where it is possible to enter the ball becomes longer, there are more opportunities for the game ball to enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a, so that the game state after the jackpot is advantageous (the special symbol is probable and the normal symbol is shorter). Is likely to be set to (status). Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A11 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B11 (the gaming state after the jackpot is likely to be advantageous). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification, the opening pattern of the right probability variation winning opening 659a set in the first round of jackpot A11 is referred to as a V winning opening pattern, and the right probability variation set in the first round of jackpot B11. The opening pattern of the winning opening 659a is referred to as an opening pattern in which V winning is difficult.

  FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the state of the right probability variation winning opening 659a when a V winning open pattern (open pattern set in the first round of jackpot A11) is set. . When an open pattern capable of winning a V is set, first, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, at the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right probability change winning opening 659a is switched from the closed state to the open state. Note that, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right probability variation prize opening 659a until the right probability variation prize opening 659a is fully opened. For this reason, it will be in the completely open state when 1.8 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. This fully opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and the closing operation of the right probability change prize opening 659a is started when 0.2 seconds have elapsed (that is, when 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round). . This closing operation is completed in 0.3 seconds like the opening operation (completely closing after 2.3 seconds from the start of one round). When the right probability variation winning opening 659a is completely closed, the state where the right probability variation winning prize opening 659a is closed continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (that is, when 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round), the right probability variation winning opening 659a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is fully opened for 0.3 seconds, the opened state is maintained for 0.2 seconds, and is closed for 0.3 seconds.

  After that, the state of being completely closed for 0.5 seconds and the opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right probability change prize opening 659a is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is 0.2 seconds. A series of actions that are maintained and closed for 0.3 seconds). With this repeating operation, in the V-open winning pattern, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated 6 times in the first round of the jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the final opening / closing operation is executed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment, a detouring accessory 700 is provided in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in order to increase the flow time of the game ball. . When the game ball that has been hit right passes through the detour accessory 700, the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64, the variable prize device 65, the probability variation prize device 659, etc. are arranged) The period until it reaches 7 is 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when the right hit is started in the first round of jackpot, the game ball reaches the probability variation prize winning device 659 over at least 7 seconds from the start of the round. Therefore, when a right strike is made, the game ball reaches the probability variation winning device 659 around the start of the last release period (when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round) in the V-winning release pattern. For this reason, if the player hits the right hand in the first round, there is a possibility that a game ball can be inserted into the right probability change prize opening 659a only in the last opening period among the six opening periods. is there.

  On the other hand, if left-handed in the first round of the jackpot, the area below the game board 13 (the first entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the probable winning device 659) is about 1 second to 2 seconds. The game ball reaches the specific winning opening 650a from the first opening period if the player makes a left strike immediately at the start of the first round. . In other words, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a. However, as described above, the game ball that has rolled from the left side toward the right probability change entrance port 659a is completely closed after the opening period is started (1) compared to the game ball that has rolled from the right side. Until 0.8 seconds), the period during which the player can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a is shortened. Further, when left-handed, there are more game balls that cannot reach the probability variation prize winning device 659 than when right-handed. That is, by passing through a plurality of nails planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, the game ball cannot reach the curved surface member 810 and enters the out port 66, There is a case where a ball enters the first entrance 64. Therefore, when an open pattern that allows V-winning is set, the number of game balls that can be reached while the right-probable winning opening 659a is opened is increased by left-handing in the first round. The ratio of spheres is low, and the number of wasted spheres is increased. On the other hand, when the right hit is made in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls that reach while the right probability variation winning opening 659a is opened is small, but the ratio of entering is high. It becomes. Therefore, the gameability of the first round can be varied according to the direction in which the game ball is fired, so that the player's interest in the first round of jackpot can be improved. It should be noted that the possibility of a game ball entering during one round is almost the same (for example, a ratio of about 80%) even if the player hits the right in the first round of the jackpot and makes a left strike. As described above, an opening period, a board surface configuration, and the like are set.

  FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the state of the right probability variation winning opening 659 a when an opening pattern that is difficult to win V (opening pattern set in the first round of jackpot B11) is set. is there. When an opening pattern that makes V winning difficult is set, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the right probability variation winning opening 659a is opened simultaneously with the start of the first round, and is closed immediately after it is completely opened. The Therefore, it is extremely difficult to enter a game ball into the right probability variation prize opening 659a while the right probability variation prize opening 659a is opened, regardless of whether left-handed or right-handed. The chance of a game ball entering during a round is almost 0%). For this reason, when the jackpot is won, the player can expect the jackpot type to be a jackpot A11 (a V-winning open pattern is set).

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening / closing door 659f1 during one opening period when a V winning open pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 131, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right probability variation winning opening 659a is blocked by the opening / closing door 659f1, so that a game ball is placed against the right probability variation winning prize opening 659a. It becomes impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 131 (a)). Then, at the opening start timing of the opening / closing door 659f1, the opening / closing door 659f1 slides in the left direction of the front view and is housed inside the curved surface member 810. When 0.1 second elapses from the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right probability variation winning opening 659a that is not blocked by the opening / closing door 659f1 becomes equal to or more than one gaming ball (FIG. 131). (See (b)). As a result, the game ball rolling from the right direction can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a. On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the left direction has a right-upward inclination formed by a portion of the opening / closing door 659f1 that is not housed in the curved surface member 810, and the convex portion 659g1. It is prevented that the player enters the probability variation prize opening 659a. That is, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a in the same manner as when the open / close door 659f1 is completely closed. The state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right probability change prize opening 659a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the ball continues for 0.1 second. When 0.1 second elapses (that is, when 0.2 seconds elapses from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening / closing door 659f1 is accommodated inside the curved surface 810 (the convex portions 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b). The width between the right end and the right end is less than one game ball), so that the game ball reaching the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 659g1 without passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 659f1. (See FIG. 131 (c)). Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left in front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability variation prize winning port 659a. That is, both the game ball rolling from the right direction (game ball fired by right-hand hit) and the game ball rolling from the left direction (game ball fired by left-hand hit) are both right-probing change prize opening 659a. You can enter the ball. Thereafter, until the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the game balls rolling from both directions (both the right side and the left side) can enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a.

  As shown in FIG. 131, when 0.3 second has elapsed from the start of the opening operation, the open / close door 659f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the convex portion 659g1 is exposed to the outside (open / close door). 659f1 is fully opened) (see FIG. 131 (d)). This fully opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the closing operation is started. This closing operation is performed by taking the same time (that is, 0.3 seconds) as the reverse operation of the opening operation. For this reason, during the period from when the opening operation is started until the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed again, the period during which the game ball can enter the probability variation prize winning device 659a is the start of the opening operation when the player strikes the right side. From the time when 0.1 second elapses until 0.6 seconds from when the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, when left-handed, it takes 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. In other words, the percentage of game balls that have reached the probability variation prize winning device 659 is higher when the player hits the right hand than when the player hits the left hand.

  Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, the period during which a game ball can be made to the right probability variation prize opening 659a is a game ball that has reached the probability variation prize device 659 from the right side or a game that has arrived from the left side. It is configured to vary depending on whether it is a sphere. Thereby, when a game ball reaches the probability variation winning device 659 from the right side, it can be expected to enter the right probability variation prize opening 659a more strongly. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as described above, when playing left-handed, more game balls are placed in the probable winning device 659 in the first round of jackpot than when making right-handed. It is configured to reach. Therefore, if the left hand is made in the first round of the jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right probability change entrance 659a. When a hit is made, it is easy for a game ball to enter the left probability variation winning opening 659a, but it is possible to realize a game with little chance of entering. Therefore, the game performance in the first round of jackpot can be changed depending on the direction in which the game balls are fired, so that the interest of the player in the first round can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, by providing the convex portion 659g1 at the right end of the open / close door 659f1, the period during which the game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a is changed from the right side. Although it was set as the structure made shorter than the period when the moving game ball can enter, it is not necessary to necessarily provide the convex part 659g1. Even if the convex portion 659g1 is deleted, it rolls from the left side during the opening operation of the opening / closing door 659f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 131 (b)) due to the inclination of the opening / closing door 659f1 formed in the upward direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the right probability variation winning opening 659a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a display mode in the first round of jackpot A11 (a jackpot in which a V winning winning pattern is set) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of jackpot A11. As shown in FIG. 132, when the first round of jackpot A11 is started, the characters “mode that hits with left-handed hits” on the display area HR15 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and “ The characters “I have a lot of arrivals but are hard to enter V!” And an image imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. By left-handed according to these display contents, more game balls can reach the probability variation prize winning device 659, while it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter the right probability variation prize entry port 659a (V prize winning). This makes it easier for the player to understand that it will become a game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR16, the characters “right hit with one-shot kill mode”, “the number of arrivals is low but it is easy to enter V!”, And the arrow pointing to the right are imitated. Displayed. According to these display contents, when the player hits the right hand side, the number of game balls that reach the probability variation winning device 659 is reduced, while the game ball becomes easier to enter the right probability variation prize winning opening 659a (easy to win a V). It is possible for the player to easily understand that

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, in the display area HR17 of the third symbol display device 81, an image imitating the probability variation winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed. In addition, on the front-facing front side of the right probability variation winning device 659, a state in which a decoration imitating the alphabet “V” is displayed, and on the upper left side of the display area HR17, “Aim for V”. A display area HR20 on which characters “!” Are displayed is displayed. With these display contents, a game ball is inserted into the probability variation prize winning device 659 decorated with the letter “V” to give an advantageous result to the player (special after the jackpot is over) It is possible to make the player easily understand that the symbol is in a probable state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR17, arrows pointing in the direction of the probability variation winning device 659 on the left side and the upper right side in front view with respect to the image imitating the probability variation winning device 659, respectively. An image is displayed. The arrow image displayed on the left side of the front view with respect to the image simulating the probability variation prize winning device 659 is marked with the letters “slashed” and the arrow image displayed on the upper right side of the front view. Is marked with the word “One-shot Special”. With these display contents, when the player has left-handed according to the display contents of the display area HR15 (the mode that hits several hits is selected), the game ball is viewed from the left in front view with respect to the right probability change winning device 659. It is possible to make the player easily understand that it is rolling. In addition, when the player makes a right stroke according to the display contents of the display area HR16 (selects the one-shot kill mode), the game ball rolls from the upper right direction in the front view with respect to the right probability change winning device 659. This makes it easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily understand whether or not it is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a when attention is paid to which direction.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the bonus (prize ball) is given to the player when the game ball enters during the jackpot game (in the special game state). Two types of winning devices, a variable winning device 65 and a right probability changing winning device 659, are provided. The right probability variation winning opening 659a of the right probability variation prize winning device 659 is set to an open state in which the ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and the game ball enters during the jackpot. The probability change state of the symbol is given. Therefore, whether or not the game state after the jackpot is advantageous to the player depends on whether or not the game ball enters the right probability variation prize opening 659a. The game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters.

  The right probability variation entrance 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both in the case of making a left strike and in the case of making a right strike. While the number of game balls reaching the right probability variation winning device 659 increases while 659a can enter the ball, the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right probability variation prize opening 659a is reduced. . On the other hand, if the player continues to make a right turn in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right probability variation winning device 659 decreases while the right probability variation winning opening 659a is ready to enter, but the game that has reached The rate at which the ball enters the right probability variation entrance 659a is configured to be high. That is, the number of game balls that reach the right probability variation winning device 659 during a predetermined period (the period until the opening pattern of one round is completed) (the number of opportunities for winning to the right probability variation winning opening 659a) ( The element) is configured such that left-handed is more advantageous than right-handed. In addition, the surface (element) of the ease of entering (the rate of entering the ball) into the right probability variation winning device 659 is configured such that the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed. As a result, the gameability in the first round of jackpot can be made different according to the launch direction of the game ball, so that the gameability of each player (the probability of entering the right probability change prize opening 659a is low). Instead, it is possible to select a game property that increases the number of game balls to be reached, or a game property that increases the entrance rate instead of having a smaller number of game balls to be reached. Therefore, since the game nature suitable for more players' preferences is realizable, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the player hits the right hand in the predetermined period (first round) of the jackpot, it is advantageous in terms of the entrance rate compared to the case of making the left hand (right) The game ball that has reached the probability variation prize winning device 659 is easy to enter the right probability variation prize winning opening 659a). The configuration is advantageous (more game balls can easily reach the right probability variation winning device 659). Thus, the player determines whether to make a right strike or left strike by adopting a configuration in which the advantageous and unfavorable aspects are different between the case of making a right strike and the case of making a left strike. However, the difference in superiority between right-handed and left-handed is not limited to this. For example, when a left-hand strike is made, a game ball is easy to enter (it is difficult to enter if a right-hand strike is made). If there is a lot of prize balls to be awarded (for example, 15 per entry), a special prize opening is provided and a game ball is easy to enter when making a right strike (it is difficult to enter if left strike is made) The specific winning opening may be provided at a position where the opening time is long (for example, a maximum of 5 seconds) but the number of awarded balls is small (for example, three per time). And it is good also as a structure which switches the specific prize opening opened alternately for every round, and makes the interval between rounds extremely short (for example, set to 0.1 second). By configuring in this way, if the player makes a left-hand hit during a big hit, the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening tends to decrease, but is given when the player enters the specific winning opening. It is possible to achieve a game with more prize balls. On the other hand, if you continue to make a right hit during a big hit, more game balls are likely to enter the specific prize opening, but less prize balls are awarded when entering the specific prize opening. Can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game by selecting a favorite game characteristic. Further, for example, a variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where a game ball is easy to enter when left-handed (it is difficult to enter when right-handed), and a game ball enters when right-handed. The right probability variation winning device 659 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit a ball (it is difficult to enter if left-handed), and the variable winning device 65 is opened during the period when the right probability variation winning device 659 is opened at one big hit. You may comprise so that it may become shorter than a period to be. That is, if the player hits the right hand at the jackpot of 1, the ball is likely to enter the right probability variation prize opening 659a and the probability variation state is given after the jackpot, while the number of prize balls obtained is reduced. If the player keeps making a left turn, a large number of game balls can be obtained by entering a large number of game balls into the specific winning opening 65a, but it becomes difficult to enter the right winning change winning opening 659a. The game state after the big hit may be disadvantageous. Even when configured in this way, the superiority can be made different for each firing direction during the jackpot, so the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, in this case, the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device in which only the winning ball is given to the winning ball) and the right probability changing winning device 659 (in which the winning ball is given to the winning ball and the probability changing state). The positional relationship with the variable winning device) may be reversed. Further, the setting of a surface (element) that is more advantageous to the right hand and a surface (element) that is more advantageous to the left hand is not limited to the first round of jackpot. For example, in a normal game, a configuration may be provided in which an element that is more advantageous to the left than the right strike and an element that is more advantageous to the right than the left strike are provided. More specifically, for example, it is configured to provide a left entrance where a game ball launched by a left strike can enter and a right entrance where a game ball launched by a right strike can enter, A special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters one of the entrances. And in the short-time state of normal symbols, playing right-handed and aiming for the right entrance will be advantageous in terms of gaming efficiency over left-handed, while if left-handed, it will be in terms of gaming efficiency Although it is disadvantageous than right-handed, if you win a jackpot, you can easily select a jackpot type (type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state) that is more advantageous than right-handed Good.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when a right hit is made in a predetermined period (the first round) of the big hit, the game ball that has reached the right probability change winning device 659 is changed to the right probability compared to the case of making a left strike. While it is configured such that it is easy to enter the winning opening 659a, when left-handed, more game balls can easily reach the right probability changing prize-winning device 659 as compared to the case of right-handed. Was configured. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like that can detect the firing direction of the game ball in the first round of jackpot. And it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation corresponding according to the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when left-handed is detected, the display mode HR15 is turned on and the display mode HR16 is turned off as the first round display mode (see FIG. 132). Thus, when a right strike is detected, the display area HR16 may be turned on and the display area HR15 may be turned off so that the appearance is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more easily understand the game nature selected by the player.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the opening / closing door 659f1 of the right probability variation winning device 659 is configured to be opened by sliding leftward when viewed from the front, so that the game has rolled from the right side with respect to the right probability variation winning device 659. The ball is configured so that the period during which the ball can enter is longer than the game ball rolling from the left side, but the shape and operation content of the opening / closing door 659f1 are not limited thereto. For example, the opening / closing door 659f1 may be configured to open from the front side toward the back side. Further, the length of the opening / closing door 659f1 on the right front side in front view may be configured to be one game ball or more shorter than the length on the left front side in front view. That is, when the opening / closing door 659f1 is housed in the rear side when viewed from the front, the right side of the opening / closing door 659f1 can enter the game ball earlier than the left side, and the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed. When the opening / closing door 659f1 projects frontward and forward, the left side of the opening / closing door 659f1 may be configured so that a game ball cannot enter the ball earlier. Even in such a configuration, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, the game ball rolling from the right side with respect to the right probability variation winning device 659 enters more than the game ball rolling from the left side. The possible period can be configured to be long.

  According to the eleventh embodiment, a surface that is physically more advantageous to the left than the right strike according to the board surface configuration (that is, a game ball that has reached the right probability variation winning device 659 enters the right probability variation prize opening 659a. Ratio) and a surface that is more advantageous to the right than to the left (that is, the number of game balls that can reach the right probability change winning device 659 in one round). It is not limited. For example, the control may be realized. More specifically, for example, the right probability change prize opening 659a is provided at a position where the reaching ratio of the game balls is the same regardless of whether the player strikes right or left. And in the first round of jackpot, it is configured so that it can be detected whether the player has made a right strike or left strike, and when it is detected that the player has made a right strike, it is detected that a left strike has been made. The open pattern may be different depending on the case. That is, when a right-handed hit is detected, the number of times of opening of the right probability variation winning opening 659a is small. In this case, the right probability variation winning opening 659a may be opened with a relatively short opening pattern while the right probability variation winning opening 659a is opened relatively frequently. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which makes a player select jackpot gameability by operating operation means, such as a button, instead of the launch direction of a game ball.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set for one variation display. However, it is not always necessary to keep the continuous transformation effect within the variation time of one variation display. A continuous transformation effect may be executed over time. That is, when there are a plurality of holding balls at the start of the change, whether or not to set a continuous transformation effect based on the look-ahead result of each holding ball (whether each holding ball is successful, the variation type, etc.), and When it determines with setting a continuous transformation effect, it is good also as a structure which determines whether a continuous transformation effect is continued until the fluctuation display corresponding to which holding ball. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which calculates the production time of a continuous transformation effect from the prefetch result of each holding ball, and sets the upper limit frequency | count of transformation according to the said production time. By comprising in this way, since the production time of a continuous transformation effect can be lengthened, the upper limit frequency | count of a success alerting | reporting aspect can be increased. Therefore, since the player can be given more opportunities to display the success notification mode, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved when the continuous transformation effect is executed. In addition, it is configured such that the success of transformation (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) continues is more difficult to predict to the player by adopting a configuration in which the continuous transformation effect is continued over a plurality of variation displays. be able to. Therefore, an unexpected production can be provided.

  In addition, in the case of continuing the continuous transformation effect over a plurality of variation display variation times, the progress status of the continuous transformation effect (success notification mode display count, remaining variation count, reserved ball variation time, etc.) Accordingly, the number of fluctuations until the continuous transformation effect ends, the upper limit number of success notification modes, and the like may be increased or decreased. For this, at the start of the change, a continuous transformation effect is executed over the display period of the change display for three times including the change (for the change + two holding balls), and the jackpot is notified by the third change display. Then, the case where it discriminate | determines is demonstrated more concretely for an example. For example, when the player presses the frame button 22 almost without any interval from the start of the operation effective period, most of the operation effective period is shortened, and the upper limit number of success notification modes are displayed during the second variable display. In the case where it has been completed, the continuous transformation effect may be completed in the second variation display. And in the 3rd fluctuation display which should have continued the continuous transformation effect originally, it is good also as a structure which performs an effect completely different from a continuous transformation effect. In addition, when the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect ends immediately after the start of the third variation display, for example, by increasing the upper limit number of transformations, the presentation time of the third variation display is left. It is good also as a structure which prevents that. In this way, the production mode can be more diversified by changing the production mode flexibly according to the progress of the continuous transformation production.

  In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set as the effect during the execution of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a continuous transformation effect during execution of jackpot (for example, 1-5 rounds). In this case, for example, whether the same regular symbol (the main symbol imitating an even number) is stopped and displayed is the big hit (that is, the big hit A or the big hit B). In the case where it is difficult to identify, it may be configured to execute. Further, as the number of times of transformation in the continuous transformation effect (the number of times of display of the success notification mode) is larger, for example, the expectation level after the end of the jackpot is in a certain change state (this jackpot is the jackpot A) may be increased. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from being simply an operation for obtaining a promotion, and it is possible to more enjoy the game during the jackpot.

  In this case, instead of pressing the frame button 22, the condition for terminating each operation valid period may be, for example, entering a predetermined number of game balls into the specific winning opening 65a. If comprised in this way, in order to acquire a prize ball during a jackpot, it can participate in a continuous transformation production only by launching a game ball to the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the description has been made on the assumption that the effect of whether or not the character 811 is transformed is executed one or more times. However, the technical idea described in each of the above embodiments is directed to the continuous transformation effect. It is not limited to the application of. For example, it may be configured to apply to an effect (single effect) in which one of two types of results (success, failure, victory, defeat, finalization, failure, etc.) is notified in a single shot. That is, it is good also as a structure which changes the display method after that, the selection method of an effect period, etc. according to whether the press with respect to the frame button 22 was detected during the operation effective period set in the single effect. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode, the method for selecting the production period, etc., depending on whether or not a press is detected. In part or all of the operation effective period, the same notification mode (when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period and when the operation effective period ends without detecting the pressing ( For example, the success notification mode may be displayed at the same timing (for example, the end timing of the operation valid period). That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed, only the point of notifying that the press has been detected is different, and the notification mode determination timing and the display timing may be common. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it is not always necessary to notify that the pressing has been detected. Furthermore, it is not always necessary to provide the frame button 22 that can be operated (pressed) by the player.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is configured to be executed as one type of the entertainment effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol variation display, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be executed as one type of interest production during the jackpot execution, may be executed as one type of so-called holding notice effect, or may be executed during the so-called demonstration effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the production time for the transition effect is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol coincide with each other. However, it is necessary to completely match the end timing. There may be a degree of freedom. Specifically, for example, an effect time such as a transition effect such that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variation display of the third symbol are within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). It is good also as a structure which sets. By configuring in this way, the calculation of the production time such as the transition effect can be made out, so that the processing addition required for the calculation can be reduced.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group> (The total effective period is made longer than the production period)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode in an effect period; an upper limit number setting unit for setting an upper limit number of the specific display mode to be displayed in the one specific effect; The first condition is established in the specific period setting means for setting the specific period and the specific period set by the specific period setting means based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition in the effect period The first mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the second condition, and the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied in the specific period. And a second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode, wherein the specific period setting unit is configured such that the specific display mode is the front in one production period. When the display is performed only by the first mode display means, the specific period of the length that the effect period ends is set before the specific display mode of the upper limit number is displayed. A feature of the gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit number of specific display modes to be displayed in one specific effect is set by the upper limit number setting means. The specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the establishment of a preset condition in the effect period, and the first condition is established in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. Then, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. On the other hand, the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied in the specific period. In a single production period, when a specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means, a specific period having a length that the production period ends before the upper limit number of specific display modes is displayed. It is set by the specific period setting means.

  Thus, if the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means in one production period, the specific production period ends before the upper limit number of specific display modes is displayed. Therefore, a game can be performed in the hope that a specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether or not the second condition is satisfied during the specific period, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, the first mode display means displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific period, and the second mode display means displays the specific period during the specific period. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the specific display mode is displayed after the specific period ends based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means on the basis of the fact that the specific period has elapsed, while the second period is displayed during the specific period. Since the specific period is ended and the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the satisfaction of the condition, the specific display mode is displayed earlier as the second condition is satisfied. And the specific period can be terminated early. Therefore, the earlier the timing at which the second condition is satisfied, the easier it is to increase the number of display times of a specific display mode in one production period, so for a player who wants to display more specific display modes, There is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the second condition is satisfied early.

  The gaming machine A1 or A2 includes operation means that can be operated by a player, and the second mode display means is configured to detect the specific operation based on detecting a predetermined number of operations on the operation means in one specific period. The game machine A3 is characterized in that the display mode is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the second mode display means is based on the fact that a predetermined number of operations on the operating means operable by the player in one specific period are detected. Since the specific display mode is displayed, the player who desires to display more specific display modes can be made to actively operate the operation means during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the specific performance can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period setting means is capable of setting the specific period based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. The period and the display period of a specific display mode are repeated. Therefore, since the number of display times of a specific display mode can be increased as the specific period ends earlier, for a player who wants to display more specific display modes, the specific period is When set, there is an effect that a game can be performed in anticipation that the second condition is satisfied earlier.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means A bonus game executing means for executing the game, wherein the upper limit number setting means sets the upper limit to one number among a plurality of times including at least a first number and a second number different from the first number. The first number is set to be higher by the upper limit number setting unit than the second number when the first determination results in the specific determination result by the determination unit. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. Based on the determination result obtained by the determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. Of the plurality of times including at least the first number and a second number different from the first number, one is set as the upper limit number by the upper limit number setting means. The first number is configured such that the ratio set by the upper limit number setting unit is higher than the second number when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination unit.

  Thereby, when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, the setting ratio of the first number is increased as the upper limit number of times, so that the player can guess the determination result by the determination means from the upper limit number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who desires to know the upper limit number of times can be made to play a game during a specific effect with a strong expectation that the second condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine A5, the first number of times is a number of times greater than the second number of times.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A5, since the first number is more than the second number, it is expected that at least a specific display mode more than the second number is displayed. Thus, the player can play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be expected that the second condition is satisfied more times.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information, and the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, and the specific effect executing means is configured to execute the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed during the game.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are produced. In other words, the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing unit while the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored during the period from the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information to the end.

  In the gaming machine A7, after the end of the specific effect, the second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the specific effect, and the effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means, A gaming machine A8, comprising: second presentation time determining means for determining based on the remaining dynamic display time.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, after the specific effect is ended, the second effect different from the specific effect is executed by the second effect executing means. The effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is determined by the second effect time determining means based on the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even if the specific effect is completed, the second effect can be executed with the remaining dynamic display time, so that the player can wait until the dynamic display of the identification information ends after the specific effect ends. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the boring.

<Characteristic B group> (Control in which the period until transformation becomes longer as the number of times of button PUSH is reduced during 1 transformation production)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period; and at least during the previous display of the predetermined effect mode in the one effect period Condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied, and display time setting means for determining and setting a display time of the predetermined effect mode based on a determination result by the condition determining means, and the display The time setting means has a higher ratio of setting a long display time when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied than when the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in which the predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period. In one effect period, it is determined by the condition determining means whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at least during the display of the previous predetermined effect aspect, and based on the determination result by the condition determining means, The display time is determined and set by the display time setting means. The ratio that the display time setting unit sets a long display time is higher when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied than when the condition determination unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied.

  As a result, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the display time of the predetermined effect mode tends to be long, so the number of times of the predetermined effect mode executed in one effect period is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to expect that a player who wants to display a predetermined number of times of the predetermined effect mode is expected to satisfy the specific condition every time the predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine B1 includes operation means that can be operated by a player, and the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operation means is detected. Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is established by the player operating the operating means, so the display time of the predetermined effect mode is shortened. The player who wants to do so can be made to actively operate the operation means each time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be actively participated in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the condition determining means determines the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied in one effect period, and the display period setting means includes: The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the larger the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the ratio of setting a longer display time.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition discriminating means discriminates the continuous number of predetermined rendering modes in which the specific condition is not satisfied in one rendering period. The greater the number of consecutive times discriminated by the condition discriminating means, the higher the ratio that the long display time is set by the display period setting means.

  Thereby, the longer the predetermined display mode in which the specific condition is not established, the easier it is to set a longer display time, so the number of predetermined display modes that can be displayed in one display period is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who wants to display more predetermined presentation modes to play a game with the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied each time the predetermined presentation mode is displayed. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming machine B4 is provided with an upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times of displaying the predetermined effect mode in the one effect period.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined effect mode is displayed in one effect period is set by the upper limit number setting means. It can be made to want to display many production | presentation aspects within the range. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, based on the determination of the display time by the display time setting means, the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold value. The display time determined by the display time setting means is set based on an end determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined effect mode is ended after the threshold by the end determination means. A gaming machine B5 comprising an avoiding means for avoiding the above.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. Based on the determination of the display time by the display time setting means, it is determined by the period determination means whether the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold, and the end determination means Thus, the avoidance means avoids setting the display time determined by the display time setting means based on the determination that the predetermined effect mode ends after the threshold value.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the malfunction that the production time of a specific production becomes too long can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, a setting determination for determining whether to set the display time having a length shorter than the display time where the setting is avoided A gaming machine B6 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, the display time is set to be shorter than the display time that is avoided to be set. Since it is determined by the setting determining means, there is an effect that more predetermined effect modes can be displayed within a range in which the effect time of the specific effect does not become too long.

  In the gaming machine B6, the display time setting means sets the shortest display time that can be set based on the fact that the setting determination means determines that the short display time is set. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, the shortest length that can be set by the display time setting means based on the fact that the setting determination means sets that a short display time is set. Since the display time is set, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the production time of the specific effect from becoming too long.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the game includes an end determination unit that determines whether or not to end the specific effect when the avoidance unit avoids the setting of the display time. Machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, when the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, the end determining means determines whether to end the specific effect. Therefore, when the display time exceeding the predetermined threshold is determined, the end determination means may determine the end of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that a display time as short as possible is set.

<Characteristic C group> (Control that makes the transformation success rate higher when the button PUSH is performed than when the effective period has passed without the PUSH)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, a determination period number determining means for determining a set number of times for determination in order to execute a predetermined determination in an effect period of the one specific effect, and one of the specific effects In the effect period, whether or not a predetermined condition set in advance during the determination period is established as the determination period setting means for setting the determination period of the number of times determined by the determination period number determination means A condition discriminating means for discriminating, a first mode display discriminating unit for discriminating whether or not to display a specific display mode based on the fact that the specific discriminating condition is established by the condition discriminating unit, and the condition discriminating Second mode display determination for determining whether to display the specific display mode based on the fact that the determination period has passed without being determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the means And a ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the first mode display determination unit is higher than a ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second mode display determination unit A gaming machine C1 comprising a ratio setting means for setting a ratio.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. In the production period of one specific effect, the number of times of determination period setting for determining the number of determination periods for executing predetermined determination is determined by the determination period number determination means. In the effect period of one specific effect, the number of determination periods determined by the determination period number determination means is set by the determination period setting means. As the predetermined determination, it is determined by the condition determination means whether a predetermined condition predetermined during the determination period is satisfied, and the specific display is performed based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determination means. Whether to display the mode is determined by the first mode display determining unit. Based on the fact that the determination period has passed without being determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means, the second aspect display determining means determines whether to display the specific display mode. The ratio set by the ratio setting means is set to a ratio higher than the ratio determined when the second display display determining means displays the specific display form as the ratio determined when the first display display determining means displays the specific display form. Is done.

  Thus, the specific display mode is displayed at a higher rate when the specific condition is satisfied during the determination period. Therefore, a player who wants to display a specific display mode can be played with the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied. Moreover, when a specific condition is satisfied, it can be expected more strongly that a specific display mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during execution of the specific effect.

  The gaming machine C1 is provided with operation means operable by a player, and the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operation means is detected. A gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, when the operation on the operating means that can be operated by the player is detected, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means. By operating the operating means during the period, the rate at which a specific display mode is displayed can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation means can be actively operated by the player.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result Game execution means, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on the determination by the determination means, the ratio setting means, It is executed based on the result of the specific determination rather than during execution of the specific effect performed based on the determination result by the determination means being different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that a higher ratio is determined when the specific display mode is displayed when the specific effect is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. Discrimination is executed by the discriminating unit based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game executing unit based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discriminating unit is a specific discrimination result. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the determination made by the determining means. The specific effect executed on the basis of the specific determination result rather than the execution of the specific effect executed on the basis of the determination result by the determination means being different from the specific determination result. The ratio that is discriminated when the specific display mode is displayed by the ratio setting means is set to be higher during execution.

  As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained, a specific display mode is easily displayed. Therefore, when a specific display mode is displayed, a sense of expectation that a privilege game is executed for a player. There is an effect that can be held.

  In the gaming machine C3, the ratio setting unit displays the specific display mode by the first mode determination unit during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the specific determination. A first ratio is set as the ratio to be determined, and the specific display mode is set by the second mode display determination means during execution of the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result. A second ratio that is lower than the first ratio is set as a ratio that is discriminated when displayed, and the first aspect is executed during the execution of the specific effect that is executed based on the result of the discrepancy discrimination. A third ratio lower than the first ratio is set as a ratio determined when the specific display mode is displayed by the display determining means, and the specific is executed based on the result of the determination of detachment A fourth rate lower than the second rate is set as a rate to be determined when the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display determining unit during execution of The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the difference between the ratio and the third ratio is larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. In other words, during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the specific determination, the ratio setting unit determines the first display by the ratio setting unit as the ratio determined by the first mode determination unit to display the specific display mode. A percentage is set. During execution of the specific effect executed based on the fact that the specific determination result has been obtained, the second mode display determination unit determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed, which is lower than the first rate. The ratio of 2 is set by the ratio setting means. A third ratio lower than the first ratio is determined as a ratio that is determined by the first aspect display determination means to display the specific display aspect during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the determination of detachment. Is set by the ratio setting means. A fourth rate lower than the second rate is determined as the rate determined when the second mode display determining unit displays the specific display mode during the execution of the specific effect performed based on the result of the determination of detachment. Is set by the ratio setting means. The difference between the first ratio and the third ratio is set larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

  Thus, the degree of expectation of the privilege game is determined when the first mode display determining unit determines that the specific display mode is displayed, rather than when the second mode determining unit determines that the specific display mode is displayed. If it is high, the player can recognize it. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in the hope that the specific display mode is displayed after the specific condition is established during the determination period.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the determination period number determination means is executed based on the specific determination result, rather than the specific effect executed based on the outage determination result. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the specific effect makes it easier to set a larger number of times as the number of times of the determination period.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, it was executed on the basis of the specific discrimination result rather than the specific effect executed on the basis of the fact that the discrepancy discrimination result was obtained. The specific effect is more likely to be set by the determination period number determination means, so that the greater the number of determination periods, the higher the player's expectation for the bonus game.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific effect is based on the fact that the specific display mode is determined not to be displayed by either the first mode display determination unit or the second mode display determination unit. A gaming machine C6, comprising a specific effect ending means for ending the game.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, it is determined that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first mode display determination unit or the second mode display determination unit. Based on this, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect end means, so that a player who wants to enjoy the specific effect for a longer time can be more strongly expected to display the specific display mode. . Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that the specific condition is satisfied during the determination period.

  In the gaming machine C6, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute dynamic display of the identification information, and movement of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. Dynamic display time setting means for setting the dynamic display time of the target display, and the specific effect execution means is within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. The remaining dynamics are executed based on the fact that the specific display mode is determined not to be displayed by either the first mode display determination unit or the second mode display determination unit. Based on the remaining time determining means for determining the display time and the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, the processing is executed after the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means. Gaming machine C7, characterized in that it comprises a presentation time determining means for determining an effect time of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display execution unit executes dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit is set by the dynamic display time setting unit. . The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. The remaining dynamic display time is discriminated by the remaining time discriminating means based on the fact that either the first mode display discriminating means or the second mode display discriminating means discriminates that the specific display mode is not displayed. Based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, the effect time determining means determines the effect time of the effect to be executed after the specific effect is ended by the specific effect ending means.

  Thereby, in the dynamic display of one identification information, there exists an effect that a production | presentation can be suitably performed with the remaining dynamic display time after the completion of a specific production | presentation irrespective of the end timing of a specific production | presentation.

  In the gaming machine C7, the effect time determining means determines one effect time within a range in which the end timing of the effect does not exceed the dynamic display time from a plurality of different effect times specified in advance. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C7, the effect time determining means can perform the effect within a range in which the effect end timing does not exceed the dynamic display time among a plurality of different effect times defined in advance. Since the effect time of 1 is determined, there is an effect that the processing load when determining the effect time can be reduced.

<Characteristic D group> (Variation of whether or not transformation is possible and the production mode after the transformation effect are changed according to the remaining variation time and the number of transformations at the time of the button PUSH)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect composed of at least a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period and a second effect executed after the end of the first effect. And an upper limit number setting means for setting an upper limit number of the specific display mode to be displayed in one first effect, and a specific determination period for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, A determination period setting unit that is set one or more times during execution, a first mode display unit that displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific determination period, and the specific determination period Based on the establishment of the specific condition, a second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode after ending the specific determination period, and the specific display displayed during the execution of the first effect Aspect Based on at least one of the aspect number of times counting means for counting the number of display times and the number of display times counted by the aspect number counting means during the execution of the first effect, and the remaining effect period. A gaming machine D1 comprising a production time determining means for determining a production time of 2 productions.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in one production period, a specific production comprising at least a first production in which a specific production mode is displayed at least once and a second production executed after the end of the first production. Is executed by the specific effect execution means. The upper limit number of specific display modes displayed in one first effect is set by the upper limit number setting means. The specific determination period for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set one or more times during execution of the first effect by the determination period setting means. Based on the elapse of the specific determination period, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition during the specific determination period, the specific determination period is ended by the second mode display means, and the specific display mode is displayed. The number of display times of the specific display mode displayed during the execution of one first effect is counted by the mode display frequency counting means. During the execution of the first effect, the effect time determining unit determines the effect time of the second effect based on at least one of the display count counted by the mode number counting unit and the remaining effect period.

  Thereby, since the production time of the second production varies according to the situation of the first production, there is an effect that the variation of the specific production can be diversified.

  The gaming machine D1 includes an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and the determination period setting unit sets a period during which an operation on the operation unit is valid as the specific determination period, and the specific condition is The gaming machine D2 is established when an operation on the operation means is detected.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the specific determination period, a period during which the operation on the operation unit is validated is set by the determination period setting unit. The specific condition is established when an operation on the operation means is detected.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to positively operate the operation means for a player who desires to display the second effect having a longer effect time.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to perform dynamic display of the identification information, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means Dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of, the specific effect execution means within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means, The specific effect is executed, and the effect time determining means is configured to perform the second effect based on at least one of the display count counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time. A gaming machine D3, which determines a production mode.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. . The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. An effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect time determining means based on at least one of the display count counted by the aspect count counting means and the remaining dynamic display time.

  Thereby, since the specific effect can be executed within the range of the dynamic display time during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the interest of the player during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the effect time determining means may determine, from the plurality of different effect times defined as the effect times of the second effect, before the end of the effect period of the specific effect. A gaming machine D4 that determines the longest production time in a range where the second production ends.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the effect period of the specific effect is ended from a plurality of different effect times defined as the effect time of the second effect. Since the effect time determining unit determines the effect time having the longest range in which the second effect ends before, the effect time of the second effect can be made longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the specific effect is configured to include a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect, and is determined by the effect time determining means. The gaming machine D5 is characterized by comprising third effect time determining means for determining the effect time of the third effect based on at least one of the effect time and the remaining effect period.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, the third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect is included in the specific effect. The third effect time determining means determines the effect time of the third effect based on at least one of the effect time determined by the effect time determining means and the remaining effect period.

  Accordingly, since the third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be executed while the specific effect is being executed, there is an effect that the effect mode during the execution of the specific effect can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is finished and before the second effect is started, and the third effect time determining means is the first effect. The effect time of the third effect is determined based on the difference between the remaining effect period at the time when one effect is finished and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means. A gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is finished and before the second effect is started. The third effect time determining means determines the effect time of the third effect based on the difference between the remaining effect period when the first effect ends and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a 1st effect, a 2nd effect, and a 3rd effect can be performed according to the production period of a specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine D7 is provided with a rendering mode determining unit that determines a rendering mode of the second rendering based on the display count counted by the mode count counting unit. .

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect mode determining unit based on the display count counted by the mode number counting unit. Therefore, the player can have an impression that the first effect and the second effect are related to each other. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the specific effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D7, based on the storage mode in which execution information used for executing the second effect is stored for each effect mode of the second effect and the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining unit. Of the execution information selected by the selection means based on the presentation time determined by the selection means for selecting the corresponding execution information from the storage means and the presentation time determination means, Specifying means for specifying a range to be used for the execution of the effect, and comprising a second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the execution information in the range specified by the specifying means. A gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the execution information used for executing the second effect is stored in the storage unit for each effect mode of the second effect. Based on the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, the corresponding execution information is selected from the storage means by the selection means. Based on the effect time determined by the effect time determining means, the range used for execution of the current second effect is specified by the specifying means among the execution information selected by the selecting means. Based on the execution information within the range specified by the specifying means, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means.

  Thereby, since a plurality of second effects having different production times can be executed from the respective execution information, the execution information is stored as compared with the case where the execution information is stored individually for each production time. There is an effect that the storage area required for storage can be reduced.

<Characteristic E group> (The suggestion of the degree of expectation varies depending on the tendency of the button PUSH)
Based on the fact that a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times in one effect period and a predetermined display condition is established during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. An effect mode determining means for determining one effect mode from a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode, and an effect mode setting for setting display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means At least one production mode that is determined by the production mode determination unit according to a determination result of the unit, a specific determination unit that performs specific determination in the one production period, and a determination result by the specific determination unit A gaming machine E1 comprising: a determination ratio variable means that is variable when determining the predetermined performance mode.

  According to the gaming machine E1, a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times in one effect period is executed by the specific effect executing means. Based on the fact that the predetermined display condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means, one effect mode is determined by the effect mode determination means from among a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode. The The display of the production mode determined by the production mode determination unit is set by the production mode setting unit. A specific determination is performed by the specific determination unit in one production period, and the production mode having a high ratio determined by the production mode determination unit according to the determination result by the specific determination unit is at least one predetermined production mode. When determining, it is varied by the decision rate varying means.

  Thereby, different rendering modes are easily determined according to the determination result by the specific determination means, so that the impression of the specific effect can be varied according to the specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is not easily bored by the player.

  The gaming machine E1 includes condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed, and the specific determining means includes 1 as the specific determination. The determination result by the condition determining means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in the effect period is determined, and the determination ratio variable means is the specific determination means in one effect period. With respect to the predetermined effect mode set by the effect mode setting means after the predetermined effect mode that is the subject of discrimination, the effect mode having a high ratio determined by the effect mode determining means is varied. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the condition determination means whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while a predetermined effect mode is displayed. As the specific determination, the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period is determined by the specific determination means. An effect mode in which the ratio determined by the effect mode determining unit is high for a predetermined effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit after the predetermined effect mode determined by the identification determining unit in one effect period. Is varied by the decision rate varying means.

  As a result, while a predetermined performance mode to be discriminated by the specific discriminating means is displayed, the game can be played while paying attention to the discriminating situation by the specific discriminating means, while a predetermined set after that. In the production mode, the game can be played by paying attention to which production mode is displayed. Therefore, since the point to be noted can be varied according to the timing at which the predetermined effect mode is set, there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the specific effect can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the specific determination unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determination unit among at least one predetermined presentation mode set in one production period as the specific determination. The gaming machine E3 is characterized by determining the number of times of the predetermined production mode.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, as a specific determination, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determination means among at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period. Since the number of the predetermined effect modes that have been performed is determined by the specific determining means, the effect modes that are easily set can be varied according to the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed paying attention to the number of times that the specific condition is established.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and the specific condition is established when an operation on the operating means is detected while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a specific condition is established when an operation on the operating means is detected while a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Depending on whether or not the user operates the operating means, the effect mode can be varied. Therefore, since the effect mode can be changed by the player's selection, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is less tired.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition and a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means A special game executing means for executing the specific effect based on the fact that the determination by the determining means has been executed, and When the determination result by the specific determination means becomes the first determination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, it is displayed at a predetermined specific number of times. When determining the predetermined performance mode, the ratio of determining the first mode is varied so as to be higher than other performance modes, and the determination result by the specific determination means is the first determination result. If the specific effect executed based on the second determination result and the specific determination result is being executed, the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times is determined. When changing, the ratio for determining the second mode different from the first mode is varied so as to be higher than other production modes, the determination result by the specific determination means becomes the first determination result, and the When the specific effect performed based on the fact that the determination result is different from the specific determination result is being executed, when determining the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times, Based on the fact that the ratio for determining the second mode is varied so as to be higher than the other performance modes, and the determination result by the specific determination means is the second determination result and the outlier determination result. Executed When the specific effect is being executed, when the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times is determined, the ratio for determining the first mode is varied so as to be higher than other effect modes. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination means is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the determination made by the determining means. When the specific discrimination means is the first determination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, a predetermined display that is displayed at a predetermined specific number of times. When determining the production mode, the determination ratio variable means varies the ratio for determining the first mode to be higher than the other production modes. When the determination result by the specific determination means is the second determination result different from the first determination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, the specific number of times When the predetermined effect mode displayed on the screen is determined, it is varied by the determination ratio variable means so that the rate of determining the stand 2 mode different from the first mode is higher than the other effect modes. Displayed at a specific number of times when the specific effect performed based on the determination result by the specific determination means being the first determination result and the determination result being different from the specific determination result is being executed When the predetermined effect mode is determined, it is varied by the determination ratio variable means so that the ratio for determining the second mode is higher than the other effect modes. In the case where the specific effect executed based on the determination result by the specific determination means being the second determination result and the determination result of being out is being executed, the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times is displayed. At the time of determination, it is varied by the determination ratio variable means so that the ratio for determining the first mode is higher than that for other production modes.

  Thereby, the player can be made to guess the expectation degree to be a privilege game according to the determination result by the specific determination means and the predetermined number of specific production modes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine E1 includes condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed, and the specific determining means The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the determination is executed based on a determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one of the specific effects executed before the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the condition determination means whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while a predetermined effect mode is displayed. As the specific determination, the determination is performed by the specific determination unit based on the determination result by the condition determination unit executed in at least one specific effect executed before the current specific effect.

  Thereby, since the effect mode in the current specific effect varies depending on the determination result of the condition determination means in the specific effect executed before, there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine E6, the specific determination means includes the number of the predetermined effect modes displayed in at least one of the specific effects executed before the current specific effect, and the specific condition by the condition determination means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the determination is executed based on the number of the predetermined production modes determined to be established.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, the number of predetermined presentation modes displayed in at least one specific presentation executed before the current specific presentation and the specific condition by the condition determination means Since the determination is performed by the specific determination unit based on the number of predetermined production modes determined to be established, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of predetermined production modes in which the specific condition is established. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine E7, an identification means for identifying a player who is playing a game is provided, and the specific discrimination means is displayed while the same player is identified as being identified by the identification means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the determination is performed based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode and the number of times of the predetermined effect mode determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means. .

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the following effects are produced. That is, the player who is playing a game is identified by the identifying means. The number of predetermined performance modes displayed while the same player is identified as playing the game, and the number of predetermined performance modes determined by the condition determination unit that the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the above, discrimination is performed by the specific discrimination means.

  Thereby, according to the game result for every player, since the tendency of the production | presentation aspect which is easy to set can be varied, there exists an effect that the production | presentation according to the player can be provided.

<Feature F group> (Adjusting the connection between the first half and the second half)
During the execution of the first effect, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect composed of at least a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect within one effect period; End condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and a first effect for ending the first effect based on the end condition determining means determining that the end condition is satisfied. The length of the period from the end of the first effect by the end means and the first effect end means to the start of the second effect is set based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a period setting means for performing and an effect starting means for starting the second effect based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, a specific effect composed of at least a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect is executed within one effect period by the specific effect executing means. During the execution of the first effect, the end condition determining means determines whether a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the first effect is determined based on the end condition determining means determining that the end condition is satisfied. The first effect is ended by the end means. The length of the period between the end of the first effect by the first effect end means and the start of the second effect is set by the period setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. Based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting means, the second effect is started by the effect starting means.

  Thereby, since the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect can be varied according to the remaining effect time, the specific effect can be suitably executed. is there.

  In the gaming machine F1, the period setting means sets the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect, until the second effect period ends. A gaming machine F2 that sets a length at which the production ends.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1, the length of the period from the end of the first presentation to the start of the second presentation is Since the length at which the two effects end is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed more suitably.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, as the second effect, there is provided type selection means for selecting one effect type from among a plurality of effect types with different effect times, and the period setting means is selected by the type selection means A gaming machine F3, which sets a length of a period from when the first effect is ended to when the second effect is started based on the effect time of the effect type.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, as the second effect, one effect type is selected by the type selecting means from among a plurality of effect types having different effect periods. Based on the production time of the production type selected by the type selection unit, the period setting unit sets the length of the period from the end of the first production to the start of the first production.

  Thereby, since the start timing of the 2nd effect can be set according to the production time of the 2nd effect, there exists an effect that the 2nd effect can be performed more suitably.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, in the first production of one, the upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the execution of the first production of the first A number counting unit that counts the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied, and the end condition is when the number counted by the number counting unit is equal to or more than the upper limit set by the upper limit setting unit. A gaming machine F4 that is at least established.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first production of one, the upper limit of the number of times that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set by the upper limit number setting means. The number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of one first effect is counted by the number counting means. When the number of times counted by the number counting means becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number set by the upper limit setting means, at least the end condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, even if the end timing of the first effect varies according to the upper limit number set by the upper limit setting means, there is an effect that the start of the second effect can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine F4, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period for enabling an operation on the operation means one or more times during execution of the first effect, and Based on the elapse of the operation effective period set by the operation effective period setting means, a first display means for displaying a specific display mode, and the one operation effective set by the operation effective period setting means Second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode after ending the operation valid period based on detecting an operation on the operation unit during a period, wherein the specific condition is the specific mode This game machine F5 is established when the display mode is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are produced. That is, the operation valid period for validating the operation on the operation means operable by the player is set by the operation valid period setting means one or more times during the execution of the first effect. Based on the elapse of the operation effective period set by the operation effective period setting unit, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display unit. Based on the detection of an operation on the operation means during one operation effective period set by the operation effective period setting means, the operation effective period is ended by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed. . A specific condition is established when a specific display mode is displayed.

  Thereby, even if the end timing of the first effect is varied by changing the end timing of the operation effective period according to the timing when the player performs the operation on the operation means, the start of the second effect is suitably set. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, third effect executing means for executing a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect in the period of the length set by the period setting means; Based on the effect data storage means storing effect data for executing the third effect, and the length of the period set by the period setting means, one effect data from the effect data storage means Of the first effect data read by the data read means and data in a range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means. And a data range setting means for setting as data to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are produced. That is, the third effect execution unit executes the third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect in the period set by the period setting unit. Effect data for executing the third effect is stored in the effect data storage means. Based on the setting of the length of the period by the period setting means, one effect data is read from the effect data storage means by the data reading means. Of the one effect data read by the data reading means, data in a range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means is set as data for executing the third effect by the data range setting means. Is done.

  Thereby, when performing a 3rd effect, since the data from which a production period differs based on 1 production data can be set, it can control that the data for performing the 3rd effect will increase. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine F6, at least a part of the effect data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image, and the data range setting unit is configured to display the period of time set by the period setting unit. A gaming machine F7, wherein a data range for executing the third effect is set so that a display time of the specific still image varies according to the length.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F6, the following effects are produced. That is, at least a part of the effect data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image. The data range for executing the third effect is set by the data range setting means so that the display time of the specific still image varies according to the length of the period set by the period setting means.

  Thereby, even if the production time of the third effect is variable, only the display time of the specific still image is variable, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display content. .

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the display unit is capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution unit causing the display unit to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display execution unit. Dynamic display time determining means for determining a dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific effect executing means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed within the determined dynamic display time.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are produced. That is, dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Based on the determination of the dynamic display time by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means within the determined dynamic display time.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a specific production | presentation can be performed within dynamic display time.

<Characteristic G group> (Adjusts the mode after the production with an indefinite production time is finished)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect in one effect period, and an end condition set in advance before the effect period elapses during the execution of the first effect. An end condition determining means for determining whether the end condition is satisfied, an effect ending means for ending the first effect based on the end condition determining means determining that the end condition is satisfied, and the effect ending means And a production mode setting means for setting a production mode from the end of the first production to the end of the production period based on at least the length of the remaining production period. A gaming machine G1 to play.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the specific effect including at least the predetermined first effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in one effect period. During the execution of the first effect, the end condition determining means determines whether a predetermined end condition is satisfied before the effect period elapses. The first effect is ended by the effect end means based on the end condition determining means determining that the end condition is satisfied. An effect mode from the end of the first effect by the effect end means to the end of the effect period is set by the effect mode setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period.

  Thereby, since the effect aspect according to the length of the remaining effect time can be set, there exists an effect that a specific effect can be performed suitably.

  In the gaming machine G1, as the effect mode set by the mode setting unit, there is provided a type selection unit that selects at least one type from among a plurality of types of the effect modes having different effect times. Machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, as a production mode set by the mode setting unit, at least one type of a plurality of types of production modes with different production modes is selected by the type selection unit. Since it is selected, there is an effect that it is possible to set the effect mode of the effect time suitable for the length of the remaining effect period.

  In the gaming machine G2, based on the production time of the production mode selected by the type selection unit and the length of the remaining production period, the production mode setting unit sets the first production after the first production is finished. A gaming machine G3 comprising period setting means for setting a period until the production mode is started.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G2, based on the production time of the production mode selected by the type selection means and the Nagasato of the remaining production period, the production is performed after the first production is finished. Since the period until the production mode set by the mode setting unit is started is set by the period setting unit, the interval between the first production and the production mode can be suitably set. .

  In the gaming machine G3, the period setting unit sets the period so that a timing at which the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting unit ends and a timing at which the presentation period ends are within a predetermined period. A gaming machine G4 that is to be set.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G3, the timing at which the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means ends and the timing at which the presentation period ends fall within a predetermined period. Since the period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably set the end timing of the production mode.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the period setting unit is configured such that the difference between the length of the remaining presentation period at the time when the first presentation is finished and the production time of the production mode of the type selected by the type selection unit. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the period is set as the period.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G3 or G4, the length of the remaining production period at the time when the first production is finished and the production time of the production mode of the type selected by the type selection means Since the difference period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect period and the end timing of the effect mode can be matched.

  The gaming machine G1 includes storage means for storing effect data used for executing the effect mode, and the effect mode setting unit corresponds to the length of the remaining effect period of the one effect data. A gaming machine G6, wherein a range of data to be selected is selected and set.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect data used for executing the effect mode is stored in the storage means. A range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

  Thereby, since a plurality of effect modes having different effect times can be set from one effect data, there is an effect that the amount of data for displaying the effect modes can be reduced.

  The gaming machine G6 includes data selection means for selecting one of the effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means from the plurality of effect data stored in the storage means, and the effect mode setting The means selects and sets a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period among the one effect data selected by the data selection means. .

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G6, the following effects are produced. That is, one piece of effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting unit is selected by the data selection unit from the plurality of effect data stored in the storage unit. The range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period among the one effect data selected by the data selection means is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a production | presentation aspect can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine G7, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a bonus game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in a specific discrimination result A game machine G8, wherein the data selection means selects one of the effect data from the storage means based on at least a determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination means is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. . At least one effect data is selected by the data selection means from the storage means based on the determination result by the determination means.

  Thereby, since it can be made a player predict whether it becomes a privilege game from a production | presentation aspect, there exists an effect that a game can be made to pay attention to a production | generation aspect with respect to a player.

<Characteristic H group> (The time until the right-handed sphere reaches the attacker is made longer than when the left-handed ball is hit)
A first flow path through which game balls launched in a first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which game balls launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, and the first flow path And a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path and a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball can flow at least, and a predetermined value based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. And the second flow path is fired in the second direction more than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. The gaming machine H1 is configured such that a period until the played game ball reaches the entrance means becomes longer.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is a win, the game shifts to a hit state in which the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional game machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded each time a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening during the winning state, so that the player can play a game with one winning state. Can be made.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win a game ball to the big winning opening, it is necessary to fire the game ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, so that the game in the hit state is monotonous. There was a problem of becoming.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, game balls launched in the first direction flow down the first flow path, and game balls fired in a second direction different from the first direction pass through the second flow path. Flow down. The ball entry means is provided at a position where at least the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit. The second period is such that the period until the game ball launched in the second direction reaches the entry means is longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the entry means. A flow path is configured.

  As a result, a player who wants to make the game ball reach the entrance means as soon as possible can be launched while aiming at the first flow path, while taking a relatively long time. A player who wants to reach the ball entry means can launch a game ball aiming at the second flow path. Therefore, since it is possible to select a preferred launch direction for each player and cause the game to be performed, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine H1, the ball entry means is located at a position where the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second flow path is higher than the ratio of the game balls flowing down the first flow path. A gaming machine H2 that is arranged in the above.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1, the percentage of game balls that have flowed down the second flow path is greater than the percentage of game balls that have flowed down the first flow path. Since the ball entry means is disposed at a higher position, if it flows down the first flow path, the period until it reaches the ball entry means is shortened, but it is difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when it flows down the second flow path, although it is easy to enter the ball entry means, the period until it reaches the ball entry means becomes long. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible for the player himself / herself to select the launch direction that matches the taste of each player.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is provided with a decelerating means for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the game ball launched in the second direction enters. There is an effect that the period until reaching the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction more reliably reaches the ball entering means.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to change between a first position at which the game ball can enter the entrance means and a second position at which the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination result by the determination means has resulted in a specific determination result, the variable means from the second position a predetermined number of times A game machine H4, comprising: variable game execution means for executing a variable game that changes to a first position.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is varied between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is harder to enter than the first position. The discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that a specific discrimination result is obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means.

  In the gaming machine H4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a launch interval equal to or greater than a specific launch interval, and during execution of the variable game, the variable means is the second A first variable for changing the variable means to the second position based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entering means after being changed from the position to the first position. And when the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the variable game, the variable means is moved to the first position after a predetermined period has elapsed. And a second variable control means for changing the position to two positions, and starting the launch of the game ball in the second direction during the specific period and then launching in the second direction at the specific launch interval. The specific number of game balls Gaming machine H5, characterized in that than period until after flowing down the second flow path is at least long.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a launch interval that is greater than a specific launch interval. During execution of the variable game, based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of the game balls entered the ball entry means after the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position, 1 is changed to the second position by the variable control means. During execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Is done. At least a specific period from the start of the game ball launching in the second direction until the specific number of game balls fired in the second direction at a specific launch interval finishes flowing down the second flow path Is configured to be longer.

  Thus, when a game ball is fired in the second direction during execution of the variable game, a specific number of game balls can be entered into the entrance means before the specific period elapses. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the person from losing.

  In the gaming machine H4, the variable game executing means has a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position when a specific condition is established during the execution of the variable game. The variable means is controlled to change with a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a lapse of one or more in the specific variable pattern. During the execution period of the first variable operation, the game ball launched in the first direction after the start of the specific variable pattern becomes reachable, and the first variable operation starts after the start of the specific variable pattern. A gaming machine H6, wherein a gaming ball launched in two directions is difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game, the first variable position is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means is changed to the first position. The variable means is controlled to be variable by the variable game execution means in a specific variable pattern including a predetermined number of variable actions. During the execution period of one or more first variable actions in a specific variable pattern, a game ball launched in the first direction after the start of the specific variable pattern becomes reachable, and the specific variable pattern is started It becomes difficult to reach the game ball launched in the second direction after that.

  As a result, when a game ball is launched in the second direction, there is less opportunity for the game ball to enter the entry means than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. There is an effect that can be reminiscent.

  In the gaming machine H6, as a gaming state after the execution of the variable game is finished, a first gaming state is set when a gaming ball does not enter the ball entry means in one variable game, and 1 A game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game; Machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H6, as a gaming state after the execution of the variable game, the game is played when the game ball does not enter the entrance means in one variable game. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, the second that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the ball entry means in one variable game Since the game state is set, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game during the execution of the variable game by paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the first channel causes the game ball that has flowed down to reach the entrance means from a third direction, and the second channel has the game ball that has flowed down the third direction. And the variable means is configured to allow the game ball to flow down on the upper surface while the variable means is being changed to the second position, and The fourth direction side is arranged to be inclined so as to be higher than the third direction side, and the ball entry means is in a state in which the variable means is changed to the first position. In a state where the game ball can enter from above and the variable means is variable to the second position, the upper part is closed by the variable means. From the fourth direction side toward the third direction side Gaming machine H8, characterized in that from the second position by sliding in the direction in which varying the first position.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the ball entry means from the third direction, while the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction. And reach. While the variable means is changed to the second position, the variable means is inclined so that the game ball can flow down on the upper surface thereof, and the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. Are arranged. In the state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the ball entry means is configured such that the game ball can enter from above. Further, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part of the ball entry means is closed by the variable means. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by sliding in the direction from the fourth direction side toward the third direction side.

  This makes it difficult for a game ball that has arrived from the third direction side to enter the entrance means while the variable means is changing to the first position, while a game ball that has arrived from the fourth direction side enters the ball. It becomes easy to do. Therefore, there is a possibility that a game ball that has reached the entrance means in the case of launching in the second direction will enter the entrance means rather than launching a game ball in the first direction during execution of the variable game. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<Characteristic group I> (Right-handed hitting the jackpot is more advantageous than left-handed on one side, but less advantageous than left-handed on another)
Identified by discrimination by a launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition, and the discrimination means The bonus game execution period includes a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the game, and a first factor relating to the player's advantage in the bonus game. A first element advantage means for favoring a player to continue firing a game ball in the first direction rather than continuing to fire the game ball in the second direction during a specific period; and A second element that is different from the element is more advantageous to the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. Providing two-element advantage means Game machine I1 to butterflies.

  Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is a win, the game shifts to a hit state in which the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional game machine, a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player such as a prize ball is given by winning the game ball to the big prize opening during the winning state, so The game can be played in one fun state.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball to the big winning opening, it is necessary to fire the game ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the advantage level in the hit state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired) is determined in advance, there is a possibility that the hit state may be simply an operation of continuously firing the game ball in a predetermined direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the launching means is configured to be able to launch at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. Discrimination is executed by the discriminating unit based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game executing unit based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discriminating unit is a specific discrimination result. The first element relating to the player's degree of advantage in the bonus game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction rather than being continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the bonus game execution period. Is favored by the first element benefiting means. The second element relating to the player's advantage level in the bonus game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction rather than being continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period included in the bonus game execution period. Is favored by the second element advantage means.

  This allows a player who wants to favor the first element during the execution of the privilege game to launch a game ball in the first direction, while the player wants to favor the second element. A game ball can be fired in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gameability suitable for each player's taste.

  In the gaming machine I1, a ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction and a game ball launched in the second direction can enter at least, and to the ball entry means Bonus granting means for granting a prescribed bonus based on the game ball entering, a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the ball entry means more than the first position. And variable means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined first number of times during execution of the bonus game. A gaming machine I2 comprising a control means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where at least the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the ball entering unit. The variable means is varied between a first position where a game ball can enter the entrance means and a second position where entry into the entrance means is more difficult than the first position. During the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means for a predetermined first number of times.

  Thereby, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters the ball entry means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the interest during execution of the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine I2, the first element advantage means is such that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the rate of entering the entering means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I2, it is better that the gaming ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the gaming ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the ratio of entering the entrance means is increased by the first element advantage means, the player who wants to play a game during the execution of the special game with a high percentage of entrance into the entrance means. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be positively fired in the first direction.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the second element advantage means is that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specified period rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction. The game machine I4 is characterized in that the number of game balls reaching the entrance means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specified period rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction. Since the number of game balls reaching the entrance means is increased by the second element advantage means, the player in the second direction positively acts on the player who wants to make more game balls reach the entrance means. There is an effect that a game ball can be fired.

  In the gaming machine I4, the variable control means performs a first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position. The second element benefiting means executes the first number of times during a specific period, and the second element advantage means has a predetermined number of times the first game ball is fired in the first direction. It is possible to suppress reaching the ball entry means until the execution period of the variable operation ends, and at least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is determined by the specific period. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is a period during which a game ball fired in the second direction since it is started can be reached.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are produced. That is, a first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means is changed to the first position is executed by the variable control means a first number of times during a specific period. Is done. By the second element advantage means, the game ball fired in the first direction after the start of the specific period reaches the ball entry means until the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times ends. It is suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the predetermined number of first variable actions is configured by a period during which the game ball launched in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.

  Thereby, the direction in which the game ball is fired in the second direction causes the game ball to reach the ball entry means during the execution of the first variable motion more times than when the game ball is fired in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to obtain more opportunities to enter the entrance means.

  In the gaming machine I5, the second element benefiting unit is configured such that the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering unit is the time period before the game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine I6 that suppresses the flow-down speed of a game ball launched in the first direction so as to be longer than a period until it reaches an entry ball means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I5, the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the entry means is the time when the gaming ball launched in the second direction is entered. Since the flow speed of the game ball fired in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantage means so as to be longer than the period until reaching the means, the game ball fired in the first direction Thus, it is possible to more reliably prevent reaching the ball entry means before the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is launched in the second direction can increase the chances of entering the ball entry means more reliably.

  In the gaming machine I5 or I6, the first variable operation has a predetermined period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position. The variable means is varied so as to be in the second period, and the first element advantage means is configured such that the game ball launched in the second direction is moved to the ball entering means during the second period. It is easier for the game ball launched in the first direction to reach the entrance means during the second period than to enter the entrance means, rather than to reach the entrance means. Characteristic gaming machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5 or I6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means so that the period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position until the end of the change to the first position becomes a predetermined second period. Is variable. A game ball launched in the first direction has reached the entrance means during the second period, compared to a case where the game ball launched in the second direction has reached the entrance means during the second period. It is easier to enter the entrance means by the first element advantage means.

  Thereby, when a game ball is launched in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, also in the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position. Since there is a possibility of entering the entrance means, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the entrance to the entrance means is possible when the game ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has reached the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the first direction than when the game ball is launched in the second direction. effective.

  In the gaming machine I7, a game ball launched in the first direction can flow down, and the flow path of the game ball that has flowed down reaches the entrance means from a third direction; and in the second direction A second flow path through which the launched game ball can flow down and allows the flowed down game ball to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction; and the variable means includes: While being changed to the second position, the upper surface is configured so that a game ball can flow down, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In the state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the ball entry means is capable of entering a game ball from above, and the variable means is the second position. In the state of being variable, the upper is the variable means The first element advantage means is configured to slide the variable means in the direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side, thereby moving the variable means to the first direction. A gaming machine I8 that is variable from two positions to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entry means from the third direction by the first flow path. The game ball fired in the second direction reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction by the second flow path. While the variable means is changed to the second position, a game ball can be formed on the upper surface thereof. Further, the variable means is configured to be inclined so that the third direction side on the upper surface is higher than the fourth direction side. In the state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball can enter the ball entering means from above, while the variable means is changed to the second position. The upper part of is closed by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid in the direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side by the first element advantage means.

  As a result, the game ball which is launched in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period is returned to the fourth direction side by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is difficult to enter the entrance means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball from above earlier than the fourth direction side, so that it is launched in the first direction and from the third direction side during the second period. It is possible to easily enter the game ball that has reached the entrance means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the entrance rate when the game balls launched in the first direction reach the entrance means more reliably than the game balls launched in the second direction.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, a game ball is not entered into the ball entry means during execution of the one privilege game. Game state setting means for setting one game state and setting a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the one privilege game A gaming machine I8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a gaming state after the execution of the bonus game, the gaming ball is entered into the ball entry means during the execution of one bonus game. When the player has not entered the game, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state. Accordingly, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to play a game during the execution of the privilege game, paying attention to whether or not to perform.

<Characteristic J group> (Variable attackers who can easily win game balls that have reached the same area)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area where the game ball launched by the launching means can reach, and a first entrance where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter Means, second ball entry means, first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting unit that grants a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball entering, and a game ball that reaches the specific area enters the first ball entering unit. A second position where it is possible to enter the second entry means, and a second position where entry into the first entry means is difficult and entry into the second entry means is possible. And at least the variable means that can be changed to the position, and the variable means is determined based on the establishment of the first condition. Is varied to the gaming machine characterized by comprising a variable control means for variably to the second position based on the establishment of the different second condition and the first condition J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the specific area is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means capable of launching the game ball can be reached. A first incoming ball means and a second incoming ball means are provided at positions where game balls that have reached a specific area can enter. The first privilege is given by the first privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit, and the first based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit. A second privilege different from the privilege is provided. A variable means allows a game ball that has reached a specific area to enter the first entry means and is difficult to enter the second entry means, and to enter the first entry means. And a second position where the second entry means can enter the ball is at least variable. The variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, while the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition. Variable.

  Accordingly, the ball entry means that allows the game ball that has reached the specific area to enter can be changed according to the variable position of the variable means, so that the game can be performed while paying attention to the variable position of the variable means. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first entry means and the second entry means are arranged on the board surface with a predetermined distance apart from each other, and the variable means is the first entry means. And the second pitching means, and a gaming machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance apart. The variable means is disposed between the first incoming ball means and the second incoming ball means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a structure can be simplified compared with the case where a variable means is provided separately with respect to a 1st entrance means and a 2nd entrance means.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable means includes the first position, the second position, and a third position where it is difficult to enter any of the first entry means and the second entry means. The variable control means is configured to change the variable means from the third position to the first position based on the establishment of the first condition, and to change the variable means. A gaming machine J3 that is variable from the third position to the second position based on the establishment of two conditions.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are produced. That is, at least the variable means is configured to be variable to the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter any of the first and second entrance means. The variable means is changed from the third position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, while the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position based on the establishment of the second condition. Variable by the variable control means.

  As a result, in the state where neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the first entry means and the second entry means. Therefore, either the first condition or the second condition is used. There is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that will be established.

  In the gaming machine J3, the first entry means is provided in a first direction with respect to the specific area, and the second entry means is the first entry means with respect to the specific area. The first position is a position where the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the first direction, and the first position is a second direction different from the direction. The second position is a position where the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the third position is the first direction in which the traveling direction of the game ball has reached the specific area is the first direction. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that it is in a position that tends to be different from both the direction and the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area, while the second ball entry means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area. Is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be the first direction, whereas when it is arranged at the second place value, the game that has reached the specific area The traveling direction of the sphere is likely to be the second direction. On the other hand, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be different from both the first direction and the second direction.

  As a result, the first direction and the second direction are less likely to travel in the first region from the specific region because the possibility that a game ball that has reached the specific region in a state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied is reduced. It is possible to minimize the configuration between the ball entry means and the configuration between the specific area and the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured such that a game ball that has traveled in a traveling direction other than the first direction from the specific area is difficult to enter, and the second ball entry means Is configured such that it is difficult for a game ball that has traveled in a traveling direction other than the second direction to enter the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured to make it difficult for a game ball that has traveled in a traveling direction other than the first direction from entering the specific area. Since the second ball entry means is configured so that a game ball that has traveled in a traveling direction other than the second direction from the specific region is difficult to enter, the game is executed in a state where the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of moving in and out on a board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. The first position is an arrangement in which the first variable member protrudes forward in front of the board surface, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. The first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is disposed so as to protrude to the front side of the board surface. The third position is the first variable member and the first variable member. The two variable members are arranged so as to be buried in the board surface, and the first variable member can project the game ball reaching the specific area to the first ball entry means by protruding from the board surface. The second variable member is formed on the board surface. Gaming machine J6, characterized in that to one in which a game ball which has reached the specific area by projecting constituting the flow path inducible into the second ball entrance means.

  According to the gaming machine J, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are produced. That is, a variable means is comprised by the 1st variable member which can move in and out on a board surface, and the 2nd variable member different from the 1st variable member. In the first position, the first variable member protrudes forward in front of the board surface, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. In the second position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member protrudes forward from the board surface with respect to the board surface. In the third position, the first variable member and the second variable member are arranged buried in the board surface. As the first variable member protrudes from the board surface, a flow path that can guide the game ball that has reached the specific area to the first ball entry means is formed. As the second variable member protrudes from the board surface, a flow path that can guide the game ball that has reached the specific area to the second entry means is configured.

  Thus, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the ball entry means that can enter the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

  In the gaming machine J6, the first entry means and the second entry means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view on the board surface, and the first entry means is The game ball that has arrived from the direction of the second entrance means can be entered, and the game ball that has arrived from another direction is difficult to enter, The two entry means is configured such that a game ball that has arrived from the direction of the first entry means can enter, and a game ball that has reached from another direction is difficult to enter. A gaming machine J7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first entrance means and the second entrance means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view on the board surface. The first entry means is configured such that a game ball that has arrived from the direction of the second entry means can enter, and a game ball that has arrived from another direction is difficult to enter. The second entry means is configured such that a game ball that has arrived from the direction of the first entry means can enter, and a game ball that has arrived from another direction is difficult to enter.

  Thereby, in the state in which the variable means is arranged at the third position, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine J6 or J7, a discriminating unit for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the variable unit from the third position based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating unit results in a specific discrimination result. A game machine J8, comprising: variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times to one position or the second position.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J6 or J7, the following effects are produced. That is, discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position or the second position a predetermined number of times based on the determination result by the determination means being executed by the variable game execution means.

  Thereby, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine J8, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the variable means is variable a predetermined number of times from the third position to the first position during the execution of the variable game. Type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a game and a second variable game in which the variable means is variable a predetermined number of times from the third position to the second position, The gaming machine J9 is characterized in that the first privilege is constituted by a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J8, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the first variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the variable game, and the variable means is in the third position. From the plurality of types including at least the second variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times to the second position, one type is determined by the type determination means. The first privilege is constituted by a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

  Thus, when the first variable game is executed, it is more advantageous to the player than when the second variable game is executed. Therefore, the game is performed paying attention to the type of the variable game determined by the type determining means. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J9, the first variable game is such that the variable means is variable a first number of times from the third position to the first position, and in the second variable game, the variable means is the first variable game. The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that the second number of times less than the first number can be changed from three positions to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is varied from the third position to the first position for the first time, while in the second variable game, the variable means is variable. Since the means is changed from the third position to the second position by a second number less than the first number, when the first variable game is executed, the first privilege that is more advantageous than the second privilege is granted. In addition, the number of times that the variable means is changed to the first position is increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the superiority of the first variable game can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the first entry means and the second entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view on the board surface, and the variable The means is configured to be variable in the left-right direction in a front view between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. The first position is determined by the variable means. The second position is a position where the variable means is close to the second ball entry means, and the third position is a position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine J11 characterized by the position between.

  According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are produced. That is, the first entrance means and the second entrance means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view. The variable means is configured to be variable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the variable means comes close to the first ball entry means, while when the variable means is arranged at the second position, the variable means comes close to the second ball entry means. When the variable means is arranged at the third position value, the variable means is arranged between the first position and the second position.

  Thereby, the position can be switched by a relatively simple operation of moving the variable means to the left and right, so that the variable operation of the variable means can be realized with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine J11, the variable means forms an inclination in which the left side faces downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction, and an inclination in which the right side faces downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. The first ball entry means is capable of entering a game ball that has arrived from the direction of the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter a game ball that has arrived from another direction. The second ball entry means is capable of entering a game ball that has arrived from the direction of the first ball entry means, and a game ball that has reached from another direction. Is configured so that it is difficult to enter, and the first position is such that the game ball that has reached the specific area by the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means is located on the second entrance means side. It is possible to flow down to reach the first entrance means from the direction. Thus, the second position flows down so that the game ball that has reached the specific area by the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means reaches the second incoming means from the direction of the first incoming means. A gaming machine J12 that is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine J12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J11, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the left side surface of the variable means forms a slope that is directed downward from the upper right direction in the front view, and the → side surface of the variable means is formed in a direction that is directed downward from the upper left direction in the front view. . The first entry means is configured such that a game ball that has arrived from the direction of the second entry means can enter, and a game ball that has arrived from another direction is difficult to enter. The second entry means is configured such that a game ball that has arrived from the direction of the first entry means can enter, and a game ball that has reached from another direction is difficult to enter. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means flows down so as to reach the first ball entry means from the direction of the second ball entry means side. It becomes possible. When the variable means is arranged at the second position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means flows down so as to reach the second ball entry means from the direction of the first ball entry means side. It becomes possible.

  Thereby, the game ball can be made to enter the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means simply by causing the game ball to flow down along the inclination of the side surface of the variable means. There is an effect that can be further simplified.

  In the gaming machine J12, the third position is such that the distance between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means is at least a width equivalent to one gaming ball, and the right end of the variable means, The gaming machine J13 is characterized in that a distance equal to or larger than the width of one gaming ball is left between the second entering means.

  According to the gaming machine J13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J12, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the width of one gaming ball between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means. In the state where the above distance is vacant and the distance between the right end of the variable means and the second pitching means is more than the width of one game ball, the variable means is disposed at the third position. There is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the game ball from entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

<Characteristic K group> (The period until a game ball that reaches a specific area enters the attacker is varied in the launch direction)
Launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a game ball launched in the first direction by the launch means, and launching in the second direction A specific area provided at a position where the played game ball can be reached, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter, and a game to the ball entry means A privilege granting unit for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering, a first position at which the ball can be entered into the ball entry unit, and the ball entry unit different from the first position. Based on the fact that a variable means that can change at least a second position at which it is possible to enter the ball and a third position at which it is difficult to enter the ball means, and that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, The first variable means is variable for a predetermined period from the third position to the first position. The variable means is varied by any one of a plurality of variable actions including a variable action and a second variable action in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the second position for the predetermined period. Variable control means for controlling the game ball, and in the state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the game ball that has been launched in the first direction and reached the variable means is the first one. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that a period until the ball enters the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than a game ball that has been launched in two directions and has reached the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the launching means is configured to be capable of firing at least a gaming ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. The specific area is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction by the launching unit and the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter, and a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege grant means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. . A first position at which a player can enter the ball entry means is different from the first position, and a second position at which a user can enter the ball entry means, and a ball entry into the ball entry means is difficult. The variable means is configured to be variable at least in the third position. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable means is variable from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the variable means is variable from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period. The variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable by any one of a plurality of variable actions including at least the second variable action. In a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, a game ball that is launched in the first direction and reaches the variable means enters more than a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the variable means. The period until entering the means is configured to be easily shortened.

  As a result, when the variable means is changed to the first position, a game method for firing the game ball in the first direction for a player who wants to enter the game ball in the ball entering means in a short period of time. On the other hand, it is possible to select a game method for firing a game ball in the second direction for a player who does not wish to immediately enter the game ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, it is difficult for the predetermined period of time for the game ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position and enter the entrance means. A gaming machine K2 characterized by a period of a length.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1, a predetermined period of time the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the variable means that is variable to the first position and enters the entrance means. Since it is composed of a period of time that makes it difficult to sphere, when the variable means is changed to the first position, if the game ball is not fired in the first direction, the game ball is moved to the entry means. Since it becomes difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting the timing of changing to the first position and launching the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the variable means is launched in the first direction and the The period until the ball enters the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the game ball that reaches the variable means, and during the predetermined period, the game ball launched in the second direction is at the first position. The gaming machine K3 is a period of a length that makes it difficult to reach the variable means and to enter the ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the following effects are produced. That is, in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, a game ball that has been launched in the second direction and has reached the variable means is more than a game ball that has been launched in the first direction and has reached the variable means. The period until entering the entering means is likely to be shortened. The predetermined period is constituted by a period of a length that makes it difficult for the game ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position and enter the ball entry means. .

  Thereby, the game nature which makes a player judge quickly the firing direction which becomes easy to enter a ball entry means is realizable. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, based on the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination by the determination means, the variable control means by the variable control means A game machine K4, comprising: variable game execution means for executing a variable game including at least the variable operation of the means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a specific discrimination result is obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means On the basis of the above, since the variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means by the variable control means is executed by the variable game execution means, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the determination result by the determination means. .

  In the gaming machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the first game advantageous to the player as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed If a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, the game state after the execution of the variable game is over the first game state. A gaming machine K5 comprising game state setting means for setting a second game state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed When the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, and the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, execution of the variable game is executed. Since the second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the end, attention is paid depending on whether or not the gaming ball enters the entering means. Thus, a game during execution of the variable game can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player for the variable game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine K4 or K5, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the first variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during the execution of the variable game is the first. And the variable means includes variable game type determining means for determining a second variable game controlled by the second variable action at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. A gaming machine K6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4 or K5, the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during the execution of the variable game as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means. One variable game is determined by the variable game type determining means at the first rate, while the second variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the second variable operation is higher than the first rate by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined at a ratio of 2, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to enter the entry means if the game ball is launched in the second direction when the variable game is executed. . In other words, it is possible to provide a game that predicts a shooting direction that is easy to enter the entry means by using the ratio determined by the variable game type determination means as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine K6, variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable entry means Second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the game ball entering the game, wherein the variable game execution means is configured to change the variable ball entry means during the execution of the variable game. The predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game is changed from the second state to the first state, and the variable pitching means is in the second state during the predetermined period. The gaming machine K7, wherein the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variably operated in one variable operation or the second variable operation.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable entry means is configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific privilege is granted by the second privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the variable pitching unit. During execution of the variable game, the variable game execution means controls the variable control means so that the variable pitching means is changed from the second state to the first state by a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game. At the same time, the variable game execution means controls the variable control means so that the variable means is variably operated in the first variable operation or the second variable operation in a predetermined period of the period in which the variable pitching means is in the second state. Therefore, even when the game ball cannot be entered into the entry means during execution of the variable game, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable entry means is given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player who could not enter the entering means.

  In the gaming machine K7, the first variable game has a larger number of times that the variable pitching means is changed from the second state to the first state during one variable game than in the second variable game. A gaming machine K8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, when the first variable game is reached, the variable pitching means is changed from the second state to the first state during one variable game rather than the second variable game. Since the number of times played is increased, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation of becoming the first variable game.

<Characteristic L group> (Indication of launching a game ball in the V round by predicting the direction in which it is easy to win V)
Launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a game ball launched in the first direction by the launch means, and launching in the second direction A specific area provided at a position where the game ball can be reached, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter, and a variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern And a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the specific area based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is established as a variable pattern that can be set for the variable means Rather than the first condition, a first variable pattern that determines that a game ball that has been launched in the first direction and has reached the specific area is more likely to enter the entry means is determined. Based on the establishment of the first method The second variable pattern that makes it easier for a game ball that has been launched in the second direction and has reached the specific area to enter the entrance means than a game ball that has been launched to reach the specific area. Based on the fact that the variable pattern determining means and the first condition or the second condition are satisfied, the specific effect of the effect mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. A gaming machine L1 comprising: a specific performance executing means to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the launching means is configured to be able to launch at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. The specific area is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction by the launching unit and the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter. The variable means is configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern to be set for the variable means, based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied, the variable pattern determining means is more first than the game ball that has been launched in the second direction and reached the specific area. Based on the fact that a first variable pattern is determined that makes it easier for a game ball that has been launched in a direction and reaches a specific area to enter the entry means, while a second condition different from the first condition is established. Thus, the second variable pattern that makes it easier for a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the specific area to enter the entry means is more variable than a game ball that is launched in the first direction and reaches the specific area. It is determined by the pattern determining means. Based on the first condition or the second condition being satisfied, the specific effect in the effect mode in which it is difficult to recognize which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  As a result, it is difficult to distinguish whether the variable means is changed by the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern from the effect mode. It is possible to realize a game property for launching a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the first variable pattern is such that a game ball launched in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied can enter the entrance means, and A game ball fired in the second direction during a specific period becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means, and the second variable pattern includes a specific period of time after the second condition is satisfied. A game ball launched in the first direction during the time becomes difficult to enter the entry means, and a game ball launched in the second direction during the specified period can enter the entry means. The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect for at least the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the first variable pattern is set, the game balls launched in the first direction during the specific period after the first condition is satisfied enter the entrance means and leave for the specific period. In the meantime, it is difficult for a game ball launched in the second direction to enter the entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, it becomes difficult for a game ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied to enter the entry means, and during the specific period, A game ball launched in two directions can enter the entrance means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for at least the specific period.

  As a result, it is possible to realize the gameability of predicting the direction in which it is easy to enter the ball and launching the game ball for a specific period in the predicted direction, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, based on the determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable pattern determination means determined by the variable pattern determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. A game machine L3, comprising: variable game execution means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means in a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 or 2, the variable pattern determining unit determines whether the determination result by the determining unit executed based on the establishment of the determination condition has resulted in a specific determination result. Since the variable game including at least the variable action of the variable means in the determined variable pattern is executed by the variable game execution means, the game is expected to obtain a specific determination result every time the determination by the determination means is executed. There is an effect that can be performed.

  In the gaming machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the one variable game, the first game advantageous to the player as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. If a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, the game state after the execution of the variable game is over the first game state. A gaming machine L4 comprising game state setting means for setting a second game state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed When the game state setting means sets the first game state advantageous to the player, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, execution of the variable game is performed. Since the second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the game is finished, the game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game The game can be played by paying attention to whether or not to do so. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the variable game.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during the execution of the variable game is a first variable game as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means. And a variable game type determining means for determining a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. A gaming machine L5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during execution of the variable game as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means. While one variable game is determined by the variable game type determining means at the first rate, the second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is higher than the first rate by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined at the second rate, when a variable game is executed, the player may think that it is easier to enter the entry means if the game ball is launched in the second direction. it can. In other words, it is possible to provide a game that predicts a shooting direction that is easy to enter the entry means by using the ratio determined by the variable game type determination means as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine L5, variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable entry means Second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the game ball entering the game, wherein the variable game execution means is configured to change the variable ball entry means during the execution of the variable game. A variable operation in which the variable means is changed by the variable operation determined to be variable from the second state to the first state and the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means a predetermined number of times according to the type of variable game. A gaming machine L6 that performs an operation.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable entry means is configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific privilege is granted by the second privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the variable pitching unit. During execution of a variable game, a variable action for changing the variable pitching means from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game, and the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means The variable operation in which the variable means is changed is executed by the variable game executing means.

  Thus, even when the game ball cannot be entered into the ball entry means during execution of the variable game, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player who could not enter the ball.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. And information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied based on the avoidance of the execution of the specific effect by the avoidance means. A gaming machine L7, comprising: a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the avoidance means avoids that the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Based on the fact that the execution of the specific effect is avoided by the avoidance means, the notification effect execution means executes a notification effect that notifies information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.

  As a result, it is possible to specify the launch direction that makes it easier to enter the entrance means by executing the notification effect, so that the game can be performed in anticipation that the notification effect is executed. effective.

<Characteristic M group> (An attacker who can easily win a prize varies according to the movable position from the start to the end of the movement of the attacker)
A first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means, a first position where a game ball can enter the first entry means, and a game in the first entry means A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the ball is difficult to enter, and the variable means is predetermined from the second position to the first position based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Variable control means for controlling so as to be variable for a period of time, wherein the second ball entry means is configured to change the variable means according to a variable position until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position. A game machine M1 characterized in that the ease of entering a game ball that has reached the variable means is variable.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where the game ball cannot enter the first ball entry means. It is configured to be possible. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. Depending on the variable position until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position, the ease with which the game ball that has reached the variable means enters the second ball entry means varies.

  As a result, depending on the variable position of the variable means, whether it is easy to enter the first ball entry means or whether it is easy to enter the second ball entry means varies, so pay attention to the variable position of the variable means. To play games. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M1, the second ball entry means has reached the variable means in a state where the specific range is variable until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine M2 that is capable of entering a ball.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M1, the game ball that has reached the variable means in a state where the specific range is variable until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position. Since it is possible to enter the second entry means, it is possible to play the game by devising to make the game ball reach the variable means while the variable means is changing the specific range. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M2, the specific range includes at least a range that does not include the first position, and the second entering means is configured to change the variable means when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range. The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that it becomes difficult for a game ball that has reached to enter.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured to include at least a range that does not include the first position, and the variable means when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range. Since it is difficult for the game ball that has reached the second ball entry means to enter the second ball entry means, there is an effect that the timing for launching the game ball can be further devised.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the first entry means and the second entry means are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and the variable means is the first entry means. A first inclined member that is provided between the first incoming means and the second incoming means, and forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in a direction in which the first incoming means is provided; And a second inclined member that forms an inclination capable of causing the game ball to flow down in a direction in which the second ball entry means is provided, and the first position is The game ball that has reached the variable means is easy to flow down the first inclined member and is difficult to flow down the second inclined member, and the second position is a position where the game ball reaches the variable means. It is difficult for the first inclined member and the second inclined member to flow down. Gaming machine M4, which is a position.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first entrance means and the second entrance means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. A first inclined member that is provided between the first incoming ball means and the second incoming ball means and that forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the first incoming ball means is provided; At least the variable means is constituted by the second inclined member that forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the two ball entering means are provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball that has reached the variable means is likely to flow down the first inclined member, and it is difficult to flow down the second inclined member, while the variable means is the second If it arrange | positions in a position, it will become difficult for the game ball which reached | attained the variable means to flow down the 1st inclination member and the 2nd inclination member.

  Thereby, the game ball can be caused to flow down to the respective ball entry means by the inclination formed by the respective inclination members, so that complicated control for guiding the game ball to each ball entry means is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine M4, the variable means is configured to be able to move in and out on the board surface, and the first position is the front side of the first inclined member and the first inclined member in front of the first inclined member. Both of the second inclined members provided on the front surface and the second inclined member are arranged so as to protrude forward in front of the board surface, and the second position includes the first inclined member and the second inclined member. Both of the game machines M5 are arranged so as to be buried in the board surface.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is configured to be able to appear and retract on the board surface. When the variable means is disposed at the first position, both the first inclined member and the second inclined member provided on the front side in front of the first inclined member are in front of the board surface. It becomes the arrangement which protruded to.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the entrance means that can enter the ball can be varied by a simple control of moving the variable means in and out.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, as the variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means, the first variable pattern that is likely to be frequently changed from the second position to the first position; And a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality including at least a second variable pattern that is less likely to be changed from the second position to the first position than the first variable pattern. A gaming machine M6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means is frequently changed from the second position to the first position. The variable pattern determining means changes one by one from a plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern that is likely to be changed and a second variable pattern that is less likely to be changed from the second position to the first position than the first variable pattern. Since the pattern is determined, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means.

  In the gaming machine M6, based on the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, the specific condition is predetermined during one execution period. A game machine M7, comprising: variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is established a number of times.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M6, based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition resulted in a specific discrimination result, during one execution period Since a variable game in which the specific condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained each time the determination by the determination means is executed. There is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M7, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution unit, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination unit when the specific condition is satisfied; Variable game type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine M8 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M7, the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when a specific condition is established as the type of variable game executed by the variable game executing means. One type by a variable game type determining means among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which a second variable pattern is determined by a variable pattern determining means when a specific condition is established Therefore, since the number of times the player can easily enter the second entry means varies depending on the type of variable game, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the type of variable game.

  In the gaming machine M8, the first variable game is one in which the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in one variable game is less than that in the second variable game.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M8, the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in one variable game is less likely to occur in the first variable game than in the second variable game. In this case, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being discouraged when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is small.

<Characteristic N group> (During electric support, an open pattern that is difficult to win an electric chew wins more winning balls than an open pattern that is easy to win an electric chew)
A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a privilege grant means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and a game ball that can enter the ball entry means And a variable means that is variable to a second position at which the game ball is difficult to enter the entrance means than the first position, and based on establishment of a predetermined first condition The variable control means for controlling the variable means so as to vary with a predetermined variable pattern, and the variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern And variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the ball entering means. The variable means in a pattern While being controlled, the second condition that is advantageous for player, the gaming machine is characterized in that the easily obtained than while it is being controlled by said second variable pattern N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball having entered the ball entry unit into which the game ball can enter. The variable means is varied between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable means is variable in a predetermined variable pattern. A variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means includes at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined from the variable patterns by the variable pattern determining means. While the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, the second condition that is advantageous to the player is more easily established than when the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern.

  Thereby, the variable pattern expected by the player can be made different depending on whether priority is given to the ease of establishment of the second condition or priority to the ease of entering the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1, the first variable pattern has a greater number of times the variable means is changed to the first position between the start and end of one variable pattern than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is a total of a period during which the variable means is variable to the first position between the start and end of one variable pattern than the first variable pattern. The gaming machine N2 is configured to be long.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position is greater than the second variable pattern between the start and end of one variable pattern. The second variable pattern is configured such that the total period during which the variable means is changed to the first position is longer between the start and end of one variable pattern than the first variable pattern.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to easily distinguish whether the pattern is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern according to the number of times of being changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, a game ball can enter, and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means is variably operating within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. More than the predetermined privilege based on the second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball is easily guided by the variable means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine N3, comprising: a second privilege granting unit that grants a second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the following effects are produced. In other words, a game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is variably operating within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means is provided. A second privilege more than a predetermined privilege is granted by the second privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the second pitching unit.

  Thereby, more opportunities to acquire the second privilege can be obtained by setting the first variable pattern, so that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the first variable pattern will be set. Can do.

  In the gaming machine N3, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter, and the variable means performs a variable operation on the predetermined range. The flowing game balls are likely to be reflected to the specific area, and the specific area is at least in a state where the variable means is disposed at the first position or the second position. A gaming machine N4, which is an area where it is difficult for a game ball flowing down to the variable means to reach.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3, the following effects are produced. That is, the second entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter. When the variable means is variably operated within a predetermined range, it is easy to reflect the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area. The specific area is configured so that it is difficult for a game ball that has flowed down to the variable means in a state where the variable means is disposed at least in the first position or the second position.

  As a result, the game can be played by devising the game ball to reach the variable means while the predetermined range is variably operated, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, a first discriminating unit capable of executing a first discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entering unit, and a first discriminating by the first discriminating unit. Based on the determination result, the bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player, and the second entry based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition that is at least different from the ball entering the ball entering means. A second discriminating unit capable of discriminating, wherein the variable control unit determines that the first condition is satisfied and that the variable pattern is determined by determining that the second discrimination result is obtained by the discriminating by the second discriminating unit. A gaming machine N5, wherein the variable means is controlled to vary according to a variable pattern determined by the means.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the game is based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means. A privilege game advantageous to the user is executed by the privilege game execution means. The second determination means executes the second determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from that for entering the ball entering means. The variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is varied by the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means, assuming that the second determination result is the second determination result and the first condition is satisfied.

  Accordingly, since the first determination is executed by entering the ball entry means, the game ball is entered into the ball entry means while the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern. There is an effect that it is possible to play a game paying attention to whether or not a player enters the ball.

  In the gaming machine N5, as the type of the special game executed by the special game execution means, the first special game in which the gaming state after the execution of the special game is set to the first gaming state, and the special game A type of the award game is determined from a plurality including at least a second award game in which the gaming state after the game execution is finished is set to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. A gaming machine N6, wherein the first gaming state is less likely to be the second discrimination result in the second discrimination than the second gaming state. .

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N5, the following effects are produced. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, after the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution of the privilege game is ended is set to the first game state and the execution of the privilege game is ended. The award game type determining means determines the type of one award game from a plurality including at least a second award game that is set to a second gaming state that is different from the first gaming state. The first gaming state is configured to be less likely to be the second determination result in the second determination than in the second gaming state.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the type of privilege game determined by the privilege game type determining means.

  In the gaming machine N6, the first variable pattern has a greater number of times that the variable means is changed to the first position between the start and end of one variable pattern than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is a total of a period during which the variable means is variable to the first position between the start and end of one variable pattern than the first variable pattern. The second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the first gaming state is the second determination result determined by the second determination means. The gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the determination ratio of the game machine is higher than that in the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position is greater than the second variable pattern between the start and end of one variable pattern. In the first gaming state, the determination ratio of the second variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means when the second determination result is the second determination result is higher than that in the second gaming state.

  As a result, in the first gaming state, the first determination can be efficiently performed by the game balls entering the ball entry means relatively frequently. Further, when the first variable pattern is determined in the first gaming state, the second condition is easily established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game paying attention to the type of the variable pattern.

  In the gaming machine N7, a game ball that can enter the game and reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. Second ball entry means provided at a position where the ball is easily guided by the variable means, and second more than the predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means for granting a bonus of the game, and a first ball by the first discriminator when the game ball launched in the first direction is provided at a position where the ball can enter. The first direction is determined based on the specific entry means that is executed and the second determination result in the second gaming state and the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means. Launch a game ball in a second direction different from Suggesting effect executing means for executing a second direction suggesting effect that suggests, and the entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A gaming machine N8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N7, the following effects are produced. In other words, a game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is variably operating within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second privilege granting means gives a second benefit more than a predetermined privilege. There is provided a specific ball entry means for executing the first discrimination by the first discrimination means when the game ball enters at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. Based on the second determination result in the second gaming state and the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determining means, it is suggested that the game ball be fired in a second direction different from the first direction. The second direction suggesting effect is executed by the suggesting effect executing means. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter.

  Thereby, when the 1st variable pattern is determined, there exists an effect that the opportunity which acquires a 2nd privilege can be given reliably to a player.

<Characteristic O group> (Navid in the direction of the electric support at the disadvantageous electric support opening pattern)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a entrance means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction by the launch means can enter, and a game ball enters the entrance means Based on that, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege, a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Variable means capable of changing to a second position, variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and the variable control means As the variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, the variable pattern includes at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern. One of the variable patterns A variable pattern determination means for determining a change pattern, and a suggestion effect suggesting the launch of a game ball in the specific direction can be executed at least while the variable means is controlled by the variable control means with the first variable pattern. A game machine O1, comprising: an effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction by the launch means capable of launching a game ball can enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the ball entering unit. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means more easily than the first position. Yes. The variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable means changes in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. A plurality of variable patterns in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable combination pattern that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Among the variable patterns, one variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means. While the variable means is controlled with the first variable pattern by at least the variable control means, the suggestion effect suggesting the launch of the game ball in the specific direction is executed by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the maximum opportunity to enter the game ball into the ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine O1, a second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Based on the second privilege granting means for granting the second privilege based on the ball, the first gaming state in which the specific condition is likely to be established based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the first gaming state Gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the effect executing means is configured such that the second gaming state is The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed based on the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determination means in the set state.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter. A second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the second pitching means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state in which the specific condition is easily established and a second gaming state in which the specific condition is less likely to be established than the first gaming state. One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Based on the fact that the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means while the second game state is set, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, since the launch direction of the game ball can be varied according to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of distinguishing the launch direction of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine O2, a determination unit capable of performing determination based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit, and a determination result by the determination unit provides a specific determination result. And a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine O2, a specific discrimination result is obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance means or the second entrance means. Since the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the fact that the determination is made, there is an effect that it can be expected that a specific determination result is obtained each time the determination by the determination means is executed.

  In the gaming machine O3, the gaming state setting means sets one gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition that the completion condition of execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is satisfied. A gaming machine O4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O3, the gaming condition setting means sets one gaming state as the establishment of a predetermined setting condition that the completion condition for executing the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the game state set after the end of the bonus game.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means is changing a predetermined variable range while changing from the second position to the first position, the variable means is more than the predetermined privilege. 3 A gaming machine O5 that forms a state in which a privilege is easily granted.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means varies the predetermined variable range during the change from the second position to the first position, Since a state is formed in which a third score more easily than the bonus of is formed, it is possible to make the game play by devising to reach the variable means while changing the predetermined variable range it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O5, a position where the game ball can enter and the game ball that has reached the variable means while the variable means is changing the predetermined movable range is easily guided by the variable means. And a third privilege granting means for granting the third privilege based on the game ball entering the third pitching means. Game machine O6 to play.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third variable means for allowing the game ball to enter is provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is changing the predetermined movable range. . A third privilege is granted by the third privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the third pitching means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the third ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine O6, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter, and the variable means variably operates within the predetermined movable range. In this case, it is easy to reflect the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area, and at least the variable means is disposed at the first position or the second position in the specific area. The game machine O7 is a region where the game ball flowing down to the variable means is difficult to reach.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O6, the following effects are produced. That is, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that reaches a specific area on the board can enter. When the predetermined movable range is variably operated, the flowing game balls are easily reflected to the specific area by the variable means. The specific area is variable in a state in which a game ball that has flowed down to the variable means in a state where at least the variable means is arranged in the first position or the second position is arranged in the first position or the second position. The game ball that has flowed down to the point becomes difficult to reach.

  Thereby, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the path of the game ball, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, A gaming machine Z1 according to any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, A gaming machine Z3, wherein in any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, and O1 to O7, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
112 Firing control device (firing means)
655La Left chance change entrance (entrance means)
655Ra right chance change prize entrance (entrance means)
650Lb, 650Rb Movable member (variable means)
S214 Variable game executing means S305 Discriminating means S306 Variable game type determining means S1103 Variable pattern determining means S1202, S1203 Game state setting means

Claims (5)

Launching means capable of firing at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction;
A specific area provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction by the launch means and the game ball launched in the second direction can be reached;
A ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball reaching the specific area can enter,
Variable means provided in the specific area and capable of variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern;
As a variable pattern to be set for the variable means, based on the fact that a predetermined first condition has been established, a game ball that has been launched in the second direction and has reached the specific area in the first direction. Based on the fact that a game variable that has been launched and reaches the specific area determines a first variable pattern that makes it easier to enter the entry means, and a second condition different from the first condition is established, A second variable that makes it easier for a game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area to enter the entry means than a game ball launched in the first direction and reached the specific area. Variable pattern determining means for determining a pattern;
Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect of an effect mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied based on the first condition or the second condition being satisfied And a gaming machine comprising: In the first variable pattern, a game ball launched in the first direction during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied can enter the ball entry means, and during the specific period The game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to enter the entry means,
In the second variable pattern, a game ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied becomes difficult to enter the entry means, and during the specific period A game ball launched in the second direction can enter the entrance means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific effect executing unit executes the specific effect at least during the specific period. Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition;
Variable game execution means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means based on the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means based on the determination result obtained by the determination means; A gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, comprising:   When a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, the first game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, If a game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of one variable game, the game state after execution of the variable game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. 4. A gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state.   As a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during execution of the variable game is determined at a first ratio, 5. The variable game type determining means for determining a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means at a second rate higher than the first rate is provided. The gaming machine described.

Images